Operations Manual

For

ATMS™

Advanced Traffic Management System (ATMS)

Version 2.9
Build 5.9.x
June 2019.
522 Gillingham
Sugar Land, Texas 77478
Phone: (281) 240-7233
Fax: (281) 240-7238

© Copyright 2019 Cubic/Trafficware

All rights reserved
 Terms of Use Agreement
USE OF THIS SOFTWARE MANUAL IS SUBJECT TO THESE TERMS OF USE.
Agreement
Please read this User Agreement carefully before using the information provided in this Manual. This Agreement explains the terms and conditions
governing the use of this Manual ("Terms of Use"), and it is your responsibility to read and understand them. By using the Manual, you expressly agree
to be bound by these Terms of Use and to follow them as well as all applicable laws and regulations governing the Manual. If you do not agree to be
bound by these Terms of Use, you may not access or use this Manual. Cubic/Trafficware reserves the right to change these Terms of Use at any time,
effective immediately upon posting the Manual from our company website. By continuing to use the Manual after we post any such change, you accept
the revised Terms of Use. If you violate these Terms of Use, Cubic/Trafficware may terminate your use of the Manual, bar you from future use of the
Manual, and take appropriate legal action against you.
Permitted Use
You agree that you are only authorized to read, view and retain a copy of pages of this Manual for your own personal use, and that you will not
duplicate, download, publish, modify or otherwise distribute the material on this Manual for any purpose other than to review product information for
personal use or the use of a government or non-profit organization.
No Commercial Use
Users may not use this Manual for any commercial purposes such as to sell merchandise or services of any kind. You must obtain our prior written
consent to make commercial offers of any kind, whether by advertisements, solicitations, links, or by any other form of communication.
Cubic/Trafficware will investigate and take appropriate legal action against anyone who violates this provision.
Copyright
All content included on this Manual, including text, graphics, logos, icons, images, and software is the property of Cubic/Trafficware or its content
suppliers and is protected by United States and international copyright laws. This compilation (that is, the collection, arrangement and assembly) of all
content on this Manual is the exclusive property of Cubic/Trafficware and is protected by U.S. and international copyright laws. Cubic/Trafficware
reserves the right to revise the pages of the Manual or withdraw access to them at any time.
Trademarks
The logo and trademarks that appear throughout the Manual belong to Cubic/Trafficware, its affiliates or third party trademark owners, and are protected
by U.S. and international trademark laws. Without express prior written permission, you may not display or use in any manner, the logos or trademarks.
Nothing in this Manual shall be construed as granting any license or other right to the intellectual property or other proprietary rights of
Cubic/Trafficware, its affiliates or any third party, whether by estoppels, implication or otherwise. All contents of the Manual are: © Copyright 2019
Cubic/Trafficware or its licensors. All Rights Reserved.
Disclaimer of Warranty
YOU UNDERSTAND AND EXPRESSLY AGREE THAT YOUR USE OF THE MANUAL AND THE INFORMATION FOUND THERE IS
ENTIRELY AT YOUR RISK. CUBIC/TRAFFICWARE, ITS AFFILIATES AND LICENSORS MAKE NO WARRANTIES OR ANY
REPRESENTATIONS OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF TITLE
OR NON-INFRINGEMENT OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, NON-
INFRINGEMENT OR OTHER VIOLATION OF RIGHTS IN RELATION TO THE AVAILABILITY, ACCURACY, VALIDITY,
COMPLETENESS, RELIABILITY OR CONTENT OF THESE PAGES AND/OR THE MANUAL. CUBIC/TRAFFICWARE SHALL NOT BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, LOST PROFITS OR FOR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THIS MANUAL, EVEN IF CUBIC/TRAFFICWARE HAS BEEN
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW, YOU HEREBY RELEASE
AND FOREVER WAIVE ANY AND ALL CLAIMS YOU MAY HAVE AGAINST CUBIC/TRAFFICWARE, ITS AFFILIATES AND LICENSORS
FROM LOSSES OR DAMAGES YOU SUSTAIN IN CONNECTION WITH YOUR USE OF THE MANUAL.
SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW EXCLUSION OF CERTAIN WARRANTIES OR LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY, SO THE ABOVE
LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. THE LIABILITY OF CUBIC/TRAFFICWARE WOULD IN SUCH CASE BE
LIMITED TO THE GREATEST EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW.
Applicable Law
These Terms of Use and all legal issues related to the Manual shall be governed by the laws of the State of Texas, without regard to conflict of laws
principles. You agree that any dispute involving these Terms of Use or this Manual will be heard in a court with jurisdiction in Fort Bend County,
Texas. You further agree that the prevailing party in any legal action will be entitled to recover its reasonable attorney’s fees incurred in connection
with that action. If for any reason a court of competent jurisdiction finds any provision of these Terms of Use to be unenforceable, the remaining terms
will continue in full force and effect.
Entire Agreement
These Terms of Use are the final and entire agreement between you and Cubic/Trafficware with respect to this subject and replace any
and prior or contemporaneous understandings or agreements, written or oral, regarding the subject matter. Any waiver of any provision
of these Terms of Use shall be effective only if in writing and signed by an authorized representative of Cubic/Trafficware.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 2

 1 Table of Contents
1 Table of Contents .........................................................................................................................................................................3
2 ATMS Overview....................................................................................................................................................................... 11
ATMS Components and Optional Modules........................................................................................................................ 11
2.1 System Architecture ...................................................................................................................................................... 12
2.1.1 IIS Reset..................................................................................................................................................................... 13
2.1.2 Communications Server ............................................................................................................................................. 14
2.1.3 Administrator ............................................................................................................................................................. 14
2.1.4 Signal Service ............................................................................................................................................................ 15
2.1.5 Other Services ............................................................................................................................................................ 15
2.1.6 Proxy Server .............................................................................................................................................................. 16
2.1.7 ATMS Configurator ................................................................................................................................................... 17
2.1.8 Client ......................................................................................................................................................................... 18
2.1.9 Installing the ATMS Client ........................................................................................................................................ 18
2.2 ATMS Control Hierarchy ............................................................................................................................................ 19
2.3 Getting Connected to the ATMS System ..................................................................................................................... 21
2.3.1 Installing an ATMS Client over a Network ............................................................................................................... 21
2.3.2 Remote Access Connection ....................................................................................................................................... 22
2.3.3 ATMS Status Monitor ............................................................................................................................................... 23
3 Getting Started ........................................................................................................................................................................... 25
3.1 Logging On to ATMS ................................................................................................................................................... 25
3.2 User Customization Interface and Options ................................................................................................................... 31
3.2.1 Ribbon Sizing ............................................................................................................................................................ 35
3.3 Module Selection and Basic Screen Navigation ........................................................................................................... 35
3.4 Overview of the Home Module .................................................................................................................................... 36
3.4.1 General Information ................................................................................................................................................... 36
3.4.2 Search Engine Tool.................................................................................................................................................... 38
3.4.3 Real-Time Scan Icon ................................................................................................................................................. 39
3.4.4 Actions ....................................................................................................................................................................... 40
3.5 Overview of the Definitions Module ............................................................................................................................ 42
3.6 Overview of the Reports Module .................................................................................................................................. 45
3.7 Context Sensitive Help ................................................................................................................................................. 47
3.8 Help Module ................................................................................................................................................................. 47
4 Home Module – Overview......................................................................................................................................................... 48
4.1 System Overview Pane ................................................................................................................................................. 48
4.2 List View ...................................................................................................................................................................... 51
4.2.1 Field Chooser ............................................................................................................................................................. 52

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 3

4.2.2 Column Order ............................................................................................................................................................ 56
4.2.3 Status Columns .......................................................................................................................................................... 58
4.2.4 GIS Map View ........................................................................................................................................................... 59
4.3 GIS Map Navigation Toolbar ....................................................................................................................................... 66
4.3.1 GIS Legend ................................................................................................................................................................ 74
4.4 Bing Map View............................................................................................................................................................. 76
4.4.1 Maneuvering the Map ................................................................................................................................................ 77
4.4.2 Bing Search Tool ....................................................................................................................................................... 79
4.4.3 Map Option Area ....................................................................................................................................................... 80
4.4.4 Real-time data: Controller Status ............................................................................................................................... 82
4.4.5 Real-time data: Congestion Status ............................................................................................................................. 83
4.4.6 Real-time data: Scan Data .......................................................................................................................................... 84
4.4.7 Tooltip On/Off: .......................................................................................................................................................... 85
4.4.8 Map Selection Filters ................................................................................................................................................. 86
4.4.9 Moving Selected Data ................................................................................................................................................ 87
4.4.10 Map Legend Area .................................................................................................................................................... 89
4.4.11 Bing Map Presets ..................................................................................................................................................... 90
4.4.12 Map Navigation Area ............................................................................................................................................... 91
4.4.13 Group Copy/Paste/Delete Controllers and Scan Elements from Bing Map ........................................................... 108
4.5 Google Map Interface ................................................................................................................................................. 113
4.5.1 Google Map Editor .................................................................................................................................................. 114
4.6 Detail Pane .................................................................................................................................................................. 117
4.6.1 Recent Alarms Tab .................................................................................................................................................. 120
4.6.2 Alarm History Tab ................................................................................................................................................... 121
4.6.3 Current Alarms Tab ................................................................................................................................................. 122
4.6.4 Controller Specific Alarms ...................................................................................................................................... 123
4.6.5 ATMS Specific Alarms ........................................................................................................................................... 129
4.6.6 System Notes Tab .................................................................................................................................................... 130
4.6.7 Incident Trigger Tab ................................................................................................................................................ 131
4.6.8 Adaptive Tab ........................................................................................................................................................... 132
4.6.9 Daktronics Tab......................................................................................................................................................... 133
4.6.10 Opticom Tab .......................................................................................................................................................... 134
4.6.11 Current Users ......................................................................................................................................................... 135
4.6.12 Selected Details Tabs ............................................................................................................................................. 136
4.7 Understanding the ATMS File System ...................................................................................................................... 145
4.7.1 Upload File .............................................................................................................................................................. 145

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 4

 4.7.2 Permanent File ......................................................................................................................................................... 146
4.7.3 Standard File ............................................................................................................................................................ 146
4.7.4 Special Files ............................................................................................................................................................. 146
4.8 Upload - Download in ATMS..................................................................................................................................... 147
4.8.1 Uploading in ATMS ................................................................................................................................................ 147
4.8.2 Downloading in ATMS ........................................................................................................................................... 148
4.9 ATMS Laptop Partner and StreetSync Database Synchronization ............................................................................ 151
4.9.1 Upload Sync ............................................................................................................................................................. 151
4.10 Summary – Understanding the ATMS File System .................................................................................................. 151
4.11 Lock User Feature ..................................................................................................................................................... 152
5 Navigator Tool Bar – Home Module ....................................................................................................................................... 155
5.1 Actions ........................................................................................................................................................................ 157
5.1.1 LIST-Based Selection .............................................................................................................................................. 158
5.1.2 GIS Map-Based Selection ........................................................................................................................................ 159
5.2 Database...................................................................................................................................................................... 162
5.2.1 Database Edit ........................................................................................................................................................... 162
5.2.2 Database View ......................................................................................................................................................... 176
5.2.3 Database Upload ...................................................................................................................................................... 177
5.2.4 Database Download ................................................................................................................................................. 178
5.2.5 Database Compare ................................................................................................................................................... 180
5.2.6 Coordination Diagnostics......................................................................................................................................... 182
5.2.7 Database Copy ......................................................................................................................................................... 184
5.2.8 Database Archive ..................................................................................................................................................... 185
5.2.9 Convert Database ..................................................................................................................................................... 187
5.2.10 Local Download ..................................................................................................................................................... 189
5.2.11 33x Configurator .................................................................................................................................................... 193
5.2.12 Upload Sync ........................................................................................................................................................... 195
5.2.13 Overview Screen and Detail Pane Toolbars........................................................................................................... 196
5.3 Real-Time ................................................................................................................................................................... 197
5.3.1 Scan Screens ............................................................................................................................................................ 198
5.3.2 On Demand Scan and On Demand RYG Scanning ................................................................................................. 205
5.3.3 Instant Pattern .......................................................................................................................................................... 206
5.3.4 Instant Preempt ........................................................................................................................................................ 207
5.3.5 Phase Call ................................................................................................................................................................ 208
5.3.6 Ped Call .................................................................................................................................................................... 209
5.3.7 Instant Special Function (Output Control) ............................................................................................................... 210
5.3.8 Download Real-Time ............................................................................................................................................... 211

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 5

5.3.9 School Zone Manual Flash ...................................................................................................................................... 212
5.3.10 Conflict / MMU Report ......................................................................................................................................... 212
5.3.11 Conflict / MMU Trace ........................................................................................................................................... 213
5.3.12 Conflict / MMU Programming .............................................................................................................................. 214
5.3.13 Opticom Time Update ........................................................................................................................................... 214
5.3.14 Coord Failure per Phase – Status ........................................................................................................................... 215
5.3.15 Coord Failure per Phase – Reset ............................................................................................................................ 215
5.3.16 Clear Alarms .......................................................................................................................................................... 216
5.3.17 Time Space Diagram ............................................................................................................................................. 217
5.3.18 Clear Comm Status ................................................................................................................................................ 220
5.3.19 Real Time Master................................................................................................................................................... 221
5.4 Utilities ....................................................................................................................................................................... 223
5.4.1 Time of Day Schedule ............................................................................................................................................. 223
5.4.2 Notes ........................................................................................................................................................................ 224
5.4.3 Documents ............................................................................................................................................................... 226
5.4.4 Broadcast Message .................................................................................................................................................. 227
5.4.5 Sort Day Plans ......................................................................................................................................................... 228
5.4.6 Excel Export ............................................................................................................................................................ 230
5.4.7 Day Plan Report ....................................................................................................................................................... 231
5.5 Communication Status ................................................................................................................................................ 233
5.5.1 Admin Event Status ................................................................................................................................................. 233
5.5.2 Server Status ............................................................................................................................................................ 234
5.5.3 Server Activity ......................................................................................................................................................... 235
5.5.4 Clear Comm Status Buffer ....................................................................................................................................... 235
5.5.5 Admin Update .......................................................................................................................................................... 236
5.6 Configuration .............................................................................................................................................................. 237
5.6.1 Create Definition..................................................................................................................................................... 237
5.6.2 Create From ............................................................................................................................................................. 242
5.6.3 Edit Definition ......................................................................................................................................................... 242
5.6.4 Delete Definition...................................................................................................................................................... 243
5.6.5 Intersection Layout .................................................................................................................................................. 244
5.6.6 Edit Turn/Phase/Directions ...................................................................................................................................... 255
5.6.7 Edit Intersection Link Speed .................................................................................................................................... 260
5.6.8 Congestion Level ..................................................................................................................................................... 262
5.6.9 User Defined Detector Groups ................................................................................................................................. 264
5.7 Synchro Integration..................................................................................................................................................... 265

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 6

 5.7.1 Enhanced Synchro Integration ................................................................................................................................. 265
5.7.2 UTDF Synchro Import / Export ............................................................................................................................... 286
5.8 Analytics ..................................................................................................................................................................... 288
5.8.1 Alarms Dashboard ................................................................................................................................................... 288
6 Definitions Module .................................................................................................................................................................. 310
6.1 Alarm .......................................................................................................................................................................... 312
6.1.1 Alternate Alarm Description .................................................................................................................................... 312
6.1.2 Active Alarm Selection ............................................................................................................................................ 313
6.2 Alarm Notification ...................................................................................................................................................... 316
6.2.1 List Alarm Notification ............................................................................................................................................ 316
6.2.2 Create Alarm Notification ....................................................................................................................................... 316
6.2.3 Edit Alarm Notification ........................................................................................................................................... 319
6.2.4 Delete Alarm Notification ....................................................................................................................................... 319
6.3 Backup and Archive.................................................................................................................................................... 320
6.3.1 Archive Database ..................................................................................................................................................... 320
6.3.2 Backup Database...................................................................................................................................................... 321
6.3.3 Replicate Database ................................................................................................................................................... 323
6.4 Controllers Offline ...................................................................................................................................................... 324
6.4.1 Offline List............................................................................................................................................................... 324
6.5 Camera Tour ............................................................................................................................................................... 325
6.5.1 List Camera Tour ..................................................................................................................................................... 325
6.5.2 Create Camera Tour ................................................................................................................................................. 326
6.5.3 Edit Camera Tour..................................................................................................................................................... 327
6.5.4 Delete Camera Tour ................................................................................................................................................. 328
6.5.5 Run Camera Tour..................................................................................................................................................... 328
6.6 Congestion .................................................................................................................................................................. 328
6.6.1 List External Detector Mapping ............................................................................................................................... 329
6.6.2 Edit External Detector Mapping .............................................................................................................................. 330
6.6.3 Segment Editor (GIS Mapping only) ....................................................................................................................... 331
6.7 Devices ....................................................................................................................................................................... 338
6.7.1 List Devices ............................................................................................................................................................. 338
6.7.2 Create Device........................................................................................................................................................... 339
6.7.3 Edit Devices ............................................................................................................................................................. 356
6.7.4 Delete Devices ......................................................................................................................................................... 357
6.7.5 Device POI (Point of Interest) ................................................................................................................................. 357
6.8 Device Event Notification .......................................................................................................................................... 359
6.8.1 List Device Event Notification ................................................................................................................................ 359

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 7

6.8.2 Create Device Event Notification ............................................................................................................................ 359
6.8.3 Edit Device Event Notification ................................................................................................................................ 360
6.8.4 Delete Device Event Notification ............................................................................................................................ 361
6.9 Device Flex Group ...................................................................................................................................................... 362
6.9.1 List Device Flex Group ............................................................................................................................................ 362
6.9.2 Create Device Flex Group ....................................................................................................................................... 363
6.9.3 Edit Device Flex Group ........................................................................................................................................... 363
6.9.4 Delete Device Flex Group ....................................................................................................................................... 364
6.10 Device and Event Locations ..................................................................................................................................... 365
6.11 Events ....................................................................................................................................................................... 369
6.11.1 List Events ............................................................................................................................................................. 369
6.11.2 Create Event........................................................................................................................................................... 369
6.11.3 Edit Events ............................................................................................................................................................. 371
6.11.4 Delete Events ......................................................................................................................................................... 371
6.12 Flex Groups .............................................................................................................................................................. 372
6.12.1 List Flex Group ...................................................................................................................................................... 373
6.12.2 Create Flex Group .................................................................................................................................................. 374
6.12.3 Create Flex Group From ........................................................................................................................................ 374
6.12.4 Edit Flex Group ..................................................................................................................................................... 376
6.12.5 Delete Flex Group .................................................................................................................................................. 377
6.13 GIS ............................................................................................................................................................................ 378
6.13.1 GIS – List Presets .................................................................................................................................................. 378
6.13.2 GIS – Delete Presets .............................................................................................................................................. 379
6.14 Groups ...................................................................................................................................................................... 380
6.14.1 List Group .............................................................................................................................................................. 380
6.14.2 Create Group .......................................................................................................................................................... 381
6.14.3 Edit Group ............................................................................................................................................................. 381
6.14.4 Delete Group .......................................................................................................................................................... 382
6.15 Incident Trigger ........................................................................................................................................................ 383
6.15.1 List Incident Triggers ............................................................................................................................................. 383
6.15.2 Create Incident Trigger .......................................................................................................................................... 384
6.15.3 Edit Incident Trigger .............................................................................................................................................. 387
6.15.4 Delete Incident Trigger .......................................................................................................................................... 387
6.16 Jurisdiction ................................................................................................................................................................ 388
6.16.1 List Jurisdictions .................................................................................................................................................... 389
6.16.2 Create Jurisdiction ................................................................................................................................................. 389
6.16.3 Edit Jurisdiction ..................................................................................................................................................... 390

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 8

6.16.4 Delete Jurisdiction ................................................................................................................................................. 391
6.17 Messages ................................................................................................................................................................... 391
6.17.1 List Messages ......................................................................................................................................................... 392
6.17.2 Create Message ...................................................................................................................................................... 392
6.17.3 Edit Message .......................................................................................................................................................... 393
6.17.4 Delete Message ...................................................................................................................................................... 393
6.18 Monitor ..................................................................................................................................................................... 394
6.18.1 List Monitors ......................................................................................................................................................... 394
6.18.2 Create Monitor ....................................................................................................................................................... 395
6.18.3 Edit Monitor........................................................................................................................................................... 396
6.18.4 Delete Monitor ....................................................................................................................................................... 396
6.19 Report Criteria .......................................................................................................................................................... 397
6.20 Scan Builder.............................................................................................................................................................. 399
6.21 Scheduler .................................................................................................................................................................. 407
6.21.1 List Schedules ........................................................................................................................................................ 407
6.21.2 Create Schedule ..................................................................................................................................................... 408
6.21.3 Create From Schedule ............................................................................................................................................ 412
6.21.4 Edit Schedule ......................................................................................................................................................... 413
6.21.5 Delete Schedule ..................................................................................................................................................... 413
6.21.6 Instant Report ......................................................................................................................................................... 414
6.22 Users ......................................................................................................................................................................... 415
6.22.1 List Users ............................................................................................................................................................... 415
6.22.2 Create User ............................................................................................................................................................ 415
6.22.3 Create User From ................................................................................................................................................... 420
6.22.4 Edit User Properties ............................................................................................................................................... 420
6.22.5 Delete User ............................................................................................................................................................ 421
6.22.6 Change Password ................................................................................................................................................... 421
6.23 User Distribution ...................................................................................................................................................... 422
6.23.1 List User Distributions ........................................................................................................................................... 422
6.23.2 Create User Distributions ....................................................................................................................................... 423
6.23.3 Edit User Distribution Properties ........................................................................................................................... 423
6.23.4 Delete User Distribution ........................................................................................................................................ 424
6.24 User Groups .............................................................................................................................................................. 425
6.24.1 List User Groups .................................................................................................................................................... 425
6.24.2 Create User Groups ................................................................................................................................................ 426
6.24.3 Create User Group From ........................................................................................................................................ 429
6.24.4 Edit User Group Properties .................................................................................................................................... 429

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 9

 6.24.5 Delete User Group ................................................................................................................................................. 430
6.25 Vehicle Classification/Counters – JAMAR File Import ........................................................................................... 431
7 Reports Module........................................................................................................................................................................ 433
7.1 Search Engine for Definitions Module ....................................................................................................................... 434
7.2 Report List Tools ........................................................................................................................................................ 436
7.3 Generating A Specific Report ..................................................................................................................................... 437
7.4 Report Criteria ............................................................................................................................................................ 438
7.4.1 Scheduling reports using Report Criteria ................................................................................................................. 439
7.5 High Resolution Data Logging (Purdue) Reports ....................................................................................................... 440
7.5.1 Purdue Coordination Diagram ................................................................................................................................. 442
7.5.2 Purdue High Resolution Reports ............................................................................................................................. 447
7.5.3 Purdue Phase Termination Diagram ........................................................................................................................ 449
7.5.4 Purdue Split Monitor Report .................................................................................................................................... 450
7.6 Summary of Report Types .......................................................................................................................................... 451
8 Troubleshooting ....................................................................................................................................................................... 471
9 Client Installation Notes .......................................................................................................................................................... 474
9.1 Requirements .............................................................................................................................................................. 474
9.1.1 Hardware Requirements .......................................................................................................................................... 474
9.1.2 Software Requirements ............................................................................................................................................ 474
9.2 Upgrade installed Client ............................................................................................................................................. 474
9.3 Fresh Install – Download Installers ............................................................................................................................ 475
9.3.1 Install Prerequisites .................................................................................................................................................. 476
9.3.2 Install Client ............................................................................................................................................................. 480
9.4 Troubleshooting .......................................................................................................................................................... 487
10 Glossary ................................................................................................................................................................................... 489

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 10

2 ATMS Overview
ATMS is an Advanced Traffic Management System capable of monitoring and controlling thousands of
intersection controllers using state-of-the art architectures like TCP/IP and NTCIP.
ATMS provides a scalable hardware and software solution for agencies charged with managing complex
transportation systems and traffic signals. Using simple to follow screens and an intuitive functionality, ATMS
offers complete traffic and data management including real-time field reporting, integration with Microsoft .NET
Framework 4.5, Dev Express™, Crystal Reports™, XML data exchange, GIS interface and hundreds of other
features.
ATMS brings together all of your traffic network data into a single repository for a completely integrated, real-
time 360-degree view of your traffic operations. Featuring high-performance parallel database technology, a full
suite of data access and management tools, and robust data mining capabilities, ATMS delivers powerful
performance.
ATMS supports multiple users distributed over local and wide area networks and remote access users over dial-
up, VPN and thin-client connections to the LAN.

ATMS Components and Optional Modules

ATMS is a scalable software solution that supports a range of user needs including:
➢ School Zone Flasher Control
➢ Road Temperature Sensor Monitoring
➢ Alpha BBS Integration (Optional Module)
➢ Real-Time Split Monitor and Time-Space Reporting
➢ Incident Detection and Triggers
➢ Integrated Traficon Video Detection Operation
o Real-Time Opticom Log Retrieval
➢ Cubic/Trafficware Synchro 7/8/9 Suite Integration
➢ Purdue Report Interface (Optional Module)
➢ Cubic/Trafficware Parking Interface (Optional Module)
➢ VIMOC Parking Interface (Optional Module)
➢ Connected Vehicle Interface (Optional Module)
➢ Tidalwave (Optional Module)
➢ Wavetronix Radar Counter Integration (Optional Module)
➢ Light Rail Control Systems (Optional Module)
➢ Transit Priority Systems (Optional Module)
➢ CMS, VMS Signs (Optional Module)
➢ CCTV Surveillance (Optional Module)

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 11

➢ HOV Lane Control (Optional Module)
➢ Center to Center (C2C) integration (Optional Module)
➢ Reversible Lane Control Signals (Optional Module)
➢ Centralized Traffic Responsive Operation (Optional Module)
➢ 2.0 Generation Traffic Responsive and Local Adaptive Control (Optional Module)
➢ Synchro Green Adaptive Control (Optional Module)
➢ High Resolution Signal Performance Measures (High-Res) (Optional Module) via :
o Web interface (Optional Module) or
o Cloud-based technology hosted by Cubic/Trafficware

ATMS is constantly be enhanced and upgraded, typically two times a year based on user
requests. All screens displayed in this manual’s screen may not reflect the latest screen views
but will accurately display the purpose described.
To keep up with the various enhancements and upgrades, user maintenance agreements are
available. Contact your Trafficware representative for further details.

2.1 System Architecture

ATMS is built using standard off-the shelf products instead of propriety software and products. In this way,
agencies can utilize and leverage existing, familiar and easy to use interfaces. In particular, Microsoft SQL
database, Microsoft .NET Framework, Microsoft IIS, XIPC inter-process Communications, ESRI GIS, Bing
Maps, Google Maps and Crystal Reports.
ATMS is a distributed multi-user client-server application built on TCP/IP, the foundation of the Internet. ATMS
communicates with field devices using RS-232 (serial) or TCP/IP (Ethernet) protocols.
System communication may be point-to-point from the central server or distributed using on-street masters
embedded in TS2 and 2070-based controllers. In addition, central based masters can support dynamic group
assignment by time-of-day over multiple communication channels.
The ATMS system communication can simultaneously utilize a hybrid of communication channels including
fiber, Cellular, wireless radio, twisted pair, Ethernet, dial-up, etc. ATMS supports an unlimited number of users
(clients) interfaced with the system across a LAN (Local Area Network) or across the Internet as shown below.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 12

ATMS consists of the following software components on the server that
should be run in the numbered order shown below:
or

The ATMS service icon will run software as a service and run the components below in the proper order.
NOTE: The ATMS Signal Service and the ATMS Proxy will be run depending on the agency
installation needs. See the sections below for more information.

2.1.1 IIS Reset

Microsoft’s Internet Information Services (IIS) for Windows Server is a flexible, secure and manageable Web
server for hosting anything on the Web. ATMS uses IIS for its web interface. Prior to starting ATMS the user
should reset the services via the IIS icon as shown above.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 13

2.1.2 Communications Server
The Communications Server, or “Comm Server”, provides access to all field controllers. The Comm Server
receives communication requests from the Administrator and Client and retrieves the requested data from the
field. The Comm Server is capable of taking mixed communication methods and speeds (forms of serial and IP),
and sorting them by “Drops”. The different types of data flow seamlessly into the user interface (Client) without
being obvious to the user. ATMS offers up to 200 definable “Drops” for your system. By planning out the
Communications Server to have each drop service the fewest number of controllers, the agency can optimize your
system operations and status returns of the field controllers.

2.1.3 Administrator
The Administrator is the system component that replies to requests from multiple (multi-user) Clients as well as
handle programmed system tasks from the “Scheduler” (described in Chapter 6). If the data necessary to respond
to the request is already available, then a report is immediately generated and returned to the client. If the
requested data is not available, then the Administrator forwards the request to the Communications Server, which
gathers the requested data from the field and returns it to the Client.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 14

2.1.4 Signal Service
The Signal Service has been added for use with V80.x controllers to efficiently transfer databases to and from the
controllers in the field. V80.x controllers have much more data parameters than traditional controllers
(approximately four times larger) that use a caching technique within the controller and because of this ATMS
utilizes this service to handle the data transfers.

2.1.5 Other Services

Below is a list of other services that are started and used by ATMS.
➢ ATMS Leader Service
➢ ATMS SQL Bridge Service
➢ ATMS VOL/OCC Service
➢ ATMS Message Service
➢ ATMS Monitor Service
➢ Synchro Integration service

These services will run in the background to insure that all facets of ATMS are working and to monitor and
resolve issues with the operation of ATMS as needed.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 15

2.1.6 Proxy Server
The Proxy Server is required for any browser based application that interfaces with ATMS, such as Google Maps.
This program acts as an intermediary the between ATMS communications platform and a browser based
application. Its main purpose is to retrieve Real-time data from field devices and report it to the browser
application. As browser applications become available, the Proxy Server will funnel data between ATMS and
the browser application. Once the Proxy Server is run, the user must hit the Start Proxy Icon to begin the
communications between the browsers based application and ATMS.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 16

2.1.7 ATMS Configurator

Starting with ATMS version 2.5 and later, Cubic/Trafficware has provided a user interface with the SQL
server’s configuration Database (dbo.config). The configurator only resides on the server and is used by the
ATMS administrator to configure certain aspects of ATMS like the list of defined controllers that the agency
uses or the one-time conversion of the GIS maps to Bing Maps. Caution should be used when running the
configurator, which is typically done on installation. Future Versions of ATMS will allow other configuration
parameters to be updater/modified.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 17

2.1.8 Client
The Client provides a graphical user interface (GUI) for multiple workstations distributed across a TCP/IP
network. The Client allows the user(s) to view the current status of the system, exercise system control, and
generate reports from historical data.

2.1.9 Installing the ATMS Client

To install an ATMS client, first make sure that the desired client workstation can “Ping” the ATMS server IP
address or Hostname. Next launch your Microsoft Explorer browser. Type http://server-
hostname/Streetwise2WS/default.aspx into your address bar or you can also type http://servers-IP
address/Streetwise2WS/default.aspx into your address bar. A web page for “ATMS” tools will then appear.
ATMS Version 2.x requires that the user utilizes the Microsoft .NET Framework version 4.7.1. To insure that
Microsoft .NET Framework is on your computer, you must select and install the Prerequisite programs as shown
in the Prerequisite section. When completed, then select the “ATMS Client Setup”.

Please refer chapter 9 ATMS Client setup for typical Client installation steps.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 18

2.2 ATMS Control Hierarchy
The Active Pattern drives the operation of the local signal controller in both Coordinated and Free operation.
NTCIP defines OpModes, Src as the source of the Active Pattern. The source of the Active Pattern may be Remo,
Sys or Tbc as explained below:
The highest level of control in ATMS is the Remote (Remo) mode. A “Remo” pattern overrides the local pattern
at the system level. A Remo pattern can be issued manually from the ATMS Instant Pattern or from a system
Alarm Trigger responding to a specified system alarm.
The following illustration depicts the “top-down” control hierarchy in an ATMS control system. The Active
Pattern in the figure below is currently driven by Sys (value = 8) which overrides Tbc (value = 10). The highest
level of control, “Remo”, is in standby (REMO = 0). A separate system mode, External (Ext) provides
compatibility with external hardwire interconnect systems, which are becoming obsolete.

It is highly recommended that the “Communications Server” “Proxy Server” and

“Administrator” are installed on a server-based computer that can be left running constantly.
Scheduled tasks, multi-client applications and browser based applications such as Google Maps
cannot operate without these programs running.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 19

 Central Manual Control (Remo)
The user may download a Remo pattern and countdown timer to a Group/Flex Group from the central office.
Central Alarm Trigger (Remo)

Controller alarms may be used to override the normal operation of the system. ATMS can be programmed to
monitor a specified alarm and generate a “trigger” response to a Control Group (typically a Flex Group). When
the alarm is detected, the system can download a specified Remo pattern (Instant Pattern) or preempt (Instant
Preempt) with a countdown timer to local controller or specified group of controllers. The local controllers will
then override normal operation and implement the trigger pattern or preempt command and revert back to the
local “Sys” or “Tbc” operation after the timer has expired.
Central Master Control Level (Sys)
A central master module within ATMS (optional Software Module) can be enabled in lieu of an On-Street Field
Master, to perform all master functions. A master (field or central) controls up to 32 controllers assigned to the
master subsystem (Control Group). The master selects a “Sys” pattern from either the master time-of-day
schedule or from a traffic responsive or adaptive control algorithm running within the master. The central master
downloads the “Sys” pattern to the local controllers in the subsystem to override the local time-of-day (Tbc)
schedules.
Intersections may be re-assigned to a central master subsystem by time-of-day to support dynamic group
assignment. In addition, intersections from different communication channels may be assigned to the same central
master – i.e., a central master is not communication bound like the field masters which require that all members
of the Control Group reside on the same communication link.
Field Master Control Level (Sys)
A field master (Model 981 or 2070 Apogee “Master”) is embedded software within a local controller and
communicates with ATMS as well as the local controllers. A field master Control Group is typically defined by
the communication path interconnecting the field master with the intersections assigned to the master subsystem.
Field masters download the Sys pattern to all intersections assigned to the master subsystem.
The master selects the “Sys” pattern from either the master time-of-day schedule or from a traffic responsive or
adaptive control algorithm processed within the field master. A master “Sys” pattern other than zero overrides
the local “Tbc” patterns as explained in the previous section. If a master is in standby, the “Sys” pattern will be
set to zero and control passed to the local “Tbc” schedules.
Local Intersection Control Level (Tbc)
If the system is in standby (Remo=0 and Sys=0), the active pattern in each local controller will be set by the time-
of-day schedule in the local controller. This mode of operation is typically referred to as Time Base Coordination
(Tbc). If the system (ATMS or On-Street Master) is in standby (Sys=0), then the Active Pattern is set to Tbc
generated by the local time-of-day schedule and it will operate using its local programming.
Intersections assigned to central masters (ATMS) may reside on different communication channels. Central
masters allow the Control Groups shown to the right to be redefined by time-of-day.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 20

2.3 Getting Connected to the ATMS System
This manual assumes that your ATMS system is connected to a controller in one of two ways:

Serial
Direct connect, such as using a laptop or PC workstation requires that the computer serial port be connected
directly to a NEMA TS2 or 2070 controller through a null-modem cable. The Comm Parameters programmed in
the controller must match the settings programmed in the Comm Server by your system administrator. This
includes the “System ID” (Controller ID#, MM→6→1) and comm port baud rate settings (MM→6→2→1).
Port 1 Comm Parameters for the TS2 are programmed from the controller Main Menu→6. The Port 1 parameters
should set DIAL to OFF, COMM to 1.0 and reflect the baud rate and duplex settings when your system
administrator installed ATMS on your PC.
SP1 on the 2070-7A card is typically used to provide a direct connection to a PC or Tablet. The baud rate for SP1
is set under *→6→2. SP1 is also typically tied to Async1 in the bindings under *→6→6, which is bound to
SysUp.

Ethernet
A direct Ethernet connection is also possible between the server and controller. The controller can be connected
directly from the server using a crossover patch cable, or via the preferred method of a hub switch using a standard
patch cable. The controller IP address must be assigned to the controller as it is defined in controller definition.
The “Host” IP address in the controller needs to be set to the IP address of the computer that the Comm Server
resides.

2.3.1 Installing an ATMS Client over a Network

If the client workstation is connected to a TCP/IP network, your ATMS system administrator or IT Department
can install your ATMS Client software on your local computer. An ATMS client can be installed via a web
browser installer. With ATMS, mapped drives, folder sharing, or file sharing are no longer required to install or
operate a client. The embedded Microsoft web-based data exchange allows all file read/write and control without
file sharing and mapped drives. Follow the instructions of the loader or contact your Cubic/Trafficware
representative for assistance.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 21

2.3.2 Remote Access Connection
Remote access to ATMS can be accomplished in several ways. Users will need to work with their IT departments
to establish these types of connections because any remote connection to the network involves security issues.
The following remote access connections have been used successfully with ATMS.

Dial-up Connection
A TCP/IP telephone dial-up connection using RAS, PPP or SLIP allows the client to connect to the local area
network (LAN) directly. Most IT managers will not allow these connections to be made if the LAN is connected
to the agency LAN for security reasons.

Remote Connections: PCAnywhere or GoToMyPC

Another method commonly used requires a third-party software application such as Symantec’s “PCAnywhere”
or Citrix’s “GoToMyPC” to support a remote connection for both the host computer connected to the central
system and the remote PC into the host using the internet.
With 56K dial-up connections, the limited bandwidth over telephone makes this connection only useful for brief
status checks on the system.

VPN/Thin Client
ATMS can also be accessed from thin clients such as Citrix and Virtual Private Networks (VPN). If these
connections are available from the Internet, some type of firewall usually protects them. The network
administrator must provide access through the firewall for the TCP/IP sockets (TCP/UDP) used to communicate
between the ATMS client and server programs.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 22

2.3.3 ATMS Status Monitor

On the client window there is an ATMS Status Monitor for easy viewing and verification that the main
ATMS Processes are running correctly. The agency can monitor the Communications Server,
Administrator, ATMS Web services (XIPC/IIS) or the Messaging Server. The user can easily ascertain if a
server of main process is up or not running and contact their agency support personnel if needed.

There are three possible icon colors

ICON COLOR DESCRIPTION

GRAY Indicates that the application/module is not enabled in your
ATMS System
GREEN Indicates that application/module is running correctly
RED Indicates that the application/module is not processing and is
down

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 23

You can hover over the Icon to see which application/module it is associated with.

In addition any Licensed modules can be monitored via the Help Menu by selecting the Modules icon as
shown below:

This manual has been created to describe all features in the standard version of ATMS. There
may be features described herein that are not available based upon the features that your
particular agency has purchased. Please contact your Trafficware representative for further
details on features that your agency would like to add to your version of ATMS.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 24

3 Getting Started

This section shows how to Log on to ATMS and become familiar with the user interface.
ATMS is a client/server application that allows multiple clients to share a single communications server
dedicated to field communications.

3.1 Logging On to ATMS

Double click the Client icon on the Windows desktop.

A user login and password screen is displayed:

If the Client is not connected to the Communications Server over the network, then a message,
“Communication Server Access Failure” will be displayed in a message box. You may select Continue
to access database functions, but all communication features will be “grayed” out, as controller
communications functions will not operate.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 25

Beginning with ATMS 2.5, Cubic/Trafficware has added a server selection screen which will allow larger
agencies (such as states, provinces and counties) to select a specific server if they house multiple instances of
ATMS.

Using your mouse, left click on the server selection.

The following server configuration screen will come up.

Type the name, the server IP address, and the server IP port number (typically Port 80) of the next server that
you want to access. By selecting Add will allow the user to add a server IP to the list for later selection
.

After setting up all your servers, hit the save button to save your server list.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 26

If the server is not able to be connected at the time of creation, an error screen will be displayed as shown below
and the server will not be added to your ATMS selection list.

Once you start the client, you can select the server that you would like to logon to.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 27

Next enter your Username and Password. Your system administrator should provide you with your user name and
password.

If the agency utilizes domain authentication, and the user is already logged in, the users to log into the client
without a password. Please refer to the User section of Chapter 6 for setting up domain authentication.

After correctly logging in, the ATMS screen will display the List view overview screen as shown below:

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 28

Selecting the Map tab will display the Map Overview screen as shown below:

This Map view gives the user a quick overview of the status of the agency’s
intersections. At the bottom of the Map are two or three tabs labeled Map, List and
GIS. The GIS Tab is available under the GIS Legacy mode.

The initial Map view as shown above utilizes Bing Maps. The GIS view utilizes the
agency’s ESRI GIS backgrounds as an alternate way to view intersections. The List
view presents a tabular list of intersections.

Each view will be detailed in this document.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 29

The ATMS screen will be displayed providing the four main work areas: Navigation, Selection, Overview Pane
and Details Pane. Below is the list view.

In addition, our existing users can continue using the Legacy Navigator by selecting it from the main tool bar.
Under this view there are three main work area panes: Overview, Detail and Navigation:
The Legacy view is shown below:

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 30

3.2 User Customization Interface and Options
The user can customize and select the interface via the Cubic/Trafficware Icon on the
top left of the screen.
This will bring down a drop down menu as shown below.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 31

 Function Description

Edit Map Elements This selection is used in association with Google Maps only. It will select an
interface to add/edit or delete Controllers, Devices or Scan Elements from the
Google Map Interface.

Display Controller Map This selection will launch a separate Bing Map screen for Traffic Operation
center displays

Options Allows the user to change the screen interfaces as well as the particular icons
on each screen

Help This selection will bing up this manual using context sensitive help. Here you
can view, print and search ATMS topics.

Exit Close the ATMS Client.

Selecting Options allows the user to change the screen interface as well as the particular icons on each screen.
When selecting, get to the Options screen where you can customize the general layout of ATMS, or the items in
the selection ribbon.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 32

Below are the color screen layouts:

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 33

In addition, each module’s Selection ribbon can be customized via the Customize Ribbon selection.

NOTE: This manual’s graphics will reflect the ATMS 2.x screen views.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 34

3.2.1 Ribbon Sizing
The icons on the ribbon are displayed based on the screen size that is generated by the user. As you expand the
Client window, the icons will grow in size and associated information will be displayed. As you contract the
Client window, the icons will grow smaller.

3.3 Module Selection and Basic Screen Navigation

The Navigation Area allows the user to select one of the following modules: Home, Definitions, and Reports.
Optional Modules such as the Connected vehicle, AVL, High-Res Cloud interface and the SynchroGreen Module
are also available. Contact your Cubic/Trafficware representative for further information.
Also Note that the context of the Overview pane and Detail panes change with the Navigation module selected.

The Home module enables the user to define and manage all controllers in the system, as well as control all
additional system devices such as cameras, switches, etc. This module provides access to the controller database
and communication access to each device in the field. Utilities are provided to import/export Synchro data and
monitor measures-of-effectiveness (MOE) from system detectors associated with the controllers in the system.
The Definitions module enables the user to configure all system definitions (with exception of controllers), users,
GIS map files, and system Scheduler tasks. The user may also define Groups or Flex Groups and define ITS field
devices other than signal controllers (cameras, CMS, switches, temperature sensors, etc.).
The Reports module provides the ability to query the SQL databases maintained by the system. Reports can be
generated for a single device or for a selection group by specifying begin and end dates and times and other
attributes related to the specific report.
Optional Modules such as Connected Vehicle, AVL, High-Res Cloud interface and SynchroGreen will also be
displayed, if the agency has purchased them. Please contact your Cubic/Trafficware Representative for further
information about these modules.
Each module is explained in detail in the following sections.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 35

3.4 Overview of the Home Module
ATMS uses re-sizable “Pane” windows within a single Client screen to allow the user to create the desired screen
space for each work area. This eliminates older-style “Pop-Up” screens when working on standard operations.
ATMS does still operate “Pop-Up” screens for real-time “Scan” windows and video windows when camera feeds
are launched.
The figure shown below illustrates the different “Panes” of ATMS. These Panes are present on each of the three
base modules of ATMS: 1) Home, 2) Definitions and 3) Reports.

3.4.1 General Information

The Overview pane defaults to a List of all controllers defined in the system when Home is selected. Notice the
red arrows, on the bottom of the overview pane, pointing at the List Tab, Map Tab or GIS Tab. From the main
view pane, the user can select to view the system by “List View” by selecting the List tab, the “GIS View” by
selecting the GIS tab or the Bing “Map View” by selecting the Map Tab.
Real-time information such as active pattern, communication status, controller/group configuration, coordination
status, real-time R/Y/G status, and detector input status is shown for each controller on the List View. The Map
View will display what controllers are communicating with a graphical background or a Satellite image
background. When selecting the GIS View, a hover balloon will appear for the activated layer (by checking the
round button next to the layer box) when the “Information” icon is selected and the mouse is placed over the
corresponding object on the map.
The displayed information for the List View is user-selectable using the Field Chooser. The displayed layers on
the GIS View is user-selectable using the GIS “Legend” by checking the layer’s square box.
The GIS View-Legend and the List View-Field Chooser functions, which tuck in the upper left corner of each
screen, can be kept open by selecting the “push pin” to pin the field open on the window.
The GIS map will automatically resize within the Map View Pane when the Legend is “pinned up” or “tucked in”,
allowing the user to customize the look and feel of the GIS mapping control.
ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 36
GIS navigation toolbar

Field Chooser selection

of the GIS Legend

GIS Layer “View”

Figure 3-1: GIS-View

Field Chooser window

is “pinned up”

Listed Column based

on Field Chooser
selections

Multiple Controller
Selection

Figure 3-2: List-View

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 37

3.4.2 Search Engine Tool
The list of controllers in the Overview pane (GIS or List) can also be
selected using the Search Engine tool. To select the Search Engine tool
go to the upper right side of the Navigation area and select the search
icon.

Once this icon is chosen, a floating Search Engine Pane will appear. The
Search Engine tool changes based on the selected module. On the left is
the Search Engine Pane for the Home module.
You may specify a single controller (or master) by ID or Name. In
addition you may specify a Selection Group from a Group or Flex Group
list.
Use to slider bar in the Search pane to view all search criteria. Other
search values include Controller Type, Communications Drop or Status,
IP Address, Pattern, and other parameters.
Press Find Now to create the results of the Search in the Overview pane.
You can then perform Actions on individual or multiple controllers in
the Overview pane.
After selecting the controllers desired from the Overview pane, choose
one of the Actions listed on the Selection Ribbon above the Overview
pane. Note that the context of the Overview pane changes with each
Action selected.
If your search was performed on a dynamic category, such as Comm
Status or a specific Pattern number, you can set the Search Engine to
“Auto Refresh” the search parameters, keeping your search accurate.
The refresh rate can be set by selecting the desired time interval in the
drop-down selection box. Note: When you are finished with a specific
search with refreshing, you should disable the “Auto Refresh” option, as
it will continue resetting your future actions to the parameters in the
Search Engine.

To reset your search and restore the full system list, select Reset All, then Find Now. This resets all the
search engine parameters back to “All” and displays every controller or device.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 38

3.4.3 Real-Time Scan Icon

Selecting the Real-time scan icon will automatically enable a scan screen to appear
when you select an intersection. If this icon is toggled again, the automatic Real-time
scan display will be turned off.

Once Real-time scan is turned on and an intersection is selected, the real time scan screen will appear.
Automatic Real-time scan is available on the Map, List or GIS views.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 39

3.4.4 Actions

The Actions are listed on the Selection Ribbon at the top of the screen. Actions allow you to operate on single or
multiple databases selected in the Overview pane (GIS map or List). Actions can be performed by navigating to
the Selection Ribbon or “right-clicking” on the main Overview pane. You may return to the list of databases at
any time by re-selecting Home or by closing the selected action window.
Actions that are NOT PERMITTED by the combination of selected controllers will be automatically “Grayed
Out” by ATMS.
The Database actions manage the controller and master databases and allow an operator to Upload/Download
databases to field devices. ATMS maintains separate database files that protect the permanent database
downloaded to the field unit from the standard (edit) copy. You may also upload a controller to a separate database
file and perform Compare and Copy actions to isolate manual changes made to the database in the field.
Coordination Diagnostics are provided as a tool in this section to identify improper coordination programming in
any of the controller’s eight (8) databases. You can also download database files to a local directory vial the Local
Download selection.

Real-Time actions provide status information from field devices, download manual patterns, preemptions and
special functions to the field, synchronize controller & Opticom clocks, collect MMU reports, collect Coord
Failure data, remotely reset a controller’s failed coordinator, and generate Time-Space diagrams.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 40

Utility actions allow the user to view time-of-day schedules in the field controllers by day, week and month. A
Notes utility maintains a text file for each database for documentation purposes and Documents (external files
such as .dwg or .pdf) may be also attached and indexed to a controller database(s). Notes and Documents may be
viewed in the Details pane under Selected Details tab at the bottom window of the Home Page. A user can text-
message other on-line users with the Broadcast Message feature. A utility is also provided to import and export
Synchro 7-based timing, phasing, and counts.

Communication Status actions allows the user to monitor the Communication Server and Administrator’s activity
as well as clearing the Communications status buffer.

Configuration actions are used to create and edit controller and master Definitions in the system. System detectors
may be used to estimate turning movement counts and estimate congestion in the system. Configuration utilities
are provided to associate detectors and phases in the controllers with the Synchro system model. User Defined
Detector Groups combine individual lane detectors to create count stations for estimating ADT (average daily
traffic) on roadway segments.

All Action functions can also be performed by “right clicking” from the GIS map or List view selections.
The available Action functions will appear in a balloon, which corresponds to the main Action window on
the upper left of the Home Page.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 41

3.5 Overview of the Definitions Module
The Definitions module is used to configure the system, create and maintain user logins and privileges, schedule
events that determine the polling frequency in the system, and define system devices.
The System Administrator will typically have user access for all features in the system including the responsibility
of defining individual User access and assigning passwords into the system. Other users may have full or partial
access rights assigned by the System Administrator(s) under Edit User Properties. It is recommended that only
the System Administrator(s) have Edit User Properties enabled to prevent users from changing their own system
access and control.
The System Administrator can also create Jurisdictions to partition access to the system by other agencies or by
departments. User access and control can be limited by jurisdiction for specific system devices as well as level
of control.
Below is the Selection Ribbon for the Definitions module.

Alarm allows the user to customize the display of alarms that are sent to the user. The user can change the name
of each alarm or the color and priority of alarms that are displayed to the overview screen.

Alarm Notifications generate system responses to specified controller alarms polled by the system. Alarm
Notifications are created to notify users via e-mail, pagers or WEB services when specified alarms are detected.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 42

Alarm Incidents are status messages used to notify users about specified alarms whereas Incident Triggers are
control messages that override the normal operation of other controller(s), cameras, and CMS signs in the system
when specified alarms are detected by a specific controller or a congestion threshold has been reached. Incident
Triggers can user either Alarm Triggers or Congestion Triggers to generate the control message. Alarm Triggers
are created to send a triggered reaction such as a pattern change or preemption to a controller or group of
controllers, or a Camera or CMS/DMS when a specified alarm is detected. Congestion Triggers are created to
send a triggered reaction such as a pattern change or preemption to a controller or group of controllers, or camera
or CMS/DMS when a specified volume or occupancy threshold is exceeded.

If a controller is going to be out of communication with the system for an extended period, it can be assigned to
the Controller Offline list. The system uses this list to skip polls to offline intersections and improve
communication bandwidth and effectiveness of the real-time system.

The user can define additional ITS system Devices (such as cameras, switches, CMS signs, etc), and Events (such
as a construction activity and accidents), and place them on the GIS map for “point-and-click” control of the
device. Device and Event Location assigns the symbols representing devices and events to the GIS map. In
addition, arc-view shape files may be imported using the GIS action.

The Congestion Actions are used to develop congestion reports and real-time congestion data. For example, the
Segment Editor allows you to assign one of the eight compass point directions to each roadway segment in the
GIS model.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 43

Intersection groups allow the user to perform actions and control multiple intersections. The Definitions module
provides actions to create, edit and assign intersections to Groups and Flex Groups. A controller can only belong
to one Group, but can be assigned to multiple Flex Groups.

The time-of-day Scheduler allows the System Administrator to define the polling for the system. Scheduled events
include synchronizing the field clocks within the system, gathering alarms, etc. All system activities can be
scheduled by time-of-day and executed by the system without operator intervention. Report Criteria is used to
automate reports by scheduling them to be sent via e-mail.

The Vehicle Classification/Counters allows the import of JAMAR counter files into ATMS database for report
generation in the Reports Module.

The Definitions module is fully documented in Chapter 6.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 44

3.6 Overview of the Reports Module
The Reports module allows the user to query the system databases and produce Dev Express or Crystal Reports
that can be printed or saved in one of the following formats depending on the report tool:
• Adobe PDF
• Microsoft Excel (XLS, XLSX)
• Microsoft Word Doc(.DOC) or Rich Text Format (.RTF)
• Text File (.TXT)
• Comma Separated Values format (CSV)

Reports are grouped in the following Report Categories :

• Alpha UPS Faults
• AVL
• CMS
• Controller
• Database
• Volume
• Users (Logins and Transactions)
• Vehicles (AVL data)
• GIS
• Purdue Logging
• SynchroGreen
• Trip Logger
ATMS provides a robust selection of pre-formatted reports.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 45

A specific Report Name may be selected by highlighting the report in the main Overview pane or selecting the
particular Report category.
The Report Criteria changes based on the Report Name selected, with the drop-down selection windows that
match the corresponding selected report type. For example, particular report is selected in the main Overview
pane, the particular Criteria pane is brought up and displayed as shown below. Selecting a different report will
modify the Report Criteria because the context of each report is different.

Starting with ATMS 2.5, Cubic/Trafficware is migrating the Crystal reports to Dev Express reports because
Crystal Reports is no longer being supported by Microsoft..
The Reports module is fully documented in Chapter 7.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 46

3.7 Context Sensitive Help
ATMS incorporates Context sensitive help. Depress the “?”icon on the upper left of the ATMS screen and the
following screen should be shown.

3.8 Help Module

In addition, a new module on the

menu bar named “Help” allows the
user to review release notes or
place agency wide documents like
controller manuals, MUTCD
manuals etc. on the server to be
accessed by all users. Place all
manuals on the server under the
directory:

“Naztec->ATMSWS->Manuals”.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 47

4 Home Module – Overview

The Home Module allows the user to configure, edit and manipulate each controller’s database. In addition, Real-
Time scanning of information from the field controllers and other utilities, such as coordination diagnostics are
accessed from this module.
4.1 System Overview Pane
This section will teach you how to navigate and operate the main System Overview pane. Specific functions such
as database edit, uploading, downloading, device control, etc. are discussed in this section.
The main System Overview Pane displays system information in two different tabbed displays, the Controller
List view and GIS Map view. Each view is monitored in real-time and the displayed status is updated as each
device is polled.
Both the List view pane and the GIS view pane are correlated with each other. This means that as the user selects
a controller from either the List, Map or GIS, the other will correspond with the selection on its own pane. This
allows the user to toggle between the views to allow for a most powerful use of the system monitoring and controls.
See the following two figures to see simultaneous corresponding selections from the Map, List and GIS views.
Selecting the Map Tab will display the controllers via the user selectable a Bing Graphical Map or Bing Satellite
Map as shown below.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 48

The List Tab provides an easy tabular representation of the controllers of the agency system.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 49

The GIS Tab displays the same controllers with a status-colored “Push-Pin” as the list “Highlights” the same
intersections on the List view.

The ATMS system provides a memorization utility within the software called “stickiness”. This “stickiness”
keeps track of the screen’s setup and last navigated parameters so when the user returns to a pane after leaving it
to perform another task, ATMS will return to the same screen and data parameters displayed.
ATMS provides a re-sizeable window Panes to provide the most flexible use of screen space through a single
screen. The System Overview Pane is re-sizeable by grabbing the pane bar on the bottom of the pane window
and dragging it to the desired Pane size. This feature allows the System Overview Pane to share space with the
System Details Pane on the bottom portion of the screen.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 50

4.2 List View
The List view provides a real-time, single-screen snapshot of the core controller input, output, timing, and
communication status parameters. The specific controllers that are displayed on the Controller List view are
directly controlled by selection activity from both the Search Engine and the GIS Map. Listed controllers (not
highlighted) can be narrowed by any search criteria such as Groups, Flex Groups, Drop, COORD status, etc. The
displayed fields are determined on a user-by-user basis by selecting them in the Field Chooser.
Any system control Action can be performed within the List View.

All real-time status for detector inputs or phase outputs is gathered during the “Full Status” polling performed by
the ATMS “Scheduler”.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 51

4.2.1 Field Chooser
The List view pane includes a display utility called the “Field Chooser”, as does
the main controller timing screens. The Field Chooser allows the user to
customize the displayed data columns in the Controller List pane.
The user enables the column to be displayed or hidden by checking or un-
checking the box next to the column name. The checked boxes will be
immediately displayed in the Controller List pane. All parameters of the system
are monitored in real-time, meaning that even if a box is un-checked, ATMS is
still bringing back real-time information for that parameter. If database
parameters are unchecked, finding them in the database at a later time can be
extremely difficult. It is recommended to use this feature with caution.
ATMS remembers the column preferences of each user with its “stickiness”
feature that is embedded in the software, displaying the “last used” fields of data
when returning to the screen.
Field Chooser slides out initially to let the user know it’s there, and then it hides
itself to provide as much screen real estate to the grid.

The Field Chooser can be “pinned” so the window will stay visible. This is
allowed by a slight re-sizing of the main Controller List in the List view window.
The pin location is circled in the display on the right.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 52

The following shows the various selections that can be displayed on the overview screen.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 53

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 54
ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 55
4.2.2 Column Order

The Order of columns are fully definable by the user. The user can drag a column anywhere on the list view
overview pane and it will remain persistent.

Consider moving the column named Revision as shown below:

The user wants to move it next to the Type column. By left-clicking on the mouse key, the user can move
it next to the Type column.

Once the user stops the Left-click of the mouse, this colunmn will now be anchored to the List view and
remain there everytime you log in under that user name.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 56

If the user wants to reset to the default column order, simply hit the “Reset Column Order” Button as
shown below.

A confirmation screen will be displayed .

By selectiong Yes, ATMS will reset to its default column order as shown below:

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 57

4.2.3 Status Columns

The Controller List pane of ATMS displays the real-time data columns from a combination of four fixed fields
(Alarms, Status LED, Intersection ID#, and Intersection Name), and the selected fields from the Field Chooser.
These four fields remain regardless of the Field Chooser selection, as they are critical fields. ATMS places a
solid bar on the right of the Intersection Name, which marks the point that all of the optional fields tuck under as
the slide bar views the columns to the far right. If a solid bar is not present, then all of the selected fields are
capable of fitting in the window pane at the same time.

When an incoming alarm is received from the field, an alarm icon is displayed in the first column, and
simultaneously listed in the “Recent Alarms” tab of the bottom pane. To clear or “acknowledge” the alarm,
highlight each of the controllers with alarms to clear, select the Actions pane or “right-click”, and navigate to Real
Time…Clear Alarms. This will remove the alarm icon from the List but it will remain in the Recent Alarms,
Alarm History, and Selected Details-Alarm tabs of the Details pane. If an alarm remains that is not cleared for
that controller, an alarm icon will continue to be displayed on the Controller List.

The system administrator has the option to program automatic paging or e-mail notification of these incoming
alarms under User Definitions, which is discussed in Chapter 6.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 58

The Controller List view displays real-time status on the second column. Each LED color displays the last
reported status to ATMS, which also corresponds to the status colors of the GIS map legend:

• GREEN - On Line and communicating

• RED - Off Line and should be communicating
• YELLOW - Intersection is in Flash
• CYAN - Intersection has reported a Coordination Failure
• PURPLE - Intersection is in Preemption
• GREY - Off Line and not being polled for status

The Controller List view also permanently displays the Controller “ID” # and “Name” as defined in the Controller
Definitions in the Configuration section of the Action pane.

4.2.4 GIS Map View

The GIS Map view provides a real-time, GIS-based, status map display of all of the ATMS system elements. All
standard GIS zoom functions and layer actions are integrated in the GIS map. The user can select any combination
of GIS layers to be displayed at any time. The specific controllers that are displayed on the GIS Map view can be
directly controlled by selection activity from both the Search Engine and the GIS Map. “Pinned-up” controllers
can be selected and identified by any search criteria such as Groups, Flex Groups, Drop, Coord status, etc.
Any Action can be performed from the GIS Map tab by “right-clicking” after controller selection.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 59

The GIS Map view offers a filtering Legend, which allows the user control over the
displayed layers on the map. Each data type, such as Controllers, Scan Data, Events,
Congestion, Switches, Cameras, BBS, CMS signs, Light Rail, Fire Stations, etc, can be
displayed as a distinct layer on the map. Layers that represent devices that dynamically
change status such as Controllers and Congestion are updated in real time as per the
Scheduler programming. The real-time condition of each object on the map is color-
coded according to the Legend and displays the corresponding color to the “Status”
column of the List View tab.

The Legend offers two separate layer check boxes. The “Square” box activates the layer
for viewing on the map. If this box is not checked, the layer is hidden from the display.
The second is the “Round” button, which activates the layer for communication and
control. Therefore, to control a layer from the GIS map, you must check both the square
box to see the layer and the round button to get information or control the object.

All layers represented on the Legend are actively monitoring and provide control
capability from the GIS Map. The viewing state of each distinct layer can be toggled on
or off, controlling whether or not it is displayed at that moment. ATMS tracks the user
preferences on the GIS Map view with the “stickiness” feature, displaying the last active
layers when returning back to the GIS Map tab.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 60

Each layer can be enabled for view and control, by user by turning it “On” or “Off” by the system administrator.
Therefore, each displayed layer has been enabled for the logged in user under Definitions…Users…Edit User
Definitions, “Legend” section, as shown in the screen below. A value of “Yes” turns the layer display on for the
user, and a value of “No” turns the layer display off.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 61

An example of a status-only layer is the “Scan Screen” layer. ATMS takes the real-time polling information and
enables the system to display programmed signal, pedestrian, and detector information on a “Scan Screen” layer
on the GIS Map. When set up for each intersection, the “Full Status” polling will continue collecting this
information. Whether or not the Scan Screen is programmed (Chapter 6), or it is an actively displayed layer, the
information is collected and ready within ATMS. This real-time status can be displayed for a single or multiple
intersections. If the “Parameter” box is checked, the phase or detector value will appear on each scan point, such
as “P2” for Phase 2, etc. The picture shown below is what can be seen when the “Scan Screen” layer is active for
an arterial view.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 62

When you zoom in to a selected intersection, you can get a more detailed view. The following picture shows the
scan layer with the “Parameters” box checked. Information such as controller ID or Pattern number can be
displayed

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 63

Information such as controller ID or Pattern number can be displayed on the map also as shown below.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 64

Also available on the GIS Legend is a list of all active alarms. Select the Active Alarm Tab to vie all active alarms
in the system.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 65

4.3 GIS Map Navigation Toolbar

The GIS Map control is performed by selecting a toolbar function from the upper left of the GIS map:

As described above, both layer points must be checked on the Legend, then select one of the following icons:

Information – Selecting this function will provide real-time information of the active layer using a “Hover
Balloon”, by placing the mouse over the desired map object. The hover balloon displays real-time status for any
of the active layers on the GIS map, including Controllers, Congestion, Cameras, CMS signs, Switches, etc.

When a Controller Hover appears, you can double-click on it to make it permanently “Pin Up” as a dedicated
window. The picture below shows that a pinned hover offers two view options, the General Information and a
Layout (GIS) view tabs.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 66

 Figure 4-1: Controller “Layout” Aerial View

ATMS provides an instant-video feeds for up to six Traficon Video Detection cameras operating on an Ethernet
platform using the Cubic/Trafficware/Traficon “VU COM” communications card. This utility uses the
Information Hover to initiate a video feed connection when the “Video Detector” layer buttons are checked on
the legend. When in Information mode on the toolbar, you can place your cursor over the Video Detector camera
icon on the map. A video view window will appear and the stream will begin in the window. If a camera feed
does not appear in the window, such as “Camera2” below, then the video signal has been disrupted for that camera
and the VU COM card cannot see the video signal.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 67

 Figure 4-2: Cubic/Trafficware “VU COM” Layer Hover Balloon

When this Hover Balloon appears it will display the amount of camera feeds as programmed and as the VU COM
board is supporting. To view a specific single feed in a dedicated window, you can select the “Camera 1” link
(BLUE circle). This will produce a permanent window on the screen that will stay up while other system
navigation can take place.

When in Select mode on the toolbar and in control mode of the VU COM layer, same as above, you can directly
launch the Cubic/Trafficware/Traficon Video programming interface. To launch this interface, select the same
camera icon on the map, which will launch a browser-based application to the main programming screen for the
Cubic/Trafficware/Traficon video processor as shown below.

Figure 4-3: Cubic/Trafficware “VU COM” Programming Interface

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 68

 Select – Selecting this function enables the user to select or “wrap-around” the desired object or group of
objects to launch control. When this is used to select Controllers, the user can perform functions using the Actions
pane or “Right-Click” to open a small Action pane window on the GIS map.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 69

 Additional devices such as Cameras, Changeable Message Signs, and Switches can
be launched through the GIS interface by selecting the round “radial” button next to
the target layer type. Place your cursor over the targeted device, and click to launch
the interface. The screen below shows a launched 3rd party software application
(MetaASSIST by Actelis Networks) from the GIS layer.

ATMS interfaces with Changeable Message Signs and can send messages to them directly through the GIS
interface. Select the round “radial” button on the GIS Legend, click on the target CMS icon (circled in RED). A
“CMS-Send Message” pop-up will appear. Select a pre-programmed message as defined in the Message section
of the Definitions module (discussed in Chapter 6). Select the “Send” button to download the message to the
field.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 70

Daktronics CMS signs have the capability of displaying multiple messages that the sign will cycle through. This
can be set up using the GIS map as follows. The user first selects the CMS radial button on the GIS legend and
the select button is used on the GIS tool bar, then the user double clicks on the Daktronics icon on the GIS map
the following window appears.

The user selects one or more pages to send to the sign by clicking on the pull down arrow.

When the user selects the pull down arrow, another window appears with choices of predefined messages (created
in definitions\messages) to send to the sign.

Once the user selects the message(s) to display the user clicks on the send button.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 71

 Zoom-In – Selecting this function will allow the user to click on a point on the map and wrap around a
desired area to zoom.

Zoom-Out – After selecting this, clicking once on the map will zoom out 1 measure of extent.

Pan – This enables the user to “grab” the map and slide it in any direction.

Full Extent – By clicking this icon, the GIS map will zoom out to the fullest extent.

Marker – The user can place a marker anywhere on the map to calculate distances to nearest system
components.
Go Back – As the user zooms in on the map, he/she can click on the back button to go back to the previous
extent up to the last 10 views.
Event – This enables the user to select an
exact point on the GIS map, create an Accident,
Construction Zone, Slow Zone, etc, and place it
directly on the GIS map in real-time. This action will
add the newly-created Event to the “Events” layer on
the GIS map. At the time of creating this Event, the
user can program whether ATMS will remove it at a
pre-determined time and date, or leave it indefinitely,
requiring manual removal from the Definitions page.
Events can also be added in the Definitions module of
ATMS as described in Chapter 6.

After selecting the Event icon in the GIS toolbar, the

user can next select the location on the GIS map to
post the Event by clicking on the desired location.
When this is done a new window will pop-up called
“Add Event”, allowing the user to define the new
Event. The user then fills out the appropriate
information in each box.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 72

The Active box when checked will display the Event on the GIS map. When it is unchecked it will be logged in
the database but will not be displayed.

Enter the Description text as you want it displayed on the map, and if you are using the Internet Web module of
ATMS, as you want the public to read the Event information.

The Begin Date/Time and Expire On date and time will enable ATMS to automatically activate/place and
remove/disable the Event on the GIS map at the programmed time. When set at Infinite, the Event will remain
until manually removed in the Definitions page of ATMS.

The “X” and “Y” values are the geo-referenced coordinates of the mouse position at the time the user selected the
map locations. Select the Event Type by using the drop-down selection box. Click “OK” to add and save. If you
have a special Event Type need, contact your Cubic/Trafficware representative.

Create Preset – This enables the user to zoom to an exact view on the GIS map, and set the GIS positioning
as a saved, named preset for quick future navigation. When selecting the Create Preset icon, a new window will
appear to name the Preset View and set the user access to the view, either the “Active User” or “All Users”. When
checking the “All Users” box, the programmed view will be available under its programmed name to all ATMS
users. If the box is left unchecked then it will only appear as a GIS navigation option to the specific user that
created it (logged in user). Click “OK” to save or “Cancel” to exit.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 73

To select a specific “Preset View” for navigation, select the drop-down menu on the GIS toolbar. A list of the
available Preset Views for that user will display. Select the desired Preset View. Upon selection ATMS will
automatically navigate and zoom to the programmed GIS view. The figure below shows a sample of Preset Views.

4.3.1 GIS Legend

The GIS Legend provides layer view and layer-based element control on the GIS map. This enables the user to
control the amount of displayed information, which simplifies selection of the desired information. The GIS
Legend can be “tucked-in” or “pinned-up” by using the Push Pin, just like the Field Chooser screen. ATMS
also uses the “stickiness” feature with the active GIS layers, memorizing the user’s last-used layers the next time
a login occurs.

The GIS Legend provides layer view control by activating the layer category when the “Square” box at the layer
description is checked. When the box is unchecked, the layer will not be displayed, though ATMS will continue
to monitor its real-time status. Device communication and control can be accessed by checking the “Round” radial
button for the desired layer. This enables the user to then utilize the complete set of GIS Toolbar functions
discussed in the section above, but the Information button and Selection button will be specific to the selected
layer category, such as Controllers or Cameras. The figure to the right shows the Controller category selected for
layer view and for layer control. With these checked, the mouse actions will now control the controller layer for
Hover Information and the Action list (right-click or Action pane).

To control a layer from the GIS map, you must check both the square box to see the layer and the round
button to get information or control the object.

Each distinct layer can be toggled on or off. ATMS tracks the user preferences on the GIS Map view with the
“stickiness” feature, displaying the last active layers when returning back to the GIS Map tab.

ATMS can display almost anything as a GIS layer type. The standard GIS setup will include layer representation
for Controllers, Events, Congestion, Background Aerial & Centerlines, CMS, Camera, and Switches. To add a

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 74

GIS display of a desired layer that is not part of the standard software setup, contact your Cubic/Trafficware
representative.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 75

4.4 Bing Map View

Instead of the GIS map view Bing Map view provides a real-time, map-based, status map display of all of the
ATMS system elements. Choose the Map Tab to select the Bing Map view. All standard Bing functions and
layer actions are integrated in the Bing map. Below, is the Bing Map Road view followed by a zoomed in Bing
Map Satellite view.

The Road view is shown below.

The Satellite view is shown below.

To select the preferred view please click on the button next to the search bar and you can toggle between
views.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 76

4.4.1 Maneuvering the Map

Each user has access to the standard Bing Map tool set. The preferred method is to use a standard windows
mouse as shown below.

Use the thumbwheel to zoom in/out of the map. In addition left-clicking the mouse and using the slider bar
under the legend section can also be used zoom in/out.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 77

You can also use the Keyboard to also maneuver the map.

+ Zoom In
- Zoom Out
→ Move Right
 Move Left
Delete Deleted selected Controllers
CTRL Select multiple intersections via the Mouse
F5 Google Maps Only- Map refresh

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 78

4.4.2 Bing Search Tool

The user can search for controller, devices, cities, street names, etc via the Bing Map Search Bar.

The user simply enters data, selects the data and then hits the search tool to zoom to the desired
search selection.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 79

4.4.3 Map Option Area

The Option tab is used to select various Real-time data, tooltip data and selection filters on the Map. The
Legend Tab is used to turn On/Off real time data to the Map. The Preset Tab is a used to create user specified
zoom levels for quick viewing access.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 80

The tabs are shown below.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 81

4.4.4 Real-time data: Controller Status

ICON COLOR STATUS

Green Communicating with ATMS

Red Not Communicating with ATMS

Gray Offline

Orange Controller Status selection Off (Not Active)

Purple Controller selected using the CTRL Key

Circle

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 82

4.4.5 Real-time data: Congestion Status
This selection will display congestion lies on the Map if selected.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 83

4.4.6 Real-time data: Scan Data

This selection displays scan data on the Map if selected

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 84

4.4.7 Tooltip On/Off:
This selection displays id and simple status information about controllers, congestion, devices, events,
CAD Feeds, devices or vehicles on the map. Hover over the selected controller, congestion segment, etc.
and the information will be displayed.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 85

4.4.8 Map Selection Filters
This selection is used in Conjunction the Edit Mode and with the CTRL Key to select devices as you
rubber-band around them. By selecting the CTRL Key on your keyboard and left clicking your mouse you
can select multiple controllers, devices, scan elements, congestion segments, etc. as shown below.

The selected controllers will be displayed Via a Purple circle within the push-pin.

Once selected the user can Right-click the mouse to access various ATMS features that are available on the
Ribbon bar.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 86

4.4.9 Moving Selected Data
After selecting data you can easily move it on the Map by simply dragging the selected data to a new
location.

1) Press the refresh icon to reset the Bing map view

2) Select the devices that you want to move by checking them on the Map selection filter
3) Hit the CTRL key on the keyboard and ‘rubber-band’ around the selected devices.
4) With the left mouse button depressed move the devices to the new location.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 87

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 88
4.4.10 Map Legend Area

The Legend section allows the user to Map layers ON/OFF.

Once deselected, the map will not display the items when viewing the data.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 89

4.4.11 Bing Map Presets

This area allows the user to define their own Bing Map zoom level or define it for the entire agency. When
selecting a Preset, the user must first go to the desired level on the map and create a preset. The preset will be
named and can be selected from a list as shown below.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 90

4.4.12 Map Navigation Area

This area allows the user to navigate and Refresh the map. In addition the user can select viewing and editing
features. Finally various Backgrounds can be selected.

Slider Bar

The slider Bar allows the user to Zoom-in and Zoom-out of the map.

Refresh Button

Refresh will force an update of the Bing Map.

View Button

The view button will allow the user to exit the edit mode mand view all updated
edited data.

Edit Button

Edit allows the user to edit selected information about selected controllers,
devices scan elements or congestion segments.

The user must first select a device (s) and then hit the Edit Button.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 91

Once that is completed, the Options Area will add the Toolbox tab which will allow the user to edit data directly
on the map.

The user can place intersection controllers, devices or scan elements on the Map.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 92

 Controllers, Devices, Events and Scan Elements

To add a controller to the map select Controller under the Toolbox. A drop down selection list of controllers
will occur. Select the controller type that you want to add to the Map and left click it on your mouse. With the
left mouse button depressed, drag the controller and place it on the map at the appropriate position.

Once you un-click the left mouse button, the following configuration screen will be displayed.

This screen allows you to keep or reenter the controller Station ID, Name, Drop number, IP address and other
configuration selections. . Once OK is depressed, the controller will be placed on the map.
ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 93
By left-clicking the mouse and slowly dragging the icon, you can move it anywhere on the map.

Below is the list of devices that can placed on the Map.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 94

Devices work the same way as Controllers. To add a device to the map select Device under the Toolbox. A
drop down selection list of Devices will occur. Select the device type that you want to add to the Map and left
click it on your mouse. With the left mouse button depressed, drag the device and place it on the map at the
appropriate position.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 95

Some of the devices that can be placed on the map are is shown below

Once a device is selected you can Right-click your mouse and get the ability to delete or change the device
properties.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 96

Below is a view when Properties are selected. The use can fill out the appropriate information for the selected
device.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 97

When adding a device to the map the user has the ability to set a Zoom level threshold. If this threshold is
exceeded (i.e. zoom out greater than this level) then the device or event will no longer be displayed on the map.

Under the edit mode, select the Visibility tab as shown below. It will show the current zoom level.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 98

The current zoom level can be changed by simply zooming in/out on the map. Zoom to the desired level and
click on the specific devoice or event to set the zoom level as shown below:

Starting with ATMS 2.7, Blue Toad integration to show travel time, current speed, historical
speed and speed limit is available. Contract your Trafficware representative for further
information.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 99

Events can also be added to the Bing maps from the toolbar as shown below. These include Accidents, CAD
Events, Construction and Incidents.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 100

Scan Elements are used for individual controllers to display information concerning intersection control such as
RYG Phase status, detector, pedestrian information, etc. The user should zoom into the intersection via the
slider bar or mouse thumbwheel before dropping Scan Elements on the map. Then Click on the intersection to
select it so that the Scan Elements association can be created. Next, you can drag individual Scan Elements or
utilize the utility named Create Scan Group, which drops STD8 phase scan elements around the selected
intersection. The scan elements are shown below:

Starting with ATMS 2.9, Directional arrows are created using the Configuration->Intersection
Layout tool. Details of this tool are described in chapter 5 of this manual.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 101

The Create Scan Element Utility is available when you right click the mouse as shown below.

Once that is selected the RYG Phase Scan elements are dropped on the map.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 102

Scan Elements work the same way as Controllers. To add a device to the map select Scan Element under the
Toolbox. A drop down selection list of Scan Elements will occur. Select the Scan Element type that you want
to add to the Map and left click it on your mouse. With the left mouse button depressed, drag the Scan Element
and place it on the map at the appropriate position.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 103

Once placed on the Map the user can select it and by clicking on it and a drop down menu will be shown

Select Properties to edit the scan element. The screen below shows the proprieties for a Phase 8 Northbound
Arrow

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 104

The screen below is associated the scan element to be displayed when a Phase 6 Eastbound vehicle call is
shown on the controller.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 105

Scan elements can be sized, rotated, mirrored, etc. vial the scan tool bar.

Colors for scan elements can be selected using the color drop-down menu.

An extended color palette can be chosen via the advanced button:

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 106

In addition, any scan element may be flashed on the map by simply selecting flash as shown below:

This can be useful in displaying flashing yellow arrows, etc.

In addition a display priority number is also available to prioritize the display of an individual parameter if the
user has an elements that may want to be displayed at the same time. Priority levels go from 0-16 where 16 is
the lowest priority display and 0 is the highest priority display.

For GIS Scan elements, please refer to Section 6.20 of this manual.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 107

4.4.13 Group Copy/Paste/Delete Controllers and Scan Elements from Bing Map

The user has the ability to copy, paste, or delete controller or its scan elements from the Bing Map. The user
must first select the group of items that they want to group together using the Options Tab on the Map legend.
In the example below we would like to create a new controller on the Bing Map by copying existing controller
ID 25 and its scan elements. First select Edit Mode on the legend and the Options Tab. Next go to the Map
Selection Filters area and select Controller and Scan Element.

Using the CTRL key and right clicking the mouse you can select Controller ID 25 and its Scan elements.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 108

Next Right click the mouse and the following selection screen will come up.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 109

Select Copy to copy. Next move the mouse pointer to the location that you want to paste the new Controller
and its Scan Elements to. Right click the mouse and you will see the following screen.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 110

Select Paste and the controller and its Scan Elements will be placed on the Map. The Controller will be given
the first unused ID Number.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 111

Please note that only the Controller Definition and scan elements will be copied on the map.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 112

4.5 Google Map Interface

Google Maps are available if the agency desires. The agency should contact their Cubic/Trafficware
representative for further information in acquiring this interface. Access to the internet is required as well as
running the Proxy Server to see real-time data on the Map.

The Map view is shown below.

The Satellite View is shown below:

The Google interface take its data elements such as scan data from the GIS Map or Bing Map as the zoomed in
view shows below.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 113

Due to the fact that Google Maps are browser based, the user will need to utilize the Scan Builder that is
available in the in the Google Map editor to build scan screens. In addition, devices and new controllers can be
added via the Google Map editor described below.

4.5.1 Google Map Editor

The Google Map editor is a user friendly way to add scan elements to the Google map browser interface. To
access the Google Map Editor select “Edit Map Elements: via the Cubic/Trafficware Icon on the top left of the
screen.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 114

This will bring up the Google Map Editor as shown below.

The editor uses the Bing Map interface to add Controllers, Devices and scan elements to the Google Map. By
utilizing the Bing Map editor, the user can use the same interface and tools as described in sections 4.4.11 and
4.4.12.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 115

After editing the Google Map interface you can go to the Map tab on the overview screen. To refresh the Map
Hit the F5 key on your keyboard.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 116

4.6 Detail Pane

The Detail pane of the Home page is located on the bottom of the Home page as shown below. This pane displays
real-time secondary system information and tools for the user, such as detailed alarm information, weather
updates, split monitoring, and viewing of indexed document information by intersection.

The Detail pane offer the same “tuck-in” and “pin-up” features that the Field Chooser offers, allowing the user to
maximize the use of the screen space. If the user chooses to “un-pin” the Detail pane, it will move down and tuck
under the bottom of the ATMS Home page, causing the main Overview pane to re-size and display in that space.
To access the “tucked-in” Detail pane, simply place the mouse over the detail bar on the bottom, and the Detail
pane will “pop-up”. Use the push pin to “pin” the pane back up. The Detail pane also offers a common “pane re-
sizing bar” with the Overview pane, which contains the List and GIS views. When the Detail pane is pinned this
bar is present. To re-size the panes, simply click and drag the bar to the desired pane size.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 117

Note: Beginning with ATMS 2.8, the user can detach the detail pane or any of its tabs from the ATMS
overview screens to a separate screen or area.

The Detail pane presents two layers of tabs. The first layer of tabs only will appear at first. To open the second
layer of Detail tabs, select the “Selected Details” tab. This opens controller-specific functions of the Detail pane.
The tabs in the first layer are NOT controller specific, but general system-based information categories. These
tabs include Recent Alarms, Alarm History, System Notes, Incident Triggers, Current Users and Adaptive. The
tab labeled Selected Details, opens up the second layer of tabs. This second layer of tabs are Splits, Detailed
Splits, Notes, Documents, Alarms, and Conflict/MMU and provide intersection-specific information in real-time.
The figure below shows the first layer of available tabs on the Detail pane. This illustration specifically shows
how ATMS can provide real-time Alarm History to each user:

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 118

The figure below shows how opening the Selected Details opens the second layer of tabs available on the Detail
pane:

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 119

4.6.1 Recent Alarms Tab
Recent Alarms provides real-time controller alarm information as programmed in each controller. Recent Alarms
are not recordable events in the ATMS database, but serve as temporary notification of Alarm activity since the
user has logged in. By default, if the alarms are not set up in the controller, the only reported alarms are
“Communication Restored” and “Communication Failure” (alarms 257 & 258 respectively). The client will report
these communications alarms after the number of attempts as programmed in the system by the factory.
The Recent Alarms tab provides a “Field Chooser” to control the specific alarms that are displayed. Displayed
alarms can be controlled by checking or un-checking each box in the Field Chooser. The “stickiness” feature of
ATMS will remember the desired field preferences for each user based on the last settings.
When an inbound alarm is received, detailed information such as intersection ID#, name, date, time, and alarm
type will appear in the Recent Alarm tab window. Simultaneously, an alarm icon will appear to the left of the
corresponding controller on the controller List View pane. The alarm information and alarm icon will remain until
the alarm is acknowledged by highlighting the controller with the alarm and navigate to Actions…Real
Time…Clear Alarms. This will clear the alarm icon from the List but the alarm details will remain displayed in
the Recent Alarms tab until the user is logged off.
If this is performed and the alarm icon is still present, then browse the alarm list for additional alarms for that
controller.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 120

4.6.2 Alarm History Tab
Alarm History provides a history log of controller Alarms and Events as programmed in each controller. Both
cleared and un-cleared alarms will appear in this tab. Upon log in, ATMS will populate the Alarm History tab
with the most current 100 system alarms from midnight of the current day. Alarms that appear in the Alarm
History are written to the system database for future report generation.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 121

4.6.3 Current Alarms Tab
This option will display a tab which allows users to display the active Alarms 1 through 81 for all controllers.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 122

4.6.4 Controller Specific Alarms
ATMS will display specific controller alarms. Below is an explanation of the specific controller alarms generated
in ATMS.

Event /
Alarm Name Comments
Alarm #

Is active when power is applied to the controller. Transitions upon

1 Power Up Alarm.
power-up and power-down may be logged.

2 Stop Timing Indicates that one of the stop time inputs is active.

This is brought into the NEMA input called "lamps" or "indicator".

3 Cabinet Door Activation This input is typically used for the cabinet door switch in TS1
cabinets.
This alarm indicates that coordination is failed. There are two
ways in which coordination may fail: 1) The TS2 method in which
two cycle faults have occurred during coordination, but not when
4 Coordination Failure
coordination is inactive. 2) A serviceable call has not be serviced
in 3 cycles. This is the traditional method, which predates the
NEMA TS2 method.

5 External Alarm # 1

6 External Alarm # 2

7 External Alarm # 3

8 External Alarm # 4
This alarm, when active, indicates that the Closed-loop Enable
9 Closed Loop Disabled
parameter is set to OFF.

10 External Alarm # 5

11 External Alarm # 6

12 Manual Control Enable Alarm active when Police Push Button is ON

Coordination Free Switch

13 Alarm active when System/Free Switch is FREE
Input

14 Local Flash Input Asserted by monitor or cabinet switch when in flash

Alarm is active when the controller receives an SDLC message

15 CMU or MMU Flash Input
from the MMU that it is in flash

Indicates a Conflict Monitor Fault has occurred when CVM is

16 MMU Fault
NOT asserted by the controller and Stop-Time is applied.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 123

 TS2 Alarm. It indicates that a serviceable call has not been
17 Cycle Fault serviced in approximately two cycle times and coordination was
active at the time.
TS2 Alarm. It indicates that a serviceable call has not been
18 Cycle Failure serviced in approximately two cycle times and that coordination
was not active at the time.
19 Coordination Fault Indicates that a cycle fault occurred during coordination.

Intersection is in Flash due to a critical controller fault. This fault

20 Controller Fault
includes Field Check, Response Frames, Proc Diagnostics.

Indicates SDLC communication with at least one of the Detector

21 Detector SDLC Fault BIUs is faulted. This is a non-critical fault and will not cause the
intersection to flash.
SDLC communication with the MMU has experienced a Response
22 MMU SDLC Fault Frame Fault. This is a critical fault and will cause the controller to
flash.
SDLC communication with one or more of the Terminal and
Terminal Facility (cabinet)
23 Facilities BIUs is faulted. This is a critical fault and will cause the
SDLC Fault
controller to Flash.
SDLC Response Frame
24 Report from SDLC interface
Fault
The background EEPROM diagnostic has detected an unexplained
25 EEPROM CRC Fault
change in the CRC of the user-programmed database.

One of the controller detector diagnostics (No Activity, Max

26 Detector Diagnostic Fault Presence or Erratic Count) has failed. Refer to section 13.1 for
further details.

One or more local detectors have been reported to be faulted by the

Detector Fault From
27 Loop Amplifer and BIU. These faults include open loop, shorted
SDLC
loop, excessive inductance change, and watch-dog time-out.
Associated with the queue detector feature. Data indicates which
28 Queue Detector alarm
queue detector is generating the alarm.
A ped detector is faulted due to user program limits being
29 Ped Detector Fault exceeded. These include No Activity, Max Presence and Erratic
Count on screen MM->5->4.
Pattern Error / Coord Active when coord diagnostic has failed. Refer to section 13.1 for
30
Diagnostic Fault further details
Active after a delay timer expires (see MM->1->6->7) if the
31 Cabinet Flash Alarm
monitor, or a controller fault, causes the cabinet to flash.
Requests Time Download from central system (see MM->6->4)
32 Time Download Request
Note: Used in V61.x controllers only

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 124

33 Street Lamp Failure Street Lamp Failure (Channel A)

34 Street Lamp Failure Street Lamp Failure (Channel B)

35-36 Reserved
37 Download Request Requests Download from central system (see MM->6->4

Coordination Pattern changes are logged to the event and alarm

38 Pattern Change buffers using this alarm number. The data byte stores the new
pattern number.

39 Reserved Patriot Reserved

40 Reserved Patriot Reserved

41 Temperature Alert #1 Temp Alert 1 – High Temp
42 Temperature Alert #1 Temp Alert 1 – Low Temp
43 Temperature Alert #1 Temp Alert 1 – Status Alarm
44 Temperature Alert #2 Temp Alert 2 – High Temp
45 Temperature Alert #2 Temp Alert 2 – Low Temp
46 Temperature Alert #2 Temp Alert 2 – Status Alarm
47 Coord Active Set when coordination is active (not free)
48 Preempt Active Set when any preempt is active

49 HP Preempt 1 High-Priority Preempt 1 (Rail Preempt 1)

50 HP Preempt 2 High-Priority Preempt 2 (Rail Preempt 2)

51 HP Preempt 3 High-Priority Preempt 3

52 HP Preempt 4 High-Priority Preempt 4

53 HP Preempt 5 High-Priority Preempt 5

54 HP Preempt 6 High-Priority Preempt 6

55 LP Preempt 1 Low-Priority or Transit Priority Preempt 1

56 LP Preempt 2 Low-Priority or Transit Priority Preempt 2

57 LP Preempt 3 Low-Priority or Transit Priority Preempt 3

58 LP Preempt 4 Low-Priority or Transit Priority Preempt 4

59 EEPROM Compare Fault Checksum of firmware memory has changed

60 Coordination Failure Alarm is ON when Coordination has failed

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 125

 Alarm is ON when coord is active and in transition for times over
61 Sync Transition 3 seconds.
Alarm is OFF when coord is active and in SYNC.

62 Light Rail / Transit Alarm Rail Check

63 TSP Active Trigger Used with ATMS to initiate download of TSP Data

Synchro Green Adaptive Indicates that the agency has the Synchro Green Central Module
64
Active and it is currently sending a Pattern to the local controller.

65 Light Rail / Transit Advance/Check-in/Check-out Detector Stuck

66 Light Rail / Transit Advance/Check-in/Check-out detector inputs are out of sequence

Failed to arrive at the Check-in Detector in the proper amount of

67 Light Rail / Transit
time

68 Light Rail / Transit Failure to arrive at the Check-out Detector

69 Reserved

70 Internal Clock Jump Occurs when the clock jumps by +/- 2 seconds

Indicates SDLC communication with at least one of the Detector

71 SIU Input SDLC error
SIUs are faulted.
SDLC communication with one or more of the Output file SIUs are
72 SIU Output SDLC error
faulted.
Active when a key is pressed until the Display Time expires (see
73 Controller Access
Unit Parameters, MM->1->2->1)
Active when user enters security key – records the User # in the
74 User Key Login
data byte
The software could not access the files on “disk” devices such as
75 “Disk” File Access Error
Flash RAM, RAM, SD card or USB device
Database Change Database is edited in a controller by a Logged in User is reported
76
Notification to ATMS

77 Emergency Priority Emergency Priority Activation (ON/OFF)

SIU CMU SDLC Fault SDLC communication with the CMU has indicated a Fault
78
error condition.
SDLC communication with the CMU has failed. This is a critical
79 SIU CMU SDLC error
fault and will cause the controller to flash.

80 CMU Channel Conflict Conflict detected between SIU CMU channels

81 FIO Changed Status FIO Status has changed

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 126

82 UPS On Battery Indicates that the cabinet is running under UPS Power

Indicates the controller is in Flash due to the UPS Battery low

83 UPS Flash Input
power
This alarm is set when the V80.x parameter FailTime (MM->6->1)
84 Communications Failure
expires (Controller received no communications)

85-86 Reserved

87 External Alarm # 7

88 External Alarm # 8

89 External Alarm # 9

90 External Alarm # 10

91 External Alarm # 11

92 External Alarm # 12

93 External Alarm # 13

94 External Alarm # 14

95 External Alarm # 15

96 External Alarm # 16

97-113 Reserved

114 HP Preempt 7 High-Priority Preempt 7

115 HP Preempt 8 High-Priority Preempt 8

116 HP Preempt 9 High-Priority Preempt 9

117 HP Preempt 10 High-Priority Preempt 10

118 HP Preempt 11 High-Priority Preempt 11

119 HP Preempt 12 High-Priority Preempt 12

120 Reserved

121 Special Function Output Special Function #1

122 Special Function Output Special Function #2

123 Special Function Output Special Function #3

124 Special Function Output Special Function #4

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 127

125 Special Function Output Special Function #5

126 Special Function Output Special Function #6

127 Special Function Output Special Function #7

128 Special Function Output Special Function #8

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 128

4.6.5 ATMS Specific Alarms
ATMS keeps track of up to 265 alarms. Alarms 1-128 are controller specific alarms. Alarms 129-256 are specific
to Master controllers. Alarms 257-267 are specific to ATMS. Below is an explanation of the specific alarms
generated by ATMS.

Alarm # Alarm Name Description

257 Communications Restored Communications between the controller and the ATMS
communications server has been Restored
258 Communications Failure Communications between the controller and the ATMS
communications server has Failed
259 Repetitive Phase Max The agency can set up a threshold in the admin.ini file to
track the number of phase maxes that occur
260 Congestion Incident – N Bound The High congestion threshold programmed by the
agency has been reached for North bound traffic
261 Congestion Incident – S Bound The High congestion threshold programmed by the
agency has been reached for South bound traffic
262 Congestion Incident – E Bound The High congestion threshold programmed by the
agency has been reached for East bound traffic
263 Congestion Incident – W Bound The High congestion threshold programmed by the
agency has been reached for West bound traffic
264 Congestion Incident – N-E Bound The High congestion threshold programmed by the
agency has been reached for Northeast bound traffic
265 Congestion Incident – N-W Bound The High congestion threshold programmed by the
agency has been reached for Northwest bound traffic
266 Congestion Incident – S-E Bound The High congestion threshold programmed by the
agency has been reached for Southeast bound traffic
267 Congestion Incident – S-W Bound The High congestion threshold programmed by the
agency has been reached for Southwest bound traffic
268 Database differences occurred after A synchronization with StreetSync shows databases have
latest StreetSync synchronization been updated/changed.

To access a complete list of all system Alarms and Events, the user can generate an Alarms report from the Reports
page of ATMS.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 129

4.6.6 System Notes Tab
The System Notes tab displays universal, system-wide messages of any type to be displayed to all users. These
messages can be specific to other users, general agency-wide statements, specific information, etc. Creating
System Notes will be discussed in the ACTIONS section of this chapter.

Figure 4-4: System Notes tab

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 130

4.6.7 Incident Trigger Tab
The Incident Trigger tab replaces the Camera/CMS Events tab on earlier versions of ATMS. As of Build 1.5.43,
ATMS can trigger based on intersection alarms or congestion thresholds. The Incident Trigger tab displays
logged system-generated Controller, Camera and Changeable Message Sign activity that has been generated by
the Incident Trigger feature in ATMS. This tab will display the Intersection ID#, Description of triggering event
(Controller Alarm Trigger or Congestion Trigger), and Date/Time it occurred. Automated system-generated
activity is programmed in the Incident Trigger section of the Definitions Module of ATMS. Manual device
operation is not logged by ATMS.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 131

4.6.8 Adaptive Tab
The optional Adaptive tab is used to get real-time information from systems and controllers that have the Adaptive
software module. Information such as Degree of Saturation, Optimal Cycle length, Optimal Split times, etc. will
be displayed.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 132

4.6.9 Daktronics Tab
The optional Daktronics tab is used to get real-time information from Daktronics CMS devices that have been
declared by the user. Message and Status information will be reported.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 133

4.6.10 Opticom Tab
The Opticom tab (Only available in ATMS 1.x) displays
system-generated Opticom log retrieval activity for all
intersections. ATMS generates this log retrieval is by
defining an incoming general preemption alarm (#48) from
the controller to initiate an automated log retrieval from the
Opticom discriminator card(s) to ATMS. A special serial
cable for communications between the Opticom card(s) and the serial port of the controller is required for this
feature. Contact your Cubic/Trafficware representative for this cable.
The automated system-generated activity is programmed in the Action pane under Configuration…Edit Definition
screen for Controller set up as shown above. The Opticom box notifies the system that when incoming preemptions
are received by ATMS, the system will automatically generate a log retrieval process for the corresponding device.
The user can set up two Opticom two channel cards (ID1 and ID2) along with the preemptions (one preemption
per channel) that each card will call.
Next, verify the proper serial connection between the controller serial port and the Opticom EVP cards. Program
the controller serial port for Opticom. For the 900 series controller, set the “PC Print” port for “CMU” under
MM>6>1. For the 2070, define the “Opticom” setting for the appropriate serial port (Async1-4) under “Port
Bindings” (MM>6>6).
Set the serial port to the appropriate serial rate. (The default Opticom serial settings are 9600 baud). For both the
2070 and the 980 series controllers, go to MM>6>2. For the 2070, set the “FCM” to 6. The 2070 requires a power
cycle to initiate the Port Binding changes.
Enable EVENT #48 (MM>1>6>1) and ALARM #48 (MM>1>6>4) in the controller. This flags a general
“Preempt Active” alarm to be sent to ATMS during “Full Status” polling of the controller.
Lastly, enable “Preempt Events” in the controller. In both controllers, this is located at MM>1>6>7>1.

Figure 4-5: Opticom Log, System-Wide

After programming at the controller and ATMS is complete, all incoming Preempt Alarms will result in a real-
time log retrieval of the event. An example of this is shown below. This automated feature of log retrieval only
gathers the most recent logged event, not the entire log on the Opticom EVP card.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 134

4.6.11 Current Users
The Current Users tab displays all of the users that are actively logged onto the system. This feature helps in
situations such as to determine which other users can be contacted through the Broadcast Message feature, or who
is logged into the system when the server needs to be shut down for updates, etc.

Figure 4-6: Current Users Tab

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 135

4.6.12 Selected Details Tabs
The Selected Details tab opens a second layer of tabs that provide specific intersection(s) information:

Splits Tab
The Splits tab provides real-time graphical split monitoring for a single controller based on controller selection
from the Controller List or GIS pane. The split monitor graphically displays three values for each active phase:
• ACTUAL (real-time)
• PROGRAMMED
• AVERAGE OF 5 CYCLES
To view the Split monitor, highlight the desired controller from the List or Map, then select the Splits tab. If
multiple controllers are selected, the Split monitor will display the first selected until another single selection is
made.
The real-time split information is gathered during the system’s “Full Status” activity for the programmed group(s)
in the Scheduler, and historical reports for the Split data can be retrieved in the Reports module of ATMS.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 136

ATMS provides saving and printing options by using the icons on the upper left of the screen.
An informational “Hover Balloon” will appear detailing the exact value of the split when positioning your mouse
over the targeted split bar.

To make viewing of this split monitor easier, it is recommended to re-size the Selected Details pane by dragging
the pane break upward.

The Split Monitor and Detailed Split Monitor can also monitor green time utilization while in “FREE”
operation. However this requires the local firmware in the controllers to be the following revisions for
this feature to properly calculate for this feature: v61.3k or higher for 970/980/981 series NEMA
controllers and v76 for 2070 and ATC controllers.

Detailed Splits Tab

The Detailed Splits tab provides real-time numerical split monitoring for a single controller.
The Detailed Splits monitor will gather information for each intersection when the ATMS client is launched. This
monitor only works for a single controller at a time.
To view the Detailed Split monitor, highlight the desired controller from the List or Map, then select the Detailed
Split tab. If you wish to reset the collected data, select the “Reset” icon in the upper left of the Detailed Split
window.
ATMS provides saving and printing options by using the icons on the upper left of the screen.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 137

Historical split information can be retrieved through the “Split History Report” in the Reports section.
This report displays only the GREEN time of the split.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 138

 Notes Tab
This tab displays controller-specific Notes when a controller is selected and this tab is open. ATMS displays the
creation date of the Note, the message, and the author of the Note.
Creation of the System Note or Note (controller note) will be discussed in the ACTIONS section of this manual.

Figure 4-7: Notes tab for a specific controller

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 139

 Documents Tab
This tab provides for ATMS to index and view Documents (files) such as .pdf, .dwg, .doc, .xls, .jpg, etc, by
intersection. Using this feature enables your staff to quickly locate as-built drawings, cabinet prints, pictures and
files by selecting the desired intersection, then double-clicking the desired document displayed in the Documents
tab. ATMS will then open the selected document using the appropriate viewing program. Creating a Document
will be discussed in the ACTIONS section of this chapter.

ATMS does not provide the viewing programs such as AutoCAD Viewer, Adobe Reader, and Microsoft
programs to view specific files. Each local agency is responsible for providing licensed installations of
each program for this feature to operate.

Figure 4-8: Documents tab with a launched Signal plans

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 140

 Alarms Tab (Controller)
This tab provides controller-specific Alarm details for the selected controller on the List or Map. This information
is a narrowed view from the general Alarm information on the Recent Alarm and Alarm History tabs. To view
controller-specific alarms, select the targeted controller and navigate to the Alarms tab in the Selected Details tab.
These alarms can be cleared from the list by navigating to Actions…RealTime…Clear Alarms.

Conflict / MMU Tab

This tab records the log retrievals from Cubic/Trafficware CMU’s and
MMU’s that are brought back to ATMS. A special serial cable for
communications between the CMU/MMU and the serial port of the controller
is required for this feature. Contact your Cubic/Trafficware representative
for this cable.
If the Cubic/Trafficware CMU or MMU is connected to the controller, select
the targeted intersection from the List or Map, then navigate to the Real-Time
Icon or “right-click”. The user has a choice of three monitor report types:
• Conflict/MMU Report – log of any recordable event in the monitor
• Conflict/MMU Trace – log of signal status leading up to conflict
• Conflict/MMU Programming – log of current permissive programming in monitor
After selecting the desired report type, “Upload” the monitor information as shown below. When the upload is
complete, “Close” the window.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 141

The new Conflict/MMU report will be posted in the Conflict/MMU tab.

To view the Conflict/MMU logs, simply highlight the targeted report and select the “return” key. The report is
stored in a text format via Internet Explorer browser. The browser will launch and the report will be displayed
(see Figure below).

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 142

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 143
 Opticom Tab (by Controller)
This tab provides the same Opticom log information as detailed earlier, but displays the log information by specific
controller for easy retrieval and tracking. To view the controller-specific log, highlight the targeted controller and
navigate to the Selected Details-Opticom tab.

Before moving to the Navigator pane, it is important to understand the

controller database filing system. The next section discusses each
database file type and how each is used in ATMS.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 144

4.7 Understanding the ATMS File System
ATMS maintains separate copies for each of the controller databases in the SQL database of the server. This
section explains the purpose of each file and how ATMS maintains the file system and interfaces with the ATMS
Laptop Partner software.
The key to understanding the ATMS file system is how the system protects the Permanent File (last successful
download through the communication system). The system performs a verification by uploading the controller to
the Upload File and comparing the upload with the Permanent File. The verify procedure is used to prevent edit
changes at central from being copied over valid changes made in the field through the keyboard.

4.7.1 Upload File

ATMS saves a copy of the controller database uploaded by the ATMS Laptop partner or StreetSync software
during a “Hot Sync” or the ATMS system upload to the Upload File. The Permanent and Standard Files are
protected from all field uploads and from the ATMS Laptop partner or StreetSync software hot-sync
procedure. Therefore, the user is required to manually copy the Upload File to either Standard or Permanent to
commit any changes uploaded through the system.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 145

4.7.2 Permanent File
ATMS saves a copy of the last successful download to the Permanent File to maintain an accurate copy of each
controller database in the field. A separate Permanent File for each controller is stored in the SQL database on
the ATMS server.
The user can also perform an “Upload” from the controller directly into the Permanent File by selecting this
function in the Upload procedure.
The Permanent File is transferred to a laptop or tablet via the ATMS Laptop partner or StreetSync software
synchronization process. This insures that the laptop or tablet carries the last successful download to the field.

Whenever a download creates a Permanent File an archived file is also created. This file can be accessed by
the agency to view or restore historical controller data.

4.7.3 Standard File

ATMS provides an edit copy of the controller database called the Standard File. A separate Standard File for
each controller is stored in the SQL database for the ATMS server. The user edits the Standard File and
downloads the edited database to the controller. If the download is successful, the ATMS system will
automatically copy the Standard File to the Permanent File. Therefore, the system always maintains a copy of
the downloaded database in the Permanent File.
The user can also perform an “Upload” from the controller directly into the Standard File by selecting this function
in the Upload procedure. This function is effective prior to beginning a database editing process, assuring a proper
starting point for editing.

4.7.4 Special Files

Five Special Files are provided in ATMS as additional, complete controller databases for some future purpose.
Special Files for each controller are stored in a SQL database on the server with a .sp1, .sp2, .sp3, .sp4 or .sp5
file extension.
Special Files should be named with descriptive titles like "Christmas shopping period", "Football game day", etc.
to make the files easy to identify when you want to download them to a controller at a later time. You can edit
Special Files using ATMS just like you edit the Standard file.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 146

4.8 Upload - Download in ATMS
The ATMS Actions pane (upper left of Home Page) provides a Database menu in the Home Module. The
Database menu provides the manual communication tasks to the controllers in the field. The automated
communication tasks are handled by the Scheduler and will be discussed later.
This section explains why the system uploads to a separate Upload file rather than the Standard file you edit when
you manage the controller database from your workstation. This section also explains the difference between
Download Verify and Download No-Verify.

4.8.1 Uploading in ATMS

The "Upload” procedure uploads the controller database from the
field and stores a copy in the Upload File.
The Upload File is only intended to be a temporary copy of the
controller database. Therefore, the Upload File must be saved to
the Standard File before it can be edited.
The Upload File must also be saved to the Permanent File if you
want it to become the permanent record of the controller database
in the field.
Keep in mind that you should not attempt to edit an uploaded
controller database until the Standard File matches the Upload
File.
ATMS provides for the ability to directly Upload to both the Standard and Permanent Files by checking the
corresponding boxes on the Upload screen prior to uploading.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 147

4.8.2 Downloading in ATMS
Two download procedures (options) are provided in ATMS, providing the option to verify that the controller
database matches the Permanent File before you overwrite it or not:

Download With Verify

Download With Verify uploads the controller and compares the Upload and Permanent File to verify that they
match before overwriting the controller with the download. If the Upload from the controller and the Permanent
File differ, the procedure halts with the message, "Database Mismatch", and highlights the transaction in RED. At
this point, the user can compare the Upload and Permanent Files to isolate the differences and decide whether to
commit the download to the field.
For example, a field crew may have set min recalls in the field to correct a detector failure. Download With Verify
can prevent overwriting these valid field changes from the central system. In this case, the operator may decide to
set the same min recalls in the Standard File before committing the download.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 148

The four sequences (1-2-3-4) in the above illustration depict the steps performed during Download With Verify.
This process compares the controller database with the Permanent File to verify a match before copying the
Standard File or a Special File to the controller. If the controller database and Permanent File differ, the download
halts with a RED-indicated message "Database Mismatch" as shown below.
“Database Mismatch” stops the download process and prevents the local controller database from being
overwritten. At this point, the user must upload the controller data to the Upload file. The user can select the
“Compare” utility in the ACTIONS pane to compare the latest Upload File with the Permanent File. The compare
utility can help the user resolve any differences in the field data before copying over the field database with
Download No-Verify. Operating the “Compare” function will be described in the next section.

Select Verify along with Full Xfer when doing a Download No-Verify. In this way you will force ATMS in
doing an upload prior to downloading any data.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 149

 Download No-Verify (Full Xfer)
Download No-Verify is used when you don't care if the controller database is different from the Permanent File,
and most likely, the Standard File that you have been editing on. For example, after swapping out a controller in
the field, you already know that the controller database and the Permanent File do not match. In this case, use
Download No-Verify to force the system to overwrite the controller database and save the download to the
Permanent File. It is highly recommended that the system administration use discretion in regards to which users
have this capability enabled in User Definitions.
Download No-Verify is a two-step process as shown below. When the download is 100% complete, the Standard
File is automatically copied to the Permanent File in ATMS. At this point, the Permanent File reflects the
database last downloaded to the controller from the central office.

Select Full Xfer when doing a Download No-Verify.

Download Selected Changes

If the user has edited the standard database and only wants to download those changes, deselect the Verify and
Full Xfer boxes as shown below.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 150

4.9 ATMS Laptop Partner and StreetSync Database Synchronization
The ATMS Laptop Partner and StreetSync software modules provide complete controller database storage on a
Windows Laptop device. These software utilities provide a “Sync” utility to refresh the data between the Laptop
and the ATMS file system. At any time, a Laptop or tablet with this software can “Sync” with the ATMS server
or workstation.
The “Sync” procedure performs two functions:
• Saves the handheld database to the Upload File if the handheld
data is more recent than the system data.
• Copies the Permanent File from the system to the handheld if
the system data is more recent.
The system administrator is responsible for accepting and copying the
Upload File to Standard and Permanent to save databases retrieved
with the ATMS Laptop software. This is done by selecting the
Controller, Group, or Flex Group and utilizing the Copy feature in the
Action pane. It is recommended that before utilizing the Copy
function, that each controller upload file is verified by using the
Compare feature in the Action pane. Performing both the Copy and
the Compare functions will be detailed in the Actions section of this
manual (Section 4.7.1).
4.9.1 Upload Sync
Upload sync has been added for those agencies that utilize StreetSync and want to copy their upload database to
the permanent database and create a date/timestamped Archive of this database. After performing a Sync
Operation in StreetSync you will be notified that ATMS has some upload files that have been modified in the field
vial ATMS alarm number 268 being reported. Once this alarm has been reported, the user is allowed to right-
click and select Database-> Upload Sync. This feature is described in Chapter 5 of this manual.
4.10 Summary – Understanding the ATMS File System
The following summarizes the key points and features provided by the ATMS file system:
• The Standard File is the edit copy of the database used to download changes to the field.
• You must “Upload to Standard” or “Copy” Upload to Standard before the data uploaded from the field
can be edited.
• You must “Upload to Permanent” or “Copy” Upload to Permanent” if you want the database uploaded
from the field to be the new permanent copy on your system.
• The Permanent File is automatically saved when the Standard File is successfully downloaded.
• The Permanent File is used with Download-Verify to prevent overwriting edits made in the field.
• Download No-Verify always overwrites the field database and saves to the Permanent File.
• The Permanent and Standard files should be saved manually after a Laptop or tablet synchronization by
performing a “Copy” of the Upload File to the Standard and Permanent Files.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 151

4.11 Lock User Feature
An added safeguard in ATMS is the Lock User Feature. This feature allows a database to be locked
to all other users when another user is in the edit screen of a database. In other words, multiple
users will not be allowed to edit the database simultaneously. If a database is locked and a user
attempts to edit the database, they will be prompted with a warning screen that it is locked, but they
can still view the database.
The database will become unlocked when the current user clicks Apply, OK or Cancel and leaves the edit screen
of the database. Care should be taken because the database will remain locked if the user leaves the edit database
screen without using the Apply, OK, or Cancel buttons. (One way this can be done is by clicking on any one of
the Actions or Navigation options.)
Once the database is locked, it can only be unlocked by two methods. The first is that the user that locked it must
go back to the edit screen and click the Apply, OK, or Cancel buttons. A second way is by any other user that
has the “Unlock Database” feature enabled in their user permissions. Agencies should limit the number of users
that have the “Unlock Database” permission to administrators only.
Caution must be taken because if a user has the “Unlock Database” enabled in their user permissions, they can
unlock the database and make changes. This can result in multiple users being able to edit the database at the
same time. A result of this can be that if the original user leaves the database edit screen, he/she will be locked
out until the database is unlocked.
The following screen shots show the various lock database features. The screen-shot below shows that the
database is not locked at that moment.

The screen-shot below shows that the database is locked and which user is editing it.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 152

To grant permission to unlock databases, the following screens have to be edited using the Definitions-Edit User
icon.

Select the Permissions and Preferences tab to grant Unlock permissions.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 153

Once you have the permission to unlock a database, the following screen-shots show how to unlock it.

This is the warning screen that appears when a user clicks on the unlock database option.

This is the warning screen that appears when a user clicks on the database\edit menu when a database is
locked by another user.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 154

5 Navigator Tool Bar – Home Module
This chapter covers the features provided on the Navigator Tool bar’s selection of the Home module in ATMS.
The Navigator Tool bar allows the user to select various Modules (HOME, Definitions, Reports, Etc.) in ATMS.
These “modules” act as tabular pages to each section of the system. Access to each module or sections within a
module can be fully controlled by setting access within User Definitions.
ATMS comes with 4 standard modules: HOME, Definitions, Reports and Help.
Below is the Home Module selection.

Below is the Definitions Module selection.

Below is the Report Module selection.

Below is the Help Module selection.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 155

The Actions section of the Home module enables the user to perform functions on selected controllers. The Actions
are classified in five categories:
• Database
• Real-Time
• Utilities
• Configuration
• Communication Status
The Actions section enables the user to perform eligible tasks against the selected controller(s).
All Actions can be performed by selecting the icons and the features in each action’s drop-
down menu or by “right-clicking” within the main Overview pane.
The Search Engine icon (shown on the left) enables the user to perform
controller lookups (shown on the right) to the List or Map by any
classification type. Examples of the lookup types are by Controller
Name, ID#, Flex Group, Master, Controller Type, Communication
Drop, etc.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 156

5.1 Actions

The figure above shows the four categories of Actions available in the Home module. These actions pertain to
activities that involve controllers, not other system devices. Performing actions of other system devices such as
cameras, CMS signs, etc., are performed directly from the map.
Access to each Action is determined and controlled by the ATMS system administrator when setting each User
Definition value as discussed in Chapter 6. If a function appears then the feature is enabled and available for use.
If the system administrator has disabled a function for a specific user, then the function will not appear as a choice.
The full Action list will also appear in the main Overview pane by “right-clicking” and navigating to the desired
task.
“Grayed-Out” functions indicate that a specific Action is not permissible given the controller(s) selection. An
example of this would be an attempt to simultaneously edit two different controller types. ATMS cannot perform
this due to the variances in each database type.
Users have the ability to “invent” their own workflow by selecting a set of controllers, then moving from Action
to Action. Each Action can be performed by highlighting a controller or multiple controllers from the List or Map
tabs of the Overview pane.
The figure to the right shows the categories of Actions that can be performed for a user with complete access and
control privileges.
This section helps new users with basic controller operations such as:
• Editing controller databases
• Performing controller uploads, downloads and sending manual commands
• Performing coordination diagnostics and import/export to Synchro
• Performing single and multiple intersection status “Scan” screens
• Copying and comparing databases
Controllers may be selected for Actions from the Controller List View or Controller Map View. Controller
selection can be made easier and quicker by using the Search Engine.
After selecting the target controller(s) in the List or Map tab, choose Database in the Home…Actions module, or
by “right-clicking” the mouse. With full privileges enabled, the user has the ability to Edit, Upload, Download,
Compare, Copy or do various other actions to the selected database(s).

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 157

The Upload and Download selections allow the user to exchange data between ATMS and the field. ATMS
provides a database file system that protects database changes made in the field.

5.1.1 LIST-Based Selection

Controller(s) can be selected for database editing either from the Map view or from the List view. To select a
controller(s) for editing from the List view, any of three mouse actions can be taken:
• Highlight a single controller by clicking on it
• Highlight multiple adjacent controllers on the list by selecting the top of the desired group and
dragging the mouse until all of the desired controllers are highlighted for Actions.
• Highlight multiple random controllers on the list by clicking on each controller while pressing the
“Ctrl” key on your keyboard.

The illustration above illustrates the selection process of four controllers by highlighting each with “Ctrl” key
depressed. After selecting the targeted intersections, the user can “right-click”, which will produce a “pop-up”
action table (shown in the RED circle), or navigate to the Database Actions on the selection ribbon show on the
upper left of the screen (shown in the BLUE circle). The available actions will match using either method.
After selecting the List-based method, the GIS map will “push-pin” the corresponding controller locations on the
GIS map, indicating that they are selected from the GIS map view as well.
To clear the highlighted controller(s) from the List view, navigate to the Search Engine, select “Reset All”, then
“Find Now”. This refreshes the List and Map lookups.

The List and Map tabs use the database, real-time status, and selection process in conjunction with each
other. Selecting from either will display a matching action on the other tab, allowing the user to
seamlessly navigate from either view without losing their work.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 158

5.1.2 GIS Map-Based Selection
For controller(s) selection from the Map tab, select the round “radial” button for the Controller layer on the GIS
Legend, then select the “Select Object” arrow on the GIS toolbar (both are circled in the Figure below).
Position your mouse to the upper-left most position above the controller(s) you wish to select, “left-click” your
mouse and hold the button as you “drag” your mouse around the desired controllers for selection. This action
creates a “wrapping box” around the controller objects. ATMS will then place a real-time, color-coded “push
pin” at all of the selected controller locations. The real-time status will correspond with the previous color-
coded “dot” before the selection. Both of these icon types are displayed in the GIS Legend in the Controller
Layer.
The selected controller(s) will be indicated by the status-colored “Push-Pins” on the GIS view, and will have
corresponding, highlighted intersections on the List view. The GIS view and the List view work from the same
database, and actions on one tab control the selection and behavior of the other.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 159

After selecting the target controller(s) through the List or Map, choose Database...Edit in the Home…Actions
module, or “right-click” from the List or Map view windows. “Right-Clicking” opens the full Action section on
the main Overview pane, instead of having to move your mouse to the fixed Action window every time you need
to perform a function.

To clear the highlighted controller(s) from the List view, navigate to the Search Engine, select “Reset
All”, then “Find Now”. This refreshes the List and Map lookups.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 160

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 161
5.2 Database

The user should refer to the Controller Operations Manual for specific details, definitions, and operation
of the controller database.

5.2.1 Database Edit

The Controller Database Editor offers many options, as
highlighted below:
• Multi-Edit Design – Access many controllers at
once. Mass viewing and editing by controller or
data type. Please note that when editing
multiple controllers, the user must select
controllers of the same type.
• The various tables from the selected portion of the database are selectable.
• Database Filter – Select the area of the database to work on.
• Based on the database Filter, the available folders will be displayed.
• Select which version of the database to work on.
• Direct database control from the List or Map.
To edit controller databases, select the desired controller(s), then select the Database icon. A drop-down menu
will be displayed. Select the Edit icon to edit the database. The main Overview pane will then display the
Controller Database Editor. ATMS will open the database screen that you last used to minimize the search time
for desired screens.
The Controller Database Editor offers viewing and editing for each of the ATMS databases. In order to protect
the integrity of the databases, the STANDARD database will always open first, as it is your main editing database.

Database Selection
Database selection is made by choosing the desired database in the Database Configuration box at the bottom of
the Controller Database Editor window. Selection is made by checking the desired database type. Only one can
be selected at a time.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 162

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 163
ATMS provides a database Filter for easy navigation to the specific database category of the selected database.
The Filter categorizes the database according to the database categories provided in the controller. When a
category is selected, the affiliated sub-categories will display in tabs within the window.
If “All” is selected, every database tab will be displayed.
The database tabs display and operate similar to Microsoft Excel.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 164

For controllers that are configured as type NTCIP 76.x 2070 Ethernet there is a way to change the category
names. You can select Full Name, Name or Controller Menu as the category display as shown below

Below are the Tabs for the Detector filter:

Name will display the default ATMS names for each tab

Controller Menu will display the menu keystrokes to program the data at the controller

Full Name will show both the ATMS name and the keystrokes.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 165

 Database Security
Our controllers provide a security code option for access control. In order to view and edit the security codes in
ATMS, the Security function must be enabled for the appropriate user(s) under User…Permissions and Privileges
in the Definitions module as shown below. When this is enabled with a value of “Yes”, a specific “Security”
option will be available in the Database Filter, and a Security tab will display all of the Controller Security Codes
when it is selected.

It is strongly recommended that if your agency uses Security Codes for controller access, that only the
System Administrator(s) have access to Edit and View the Security Codes.

If any Access Codes are programmed under MM->8>2 of the controller, the user will be required to provide a
valid user number and access code to enable the keyboard. Programming all access codes under MM->8->2 to
zero and setting the Level to NONE, disables all login procedures in the controller.
A maximum of 64 individual users and 4-digit access codes may be programmed by a SECURE user.
Therefore, if access security is used, at least one access number should have SECURE Level access.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 166

The security Level (from highest to lowest) is assigned as follows:
• SECURE User has full access to the database including the ability to assign passwords
• SWLOAD User has full access to the database and the ability to run diagnostics and load the controller
software. The user may not assign passwords.
• DIAG User has edit access to the database plus the ability to run diagnostic utilities. The user cannot
load controller software (re-flash the controller) or assign security passwords
• ENTRY User has edit access to the database but cannot run diagnostics, load software or assign
passwords
• NONE View only access to the database
The screen shown below displays the Security Passwords tab in the Security filter selection. The current example
displays Security Level options and that there are no Security Numbers (Passwords) assigned to this controller.
This option will only appear for the user if the Security setting is “Yes” under the User Privileges in the Definitions
module, and will appear for Database…Edit and Database…Edit options as allowed for the same user.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 167

 Database Field Chooser
The Controller Database Editor provides a Field Chooser to customize the displayed data fields. Each user can
check or uncheck each data box in the Field Chooser to display or hide the data column.
ATMS will remember the selection preferences by user.
The Field Chooser can be “Pinned-Up” in the Controller Database Editor screen.
The Field Chooser will automatically change and represent the active screen as the user navigates.
The Field Chooser offers “Check All” and “Clear All” boxes for each data screen to save time.

The timing database can be presented in two ways:

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 168

 Edit by Controller
By selecting the By Controller tab in the bottom left of the screen, the data in the screen is displayed for the
selected controller. The controller selection is tabbed on the upper right of the screen. Note: If the controller
name is truncated, hover your mouse over it and the full name will be displayed.
The figure below shows the selection tab locations for both of these.
Note that the data screen shows all of the Phase Entry data for Controller #21.
Make your database changes, and select the “Apply” or “OK” button to save, “Cancel” to leave the screen without
saving the changes. As with standard Microsoft applications, “Apply” saves and keeps the screen open; “OK”
saves and closes the screen.

Edit by Entry
By selecting the By Entry tab in the bottom left of the
screen, the data in the screen is displayed for the selected
data type on the corresponding data tab. The data selection
is tabbed in the upper right of the screen and the controller
(s) are now shown in the main data screen.
The figure to the right shows the selection tab locations for
both of these.
In particular, this data screen shows the data for multiple
controllers, categorized by entry (Pattern data) instead of
by controller.
Make your database changes clicking on the cell for
editing. Some cells only allow for a drop-down selection
process, such as Coord Modes in the Split Table. In this
case you will be restricted to the available list. If you
attempt to make an invalid entry or no entry at all, ATMS
will replace it with the previously entered value, highlight
the cell RED and force you to save the screen or cancel the entire data editing session to exit.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 169

To save your work, select the “Apply” or “OK” button. Select “Cancel” to leave the screen without saving the
changes. As with standard Microsoft applications, “Apply” saves your work and keeps the screen open; “OK”
saves and closes the screen.

Data Parameter Information

ATMS offers specific database parameter information within the Controller Database Editor. This information
includes the NTCIP database object & number, and the allowed minimum (Lower) and maximum (Upper) value
entries allowed for that specific data type.
To access this information, place the mouse on the database parameter name and “right-click”. The Parameter
Information window will appear. Click “OK” to close the window.

If the Parameter Information indicates that the data object is “mandatory” in the “Required” field, the
upper and lower values are defined by NTCIP. If a value is desired that is not allowed by this definition,
it is possible that additional tables are available as a “Plus” feature in the database. Many of the “Plus”
tables allow a wider range of entries.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 170

 Pattern and Split Labels for V76.x and V80.x controllers

Editable text fields have been added to both the Coordination filter’s Pattern Plus and Split Plus tabs. The user
can describe via text descriptions of each Pattern and Split. Please do not use any special characters in the
Labels.

Pattern Name is found under the Pattern Plus tab.

Split name is found under the Split Plus tab.

This text will be displayed on the List view under the Pattern and Split Index columns along with the
corresponding pattern and split number.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 171

 Overview selections: Preview, Print, Export and Timing sheets

When in edit mode, the overview screen allows the user to preview, print or export the selected datasheet to a
text file or Excel. In addition the user can print or export all sheets using the standard print or export tools.

An enhanced feature has been added for the user to customize and print or save
Timing sheets for each database. When the user is in edit mode, selecting the
Timing Sheet icon will bring up the following menu:

The default, known as the Static Timing Sheet will print out all data for all tabs.

By selecting Run the user will print out all timing sheets.

The timing sheet can be printed or exported as a PDF, HTML, MHT, RTF, XLS, XLXS, CSV, TEXT or
IMAGE data file.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 172

 In addition the user can create a customized timing sheet, by controller type
and save it as a template to be used for multiple intersections and other users.
The user simply selects Dynamic Timing Sheet and the categories that they
want to print out. In addition by selecting Save/Update, a customized timing
sheet template will be created with the name you enter for future usage.

Similarly the export button will bring up a selection screen for you to export the entire database or selected
screens to an excel or text file.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 173

 Copy & Paste
The Controller Database Editor also offers Copy/Paste functionality, to easily copy entries between fields (rows,
columns, cells, and grids), controllers and databases. To copy a row or column, “right-click” on the row or column
parameter name. ATMS will highlight the entire data set.

Next, navigate to the desired controller tab to paste data. Select the “Apply” or “OK” button to save the changes.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 174

The Copy Grid feature enables the user to copy the entire data tab in the window. It is intended to copy & paste
data pages between multiple controller database tabs (on the upper right of the window). To perform a Copy Grid
function, select the database parameter box in the upper-left of the database window (shown below in the GREEN
circle). Select the “Copy Grid” option as shown in the RED circle.

All of the database parameters will highlight in a dark blue.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 175

Select the next controller to receive the values, select the same upper-left box, then choose “Paste Grid.”

Select the “Apply” or “OK” button to save the changes.

5.2.2 Database View

The View option presents the same information in the same navigational manner as the Database…Edit option.
When the System Administrator enables the View option the entire database will be available. However, changes
will not be allowed to be made within the database boxes. This feature is good for multi-jurisdictional applications
and for agency personnel that are not allowed to enact timing changes, but could benefit by knowing database
values.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 176

5.2.3 Database Upload
Users can select single or multiple controllers from which
to Upload database parameters.
Users can decide under which configurations the uploaded
database parameters are stored, such as uploading a
controller database directly to a Special database.
Database Upload can be performed by selecting the
desired intersection(s) from the List or Map view. After the controller selection is made, the user can navigate to
the Actions section or “right-click” to pop-up the Actions menu.
Prior to performing the Upload function, the user can perform specific selection criteria for the Upload process.
The user can uncheck the Selected box, which will remove the specific controller from the Upload process without
having to go back and repeat the selection process.
The figure below shows how a user can select multiple controllers for Upload, and remove a controller from the
upcoming transaction without re-generating the list. The Selected box for controller ID# 22 has been unchecked,
isolating controllers ID# 21 and # 25 for an Upload.

Users can also Upload directly into any or all of the additional seven databases in ATMS. By checking any of
the specific database boxes, the Upload process will overwrite the corresponding database with the uploaded file.
The following figure shows how controllers can directly upload into the Permanent database.

The figure above illustrates how ATMS has the ability to simultaneously Upload multiple controllers. This can
be performed when selected controllers are assigned to different communication drops on the Communications
Server.

The figure above shows a successful database upload for the two controllers to the Permanent databases.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 177

Based on controller types ATMS may not be able to upload multiple controllers. For example, V80.x uses a
service to upload data , whereas V61.x, V65.x and V76.x type controllers do not. Due to this difference, the user
may get the message below that will pop up after trying to upload.

Simply select controllers of the same type and the upload will proceed.

5.2.4 Database Download

Users can select single or multiple controllers to which to
Download database parameters.
Users can decide which the database to download, such as
downloading a Special database directly to a controller.

Database Download can be performed by selecting the desired intersection(s) from the List or Map view. After
the controller selection is made, the user can navigate to the Actions section or “right-click” to pop-up the Actions
menu.

Prior to performing the Download action, the user can perform specific selection criteria for the Download
process. The user can uncheck the Selected box, which will remove the specific controller from the Download
process without having to go back and repeat the selection process. The figure above shows how a user can select
multiple controllers, but within the “Selected” row exempt (uncheck) a controller from the upcoming Download
transaction. The Selected box for controller ID#22 has been unchecked, isolating controllers ID#21 and #25for a
Download.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 178

Downloading can be performed with a safety verification (Download-Verify), or be sent to overwrite the existing
controller database without a safety verification (Download-No Verify). These downloading methods have been
described earlier in this section.
The first action that ATMS performs during Download-No Verify process is an Upload. The Status box of the
Download screen will indicate two full database transactions, the first for the Upload, the second for the
Download.

It is highly recommended that only experienced and qualified users have the ability to “Download-No
Verify”.

The user has the ability to select the amount of data for Download transmission. The Download can transmit only
the edited changes, or the entire database. When the Full Xfer box is unchecked, the application will automatically
determine the parameters that have changed and transmit only the difference. When the Full Xfer box is checked,
the entire database will be downloaded to the controller. The figure below shows all three databases downloading
a full database transfer from the ATMS server.

The Configuration box enables the user to select which database to Download to the controller. The above figure
shows how a drop-down selection in the Configuration box allows selection of the Special 1 database for
Download. As a built in protection mechanism, ATMS defaults to the Standard database each time the Download
action is selected.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 179

If the user wants to attach a reason for the download, i.e. a specific mote concerning the download. Simply
click in the reason area and add your note(s).

Like the upload feature, based on controller types ATMS may not be able to download multiple controllers. For
example, V80.x uses a service to upload data, whereas V61.x, V65.x and V76.x type controllers do not. Due to
this difference, the user may get the message below that will pop up after trying to download.

Simply select controllers of the same type and the download will proceed.

5.2.5 Database Compare

The user has the ability to Compare any combination of the eight
databases in ATMS. This feature provides the identification of
database differences for maintaining database integrity and
comparing actual records against the file copy (Permanent).

Differences are easily located and identified between the selected database types. ATMS identifies database
differences by color coding each database category tab and corresponding database parameter in RED. This will
occur when a difference is present between any of the selected database types. This is also true when multiple
intersections are selected for comparison. If any database value is different between multiple controllers, the
entire row will be highlighted in RED. This can be confusing as specific controller database values can be
matching, but it will still be highlighted as it is part of a selected group that contains a difference.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 180

The figure below illustrates how the user can select targeted database types for comparison. Select the Database
Configurations box in the bottom left of the screen, then place a “check mark” next to each database type desired
for comparison.

The figure below illustrates how the application can compare multiple database configurations across multiple
controllers of the same database type simultaneously. The Permanent, Standard, and Upload files are selected
for five controllers. The database parameters with no differences are identified in BLACK and the ones with
differences in RED. Note that the “Patterns” tab is also identified in RED.

The Compare utility provides a “Show Only Differences” box located near the bottom of the screen. This feature
eliminates the categories without differences and displays only the highlighted tab categories. Note that if multiple
intersections are selected for the Compare process and any differences exist within the selected databases of all
of the controllers, ATMS will identify that category in RED. The above figure shows 3 databases selected for 2
controllers. The circled area shows that the Minimum Green value for Phase 1 is different for one controller (#22),
with a value of 5, than it is for the other (#25) with a value of 0.
In most cases the Compare utility is best used one intersection at a time, to compare field copies (Upload) with
record copies (Permanent).

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 181

5.2.6 Coordination Diagnostics
The Coordination Diagnostics feature enables the user
to run coordination database checks prior to download
or by uploading an active database to run a diagnostics
from ATMS. Users can run diagnostics on databases
either from ATMS or directly on the controller.

First, select the controller(s) from the List or GIS Map,

then navigate to Actions…Utilities…Coordination Diagnostics. Next, select the database that you wish to run the
Coordination Diagnostics as shown below. Select the Run Diagnostics button or Close to exit.

If the database passes the diagnostics check, the controller line will be highlighted GREEN as shown below.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 182

If a database does not pass the diagnostics, it will highlighted in RED and each individual error will be
described. In the picture below, the database has been found with multiple errors.

NOTE: Coordination Diagnostics can be done on multiple controllers as long as they are
programmed as the same controller type.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 183

5.2.7 Database Copy
This utility allows the user to copy file types for the selected
intersection into its other databases (e.g. Special) or any
number targeted intersection database(s).
The copied file may be from any of the file types (standard,
permanent, upload, special 1, etc.). This feature is very
useful when copying a database maintained in ATMS as a
template.
The Figure below shows how a user can copy a template Standard database (#105-Test Controller) to the Standard
database of three other controllers.

First, select the Source Controller and the Database Configuration that you wish to copy from. Next, select the
Destination Controller and the Database Configuration that you wish to write the database to. Select “Apply” or
“OK” to save, “Cancel” to quit and leave the screen without saving.

Once the Copy function is performed, the database(s) that were overwritten are lost. It is suggested that
the System Administrator use discretion when giving authority to users for this capability.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 184

5.2.8 Database Archive
Whenever a user does a database download, the system
creates an archive of the database that was downloaded in
the \Naztec\Nazserv\Archive\Data\[ID]\ folder (replace the
ID with the controllerID).

In order to select the archive we have a new action under the “Database” actions called Archive(s) Selected. The
user is allowed to select up to 2 archives. Once selected you can go back to the database view option and from the
configuration drop down you can select the archive databases. Notice that if the user enters a reason for Download
after doing a download, that will be reflected in the Reason column.

Below is an example on how to select an archived database. First select the Archive(s) Selected action.

This pops up when a user selects an archived database and clicks on the “Select” button

Once selected, you can treat this file the same as any .std, .upl, .perm. .sp1, or any other database file.
Below is a screen that uses the archive to compare previous data to the data currently in the controller
database.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 185

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 186
The user can select a maximum of 2 archive files to view, compare and copy with the existing standard (.std) and
permanent (.prm) databases. Below is a screen showing copying an archive database to another database.

5.2.9 Convert Database

Cubic/Trafficware provide this utility to assist the agency in converting NTCIP specific data from a variety of
NEMA or ATC controllers to different controllers using this utility. Please see the list below:

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 187

 Convert From Controller Types Convert To Controller Types

The following matrix indicates the allowed database conversions.

Below is the conversion screen. Please enter all information. In the section below the conversion setup, there is
a report on some non-standard conversions that have occurred.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 188

Please note that both databases must be in the Controller “Offline Table” prior to conversion.

NOTE: It is the responsibility of the agency to insure that the converted database is working as
desired before field installation because non-NTCIP items will not be converted.

5.2.10 Local Download

Local Download allows the user to copy selected databases to a directory so that they can e-mail it to their
Cubic/Trafficware representative for review. First select controllers on the overview screen as shown
below:

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 189

Next select local Download icon and the following screen will come up.

0
You can next select which database you would like to save and to which directory you would like to save it to.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 190

Selecting download will copy the databases to the directory that you select.to the directory that was selected.
The following screen is displayed when the download is completed.

The files will be located in the directory folder as shown below:

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 191

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 192
5.2.11 33x Configurator

This feature is only available for two Controller types; NTCIP v65.x 2070 Ethernet or NTCIP v65.x 2070
RS232. It is intended for those agencies that utilize Model 330, 332, or 336 cabinets. It is a user friendly
way to view and/or \edit the 2070-2A input Mapping tab as shown below.

The user will select the 33x Configurator and the following screen will be displayed.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 193

The user is allowed to select via a drop down list the specific input that is needed for any of the 64 inputs
that are allowed via their cabinet type. Simply selecting the function will remap it once the database is
saved and downloaded to the controller. Please note that I/O is latched and if the user changes the
mapping, then the controller will need to be powered/OFF then ON (physically or via the Run-Timer) to
latch the new mapping.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 194

5.2.12 Upload Sync

Upload Sync has been added for those agencies that

utilize StreetSync and want to copy their upload
database to the permanent database and create a
date/timestamped Archive of this database. After
performing sync operation in StreetSync you will be
notified that ATMS has some upload files that have
been modified in the field via ATMS alarm number 268
being reported. Once this alarm has been reported, the
user is allowed to right- click and select Database->
Upload Sync.

Next a screen will be displayed of all controllers that have been modified since the last sync. Specifically, these
controllers have been modified in the field and have been uploaded by a StreetSync user and they have a later
date/time stamp than the permanent that resides on ATMS.

Selecting the controllers that you want to update and hitting the Sync button will copy the synced Upload file to
the Permanent file and create an Archive file.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 195

5.2.13 Overview Screen and Detail Pane Toolbars

A toolbar above the overview screen is provided to the user to allow them to export the data shown on the pane
to Excel or a printer. The items on the toolbar will be appropriate to what data is displayed.

Below is the Overview toolbar followed by the Detail pane toolbar.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 196

5.3 Real-Time
The Actions under the Real-Time functions offer the ability to view and apply intersection status and conditions
directly with the field. Examples of this are view real-time status screens called “Scan Screens”, downloading
manual preempt calls or patterns, or implementing additional levels of system control.
Some Real-Time Actions can be programmed to be automatically performed in the Scheduler (discussed in Chapter
6).

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 197

5.3.1 Scan Screens

Scan Screens are used to display real-time status from one or more intersections. They depend on the agency
setting up continuous Full status or GYR polling via the scheduler. The refresh rate, or real-time accuracy of
these displays is dependent on the speed of communications provided and the number of simultaneously
competing higher priority requests such as upload or download. The ATMS Administrator assigns a priority to
all communication requests and Scan Screen displays will be interrupted when a higher priority request is received
on its assigned communication channel.
After highlighting the target controller in the Overview Pane, select Real-Time…Scan. A window will appear with
an individual window for each of the selected controllers. The Scan window(s) offer individual views for General
Information, Aerial, Coordination, Detectors, Front Panel, and Alarms. The Aerial screens will display the GIS
Scan Data layer information and will need to have the desired data points assigned to each screen using the Scan
Screen Builder in the Definitions module.
All of the R/Y/G returns, detector calls, timing counters, pattern information and alarms are already scanned
during the “Full Status” task performed by the Scheduler.
The below picture shows a Scan window for four intersections selected from the List or GIS map.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 198

ONLY in the Legacy display mode, the Scan Screen window offers two view settings, 1) Tile or Film Strip, and
2) Tab view. The Tile View displays all of the selected windows in a three across format. The Film Strip View
places the same selected Scan windows in a single-row, left to right view. The figure below shows the Tile View.

The second view option setting is the Tab All view setting. This drop-down option enables the user to quickly
select a specific tabbed view for all controllers within the Scan window, or individual tab views can be achieved
by selecting the desired tab for each individual controller Scan.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 199

 General Information Status Screen
The General Information screen is the most commonly used Scan Screen in the system.
General Information displays the controller’s time of day, phase, pedestrian, and overlap outputs. It displays phase
and pedestrian calls. It gives the user a quick view of on-line and coordination status as well as general
coordination information.
In addition there are icons that will select addition specific real-time status such as alarms, detector inputs,
communication, coordination and controller front panel status.
Below is the General Information Scan screen for V50.x, V61.x, V65.x, and V76.x controller types.

Below is the General Information Scan screen for the controller type V80.x.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 200

 Map View Icon

The Map selection displays a zoomed view from the GIS map. The GIS Scan Data
layer for that specific intersection will be displayed in real-time. Each individual
view offers the ability to navigate within each specific Aerial tab.
This view is always available using the drop down selector or via the Map icon.
The user can select either the Satellite Mode or the Road Mode for the
background map image by right-clicking the mouse over the map and choosing
the background type.

Coordination/ Timing Status Icon

The Coordination status tab displays the same coordination status as displayed on
the controller under MM>7>2. It also displays timing status as displayed on the
controller under MM>7>1. In addition to the active coordination information, the
Coordination tab also displays any alternate phase time tables, phase option tables,
alternate detector groups or call/inhibit tables associated with the active pattern.
For those users with the Emergency.now module, emergency vehicle status is also
displayed.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 201

 Active Detectors Icon
The Detector status scan tab displays real-time detector channel inputs for up to 64
channels. Active detectors are shown in PURPLE.

Front Panel Status

The Front Panel tab displays the same status as menu MM>7>9>5 on the TS2 or
2070 controller. This is also the default “Time Out” screen on both controllers.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 202

 Alarms
The Alarm status tab displays the un-cleared alarms directly from the
controller. The screen will display the same information as screen
MM>1>6>8 on the controller.
All alarm numbers include an on-screen alarm description. By hovering
over the alarm with your mouse, a balloon tip with the alarm description
will appear.

Communications Status Icon

The Communications Status icon shows the user the active communications
status as well as the controllers and servers time and the difference in those times.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 203

 Peer to Peer Status Icon
For V80.x controllers the Peer to Peer status icon has been added so that
the user can verify if Peer to Peer communication is working as desired.
This status screen displays each controller’s programmed Peers (up to
16) and if they are actively communicating.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 204

5.3.2 On Demand Scan and On Demand RYG Scanning

Agencies utilizing serial communications (Direct connect or Dialup Modem) may want to consider
selecting the On Demand Scan options. Serial data, depending on the BAUD rate may be slow to update
when scheduling Full status or GYR polling. By using this feature, the agency will NOT have to schedule
continuous Full status or GYR status polling via the scheduler. When the user wants to monitor a particular
intersection, he can use this to start communications to the particular intersection. When selected, it will
bring up the real time data via the scan screen and begin the polling of the intersection.

Selecting this will bring up the scan screen as normal and as soon as the user closes the scan screen, the
communications will be stopped.

To gather data such as Alarms, Split history or Detector Vol/Occ data, the user should set up schedules for
each on a daily basis.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 205

5.3.3 Instant Pattern
The Instant Pattern selection has been made available for
users to manually control a controller, group or flex-group
of controllers by immediately overriding the current
operation with a Pattern and running that pattern for a
specific duration of time or indefinitely. Select the
intersection, or group of intersections, select Real-
Time>Instant Download>Instant Pattern, then choose the
pattern that you want to implement and a duration of time that it is to be implemented (1 minute to 254 minutes,
255 indicates indefinitely). The “Timer” entry is in Minutes for all Patterns except “STOP TIME”. STOP TIME
is sent with a “Timer” value in seconds. Available Patterns include Free, Flash, Revert (manually reverse the
existing pattern back to TOD) and 48 programmed patterns.
In addition, if the user has previously defined CMS devices, the user can choose one and choose a message to be
displayed when running this special operation. By depressing the Download selection, that pattern will be sent
immediately to the controller(s) and force the controllers to run that pattern until the Timer value expires. The
controller(s) will then revert back to the scheduled system pattern operation.

Due to the power of the “Stop Time” command, it is highly recommended to use discretion in regards
to which user(s) have this feature enabled under User Definitions. Also note that programming a “Stop
Time” value of 255 will not allow an indefinite “Stop Time” period.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 206

5.3.4 Instant Preempt
The Instant Preempt selection has been made
available for users to manually control a
controller, group or flex group of controllers by
immediately overriding the current operation
with preemption (Train, EVP, or Transit) and
running that preemption for a duration of time
or indefinitely. The user will select the
intersection, or group of intersections, choose
the preemption (1-10) that they want to implement and a duration of time that it is to be implemented (1 second
to 9999 seconds). The “Timer” for this function is in seconds. In addition, if the user has previously defined CMS
devices, the user can choose one and choose a message to be displayed when running this special operation. By
depressing the Download selection, that preempt command will be sent immediately to the controller(s) and force
the controllers to run that preemption until the Timer value expires. The controller(s) will then exit preemption
as programmed and revert back to the scheduled system operation.

NOTE: It is highly recommended to use discretion in regards to which user(s) have this feature enabled
under User Definitions.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 207

5.3.5 Phase Call

The Phase Call function allows the user to remotely place a call on a phase without downloading a Recall, which
is part of the controller database and has to be removed. The Phase Call command is sent to a controller(s) with
a time value. This allows the controller to acknowledge a call for a specific amount of time then release after the
timer has expired, without requiring any further actions.
To perform a Phase Call, select the controller(s) for the command. Navigate to Real-Time…Phase Call. Check
the boxes for the phases that you want to place a call. Next, enter a value (in minutes), for the call to be placed.
The example below places a Phase Call on Phase 1 for a period of 2 minutes (circled in RED). Select the
“Download” button to send.
The illustration below shows a Phase Call placed for Phase 1 while a “General Information” Scan Screen is active
(circled in BLUE). The call will remain for 2 minutes until the phase is served (if the timer expires), whichever
is first.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 208

5.3.6 Ped Call

The Ped Call icon works just like the Phase call icon. Ped calls can only be placed on ATC and 2070 controllers
with version 76.x software or above.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 209

5.3.7 Instant Special Function (Output Control)
The Instant Special Function selection has been
made available for users to manually control a
controller, group or flex group of controllers by
immediately overriding or adding to the current
operation a special function output and running
that special function output for a duration of time
or indefinitely. The user will select the intersection
or group of intersections, choose the special function output (1-24) that they want to implement and a duration of
time that it is to be implemented (1 minute to 254 minutes, 255 indicates indefinitely).
In addition, if the user has previously defined CMS devices, the user can choose one and choose a message to be
displayed when running this special operation. By depressing the Download selection, that pattern will be sent
immediately to the controller(s) and force the controllers to run that preemption until the timer value expires. The
controller(s) will then revert back to the scheduled system operation.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 210

5.3.8 Download Real-Time

The Download Real-Time selection has been made available for users to manually send the central server’s time
to a controller, group or flex-group of controllers. Automatically performed time-sync downloads are performed
by the Scheduler at programmed times.
The user will select the intersection or group of intersections, and then depress the Download selection. The
server’s time will be sent immediately to the controller(s).

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 211

5.3.9 School Zone Manual Flash

This selection enables the user to manually send an override command to the Chronomax Time Clock. This
function requires a timer value and overrides the clocks scheduled TBC operation, and can be set to an “ON” or
“OFF” state for the programmed period of time.
To perform a School Zone Manual Flash command, select one or more Chronomax Clocks from the List or GIS
map. Navigate to Actions…Real-Time…School Zone Manual Flash. The selected Chronomax Clock(s) will
appear in the main window. Check one or both desired clock output channels (Output 1 and/or Output 2) to
activate, enter a “Timer” value in minutes for the override to occur. Select the “Download” button to send the
override. A confirming message will appear the transaction.
Select “Close” to exit without action.

5.3.10 Conflict / MMU Report

The Conflict/MMU Report selection has been made available for users to upload the internal monitor reports on
Cubic/Trafficware brand CMU’s or MMU’s via the controller’s communications port. The user will select the
controller(s) and then depress the Upload selection.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 212

This Conflict/MMU monitor report will be sent immediately to the server for report purposes. Accessing the
reports can be performed through the Conflict/MMU tab of the Details pane as described in section 4.2.

5.3.11 Conflict / MMU Trace

The Conflict/MMU Trace Report selection has been made available for users to upload the monitor Trace report
from Cubic/Trafficware brand CMU’s or MMU’s via the controller’s communications port. The user will select
the controller and then depress the Upload selection. The Conflict/MMU monitor Trace report will be sent
immediately to the server for report purposes.
This Conflict/MMU monitor report will be sent immediately to the server for report purposes. Accessing the
reports can be performed through the Conflict/MMU tab of the Details pane as described in section 4.2.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 213

5.3.12 Conflict / MMU Programming

The Conflict/MMU Programming Report selection has been made available for users to upload the TS2 MMU or
Conflict monitor’s report from a controller. The user will select the controller and then depress the Upload
selection. The Conflict/MMU Programming monitor report will be sent immediately to the server for report
purposes to verify correct conflict programming.
This Conflict/MMU monitor report will be sent immediately to the server for report purposes. Accessing the
reports can be performed through the Conflict/MMU tab of the Details pane as described in section 4.2.

5.3.13 Opticom Time Update

This selection will download the server’s time to any Opticom unit that is connected to the selected controller(s).
This will enable a constant time reference to be used by both the controller and the Opticom units, and enable the
Opticom logs to display accurate event data.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 214

5.3.14 Coord Failure per Phase – Status

This selection will upload the results of the Coord Diagnostics from the selected controller (MM>2>8>5) and
give you the Phase errors so that you can modify your database to resolve coordination errors.

5.3.15 Coord Failure per Phase – Reset

This selection allows you to reset any coordination diagnostic failures (errors), once you’ve fixed them, so that
the controller can attempt to transition back into coordination while the same pattern is active.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 215

5.3.16 Clear Alarms

The Clear Alarms selection has been made available for users to clear the real-time alarm data on the List View
for a controller, group or flex group of controllers. To clear the alarms, select the controller(s) and then navigate
to Actions…Real Time…Clear Alarms. A verification message will come up asking the user “Clear Alarms for
This Controller?” and if the user depresses the “Yes” selection, the alarms for that controller(s) will be cleared
and the icon will disappear from the Alarm column on the List View.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 216

5.3.17 Time Space Diagram

ATMS can generate a Time Space diagram for controllers that are in coordination. The Time Space utility
provides a bi-directional Green Band calculation and Delay-Flow calculations. The Delay-Flow band is designed
to illustrate the delay time of the cars in the platoon that did not stay within the Green Band, and were “Delayed”
in the coordination operation. All calculations automatically update in real-time at a user-defined rate of 15, 30,
45, and 60 second intervals, or can be set to calculate from historical values that have been saved on the server.
The Time Space utility uses the speed and distance information from the Actions…Configurations...Edit
Intersection Link Speed. If this section is not accurately completed, the Time Space diagram will not work
properly.
To initiate a diagram, select any number of adjacent controllers from the List or GIS Map, then navigate to
Actions…Real-Time…Time Space. For a real-time Time Space diagram, set the “Real Time” value to the desired
time interval value for the report resolution. The interval resolution can be set to 15, 30, 45, or 60 seconds as
shown in the left most circle below. At any time you can refresh the diagram for a current real-time reading
instead of waiting for the selected interval counter to expire. This can be done by selecting the “Plot” button on
the bottom right of the screen.
A historical Time Space can be generated from the stored database by setting the “Real Time Refresh” value
circled below to “OFF”. Next, select the desired Date/Time value from the drop-down.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 217

The user can display various information by checking the appropriate boxes on the bottom of the time space
diagrams. This information includes Labels, Solid Bands, Up Approach, Down Approach, Link Bands and
Arterial Bands.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 218

Offsets can be adjusted by moving the white Box on the Time line as shown below.

Capability has been added to print out the display shown on the screen using the Print button. In addition,
the user can transfer the adjusted offset data to the selected database and save it using the Save Offsets
button.

The Time Space Diagram that has been added in ATMS requires the local firmware in the controllers
to be the following revisions for this feature to properly calculate: 61.3k or higher for 970/980/981
series controllers and v76 for ATC controllers.
****Older controller firmware versions will not report correctly to this feature.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 219

5.3.18 Clear Comm Status

The “Status” LED on the List view displays the status of the last attempted transaction with a controller. The
LED displays colors for the following default status categories:

GREEN - On Line and communicating

RED - Off Line and should be communicating
YELLOW - Intersection is in Flash
CYAN - Intersection has reported a Coordination Failure
PURPLE - Intersection is in Preemption
GREY - Off Line and not being polled for status

The user may customize some of the alarm colors under the Definitions Module Alarm notifications selection.
The Clear Comm Status action is occasionally needed to clear old or incorrect status data from the last attempted
transaction to the controller. Clearing the old data enables controllers that have had a manual change in status,
such as placing them on the Controllers Offline list, removing them from a “Full Status” poll, or a failed
transaction, to display an accurate real-time status instead of the status of the last transaction.
To perform a Clear Comm Status action, select a controller or multiple controllers from the List or GIS map, then
navigate to Actions…Real-Time…Clear Comm Status. A confirming message will appear. Select “Yes” to clear
or “No” to exit.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 220

5.3.19 Real Time Master

This selection is used with any Centralized Traffic

Responsive Master to show its status in real time. It will
show the following screen below to assist the user in
selecting proper indexes and parameters for their
centralized TR Master. In addition, The user can set a
Master e-mail notification that will notify the user every time the pattern changes.

In addition, there is a Real-Time selection to create an e-mail notification to a user distribution List via the
selection of Master Notify as shown below.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 221

Once selected, the following screen is displayed so that the user can notify that Pattern changes are occurring
with a specific defined message to a specified User notification group.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 222

5.4 Utilities
The Utilities section of the Actions pane allows the user
to perform informational tasks specific to controllers.
These include printing coordination schedules, creating
indexed notes and documents, and import/export of
Synchro data.

5.4.1 Time of Day Schedule

The Time of Day Schedule presents a printable calendar of coord data. This
data can be displayed and printed in Daily, Work Week, Weekly, or Monthly
formats. The Monthly format is shown below and is selectable by the circled
selection at the top of the screen. The selection for the formats is made by
clicking on the corresponding boxes at the top of the calendar screen. The
user can print these pages by selecting the corresponding icon on the upper
left of the screen in the desired format (The print area and format areas are
circled in RED).

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 223

5.4.2 Notes
The Notes section of Utilities enables users to create both
Notes for specific controllers and general system-wide
use.
Each Note provides a date and named user for reference.
Each Note is displayed in the Selected Details pane, either
the System Notes tab for System-Wide notes, or Selected Details…Notes tab section for Controller notes.
To create a specific Controller Note, choose Utilities…Notes. Next, select “Controller”. This will open a “Select”
box for specific controller selection. Choose the specific controller for the Note. Finally, enter the desired Note
text in the “Description” box. Save and close.

To view a controller-specific Note, select the controller in the Overview Pane, the Notes file can be viewed in
the Detail Pane by choosing Selected Details…Notes.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 224

To create a general System Note, choose Utilities…Notes. Next, select “System Wide”. Next, enter the desired
Note text in the “Description” box. Save and close by hitting the OK button.

To view the System Note, select the System Notes tab in the Details Pane. Regardless of the controller selection
activity on the List or Map, the information will remain unchanged in the System Notes tab.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 225

5.4.3 Documents
This feature enables the system to index specific
documents such as cabinet prints, pictures and files by
controller.
The user can easily access and view documents in the
Selected Details pane.
Viewing the documents requires third party programs such as Excel, Word, AutoCAD, Adobe, Paint, etc, to view
the corresponding Document. These programs are not included in the basic ATMS software package.
To create a Document, select a controller from the List or Map view, then choose Utilities…Documents to associate
files, such as spreadsheets or drawings, related to the intersection. Type the desired text in the “Description” box,
and “Browse” to the desired file in the “File” box.

When the controller is selected (GIS or List), the Documents file can be viewed in the Detail Pane by choosing
Selected Details…Documents. Double-clicking on the file name will launch the application and file.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 226

5.4.4 Broadcast Message
ATMS provides the ability to send text messages to
everybody logged on to the system. Navigate to
Utilities…Broadcast Message. A text box will appear in
the main Overview Pane. The message box will accept
any ASCII character within the message.
Select “Send” to send the message, or “Close” to exit.

The text message will be sent to everyone that is logged on at the time it is sent.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 227

5.4.5 Sort Day Plans
ATMS provides the ability to sort time entries that are
not displaying chronologically on a Day Plan database.
The following picture shows an example of a Day Plan
that has mixed entries, and could be sorted to more easily
read the chronological order. By performing the Sort
Day Plan action, the entries will be automatically
organized.
The database below needs sorting.

To perform a Sort Day Plan, select a controller or multiple controllers from the List or GIS map. Next, navigate
to Utilities…Sort Day Plans.
The selected controller(s) will appear with boxes for the Standard and Special databases and all 24 Day Plans in
the Permanent database. Check all desired boxes to perform the “Sort”.
The Field Chooser window enables the user to select which database and Plan boxes are displayed.
All of the boxes can be selected by selecting the “Select All Plans” button.
All boxes can be cleared for re-selection by selecting the “Clear All Plans” button.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 228

Select the “Sort” button once your selections have been made. Each controller that properly executes the “Sort”
will appear GREEN.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 229

5.4.6 Excel Export

ATMS provides the ability to export a controller database into a custom-formatted Microsoft Excel timing sheet.
This feature is designed to enable users to customize their own Excel-based file, and export the entire controller
database or specific data parameters to the file.
Cubic/Trafficware does not provide or maintain these Excel files, but provides this tool for the customer
customize their exports. Once each file is prepared to use for this tool, save or copy it to the server at the:
“C:/Naztec/ExcelExport” folder. We have provided in ATMS a NEMA TS2 (v61.x) Excel file for your reference.
To perform an Excel Export, select a controller from the List or GIS map, then navigate to
Actions…Utilities…Excel Export. A list of available Excel files will appear under “Template Name”. This list is
generated from the available files in the “Template” folder.
In the bottom left of the window, select the Database to export. The default will be the “Standard”.
Select the “Export” button to execute the command. A new window will appear to save the file to a specified
location and designate a custom file name.

Starting with ATMS 2.9, Cubic/Trafficware has modified all the names that are used by the Excel
Template. The updated names are unique based on controller type and data parameter. Each name will
have a unique identifier that can be used by the agency’s Excel development team to create their
customized Excel spreadsheet. Once referenced, any future changes to the ATMS database will not
affect the Excel spreadsheet from working.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 230

5.4.7 Day Plan Report
The Day Plan report is a Utility that allows the user to select multiple controllers and to view their day plans
side-by-side to assure that intersections are lining up with coordination schedules.
First select a controller or multiple controllers and ten Select Utilities->Day Plan report as shown below:

Once selected, the following report is displayed on the overview pane:

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 231

Each controller’s schedule is displayed along the X axis. Each schedules is displayed along the Y axis
using military time from midnight (00:00:00 AM) to 23:59:59 PM. Each color change represents a new
pattern for that controller. The Y-axis scale is in minutes that goes from 0 minutes (midnight) to 1440
minutes (the following day’s midnight).

Hovering the mouse over a schedule identifies the particulars of a controller’s schedule in a list view.

This tool allows users to quickly verify that controllers along a corridor have their schedules lined up for
coordination.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 232

5.5 Communication Status

The Communication Status section is used to interface directly to the Comm Server and Administrator to
view various status screens. This includes communication status and Administrator event status. This area
can assist the user in determining the stability of the system or various communications links.
5.5.1 Admin Event Status
The Admin Event Status allows the user that is
running the client to investigate the integrity of the
administrator program. They user must select the
Drop via the pull down selection. Once selected,
the Admin Event Status will list the scheduled tasks
that it has completed and issue a Date/Timestamp
for monitoring purposes. The top section displays the communications integrity, the second section display
live events as they occur in real-time and the bottom section will show the last 100 events once the Update
key is selected. The last 100 events can be exported to a text file via the Export key for user convenience.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 233

5.5.2 Server Status
The Server Status will display Communications
Server activity based on the drop that the user
selects. This information, such as transfer time,
successes/failures of the communications lines
and activity queue counts can assist users in
validating their communications.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 234

5.5.3 Server Activity
The server Activity selection will allow the user to
view the current activity on each drop.
A display indicates comm activity where a
indicates no comm activity. A drop down selection
is available for the user to display up to 50 drops at a
time simultaneously.

5.5.4 Clear Comm Status Buffer

The Clear Comm Status Buffer allows the user
to clear out communications for all controllers
and force the client to repopulate the
communications on the list view. This can be
used to clear status of controllers that you have
put offline or that you have disabled the Full
status or RYG Status. Once cleared you should
see a displayed on the list view.
Once this is selected, the following confirmation screen will be displayed:

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 235

5.5.5 Admin Update
The Admin update is used to update the
Administrator if the user adds a new controller to
the ATMS system, edits the configuration of a
controller or modifies any scheduled activity. If
you run any of the above activities and do not run
Admin Update, the administrator will not
recognize that you have modified it. It has been
added to allow the operator to control when Administrator updates occur so as not to impact users currently
running ATMS. Among the typical times to run Adimin updates would be after modifying anything in the
configuration section, adding or modifying Groups/Flex Groups, modifying the Controller Offline status or
adding/modifying scheduled activities. When you run Admin Update, the following is displayed to verify
that the Update was initialized.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 236

5.6 Configuration
The following selections are described Configuration settings of basic controller setup and edit screens. Please
note that each function can operate on one or multiple controllers at a time.

5.6.1 Create Definition

This section shows how to define a new controller database
in your system.
Select the Home Module. Choose Configuration…Create
Definition from the Action pane.
The New Controller screen is displayed as shown in the
figure below. From this new menu, select the controller parameters. You can “tab” through each data entry
window.
The Controller Definition screen establishes the controller ID, controller type and how the controller
communicates with the system.
Controller ID is a required entry and each controller in your system is assigned a unique ID (1-9,999). Use the
Auto-ID to generate the first ID not currently used in the system. Also note that the controller ID and Synchro
ID must be the same to exchange data between ATMS and Synchro.
The user should assign a descriptive Controller Name. This name can be used to select the controller from the
system. The Controller Name value supports a full ASCII format.
ATMS is capable of addressing up to 9,999 controllers on a single Drop. However, if the Drop is assigned to a
master, then the master will limit the subsystem on the Drop to 32 intersections. Drop 1 is the first communication
“port” on the Comm Server. The number of files that can operate must be manually set in the system initialization
files. The Controller Type must be compatible with the Drop selected. You will also notice that the Drop settings
(baud rate, IP host address, etc.) are not set in the controller definition. Please contact your Cubic/Trafficware
representative for details on configuring the Drop settings.

When defining a new Ethernet type controller, enhanced validation testing has been added to the
controller Definition screen. Each controller must have a unique ID, IP address and Port number
combination or it will not be defined.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 237

When a controller is defined as an Ethernet-based controller type, an additional box will appear for the associated
IP address.

When entering an IP address, ATMS requires all three numbers to be entered for each octet of the IP
address. For example, when programming the controller IP address the user enters “192.168.105.55”.
When entering it in ATMS it is required to enter “055” in the last octet. This is not required when
entering the corresponding entry in the controller.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 238

The controller definition provides a pull-down list for Masters and for Groups, which must be assigned before the
user can select them from the list. A controller can only be associated with one Group. The Master definition is
blank indicating that the system communicates directly with the controller without going through a master.
Associating a controller with a Master will route the controller communication through the Master controller.
The default Delay Receive in the controller definition is 1000 ms (1 second). ATMS will wait one (1) second
after sending a message to the controller before retransmitting the same message. ATMS will make a number of
attempts based on the PACKET_COMM RETRY parameter specified in the server initialization file. It may be
necessary to increase the Delay Receive value if there is significant time latency in the communication system
(such as a long turn-around time for a “slow” modem).
The default Delay Transmit is zero. It is recommended that the user does not change this value. Adding a delay
prior to each transmit message will only slow down the communication system and will not compensate for “slow
modem devices” in the field.
The Location section allows the user to define/move the controller on the Bing Map… simply hit the search Icon
and the Bing map will come up in the Road view at the defined Latitude and Longitude. The controller can be
moved and the Latitude and Longitude will be updated.

The Opticom box notifies the system that when incoming preemptions are received by ATMS, the system will
automatically generate a log retrieval process for the corresponding device. The user can set up two Opticom two
channel cards (ID1 and ID2) along with the preemptions (one preemption per channel) that each card will call.
The data logs are stored in the server for future use and can be accessed in the “Opticom Report” of the Reports
Module. The Opticom events are also displayed in real-time on the Opticom tab of the Details pane.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 239

If the agency has purchased the Emergency.now module, there is a selection for the agency to select the type of
Priority input that is being utilized.
The Firmware OS selection box is used to select the ATC controller software that
the controller is using. Valid selections are Linux (for ATC’s or 2070’s with 2070-
1C CPU boards) or OS-9 (for 2070’s with 2070-1B CPU boards. This field is used
in association with the Purdue High resolution Data module. By choosing this
setting to match your controllers CPU operating system, gathering of the Purdue
High Resolution Data via the scheduler setting “Upload Purdue Logs” allows
ATMS to properly log on to the controller, via FTP and get the data.
Like the Controller Latitude & Longitude you can select Main and cross street names using the Bing Map view.
Each special database can be given a description which can be entered in this section.

Newly defined controllers are not automatically assigned to a Jurisdiction, which will prohibit control
and editing of it until it is assigned.
ATMS will not poll for status, alarms, etc. until it is assigned to the appropriate Group or Flex Groups
as controlled through the system Scheduler.

Beginning with ATMS 2.9, when

creating a definition for certain
controller types, a new section has been
added labeled Snmp Settings. This
section is reserved for future use and
should not be programmed by the user.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 240

 Summary of Controller Definition Parameters
The Table below provides a summary of definition parameters for each controller:

Summary of Controller Definition Features

Controller ID A unique number (1 – 9999)

Controller Name An alphanumeric name (1 – 43 characters)

Controller Type Type of controller

Drop LED number on the Comm Server associated with this controller (200 maximum)

IP Address Controller IP address for Ethernet controller types

Master Name of the physical or logical system master for this controller

Group Name of the main grouping for this intersection (optional)

Delay Receive Delay in milliseconds to receive data before timing out (Default is 1000)

Delay Transmit Delay in milliseconds before transmitting (optional)

X-Reference # User can provide a cross-reference ID# (optional) (1-9 digits)

Location Latitude Bing Map Latitude

Location Longitude Bing Map Longitude

Phone Phone number of the associated dial-up modem (1-20 characters)

Use Prefix User can add numbers preceding the dialed phone number

Use Postfix User can add numbers following the dialed phone number

Azimuth [-90 to 90] User can enter a value to rotate the North arrow on the Intersection Real-Time Wizard display.

Firmware OS The Firmware OS Type for ATC or 2070-1C (Linux) or 2070-1B (OS9) hardware for FTP connections

Opticom Sets ATMS to retrieve the Opticom data via the controller when a preempt alarm is received.

Enables the associated temperature probe value to be displayed on the GIS map.Temperature values
Temperature Probe
are collected in the Scheduler task named “Temperature Probe Report”.

This selection sets the type of Emergency.now input (Priority or Preempt) that is associated with the
Emergency.now Priority Type
controller

When Preempt is selected via above, this is a timer that is used to start the Preempt when the
Emergency.now Timer
Emergency vehicle is within this time (in seconds) from the intersection.

Special 1 Description of special file 1 (optional) (1-32 characters)

Special 2 Description of special file 2 (optional) (1-32 characters)

Special 3 Description of special file 3 (optional) (1-32 characters)

Special 4 Description of special file 4 (optional) (1-32 characters)

Special 5 Description of special file 5 (optional) (1-32 characters)

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 241

5.6.2 Create From
The Create From feature enables the user to create a new
controller definition from another, including the option to
copy the sourced controller’s database. When it is desired to
create additional intersections that are similar (Controller
Type, Drop, Database, etc.), this utility can make creating new
controllers easier. To utilize the Create From feature, select
a controller from the List or Map, the option to Create From will become available under Actions…Configuration.
A window will appear in the Overview pane that is similar to the Create Definition screen.
By checking the Copy Database Files box as shown in the RED circle, the newly created controller will import a
copy of the source controller database.

5.6.3 Edit Definition

Editing the definition of a controller is done with this
selection under the Configuration folder. Choose the
controller(s) that you would like to edit, “right-click” or
navigate to Configuration...Edit Definition. The same
window will appear as with the Create Definition function.
Navigate to the desired parameters for change. The only
parameters of the Edit Definition function that cannot be edited once a controller is defined are Controller ID and
the Controller Type. If you wish to change these parameters, the controller must be deleted and re-created. If
you need to do this, make sure that you are not permanently deleting databases without copying them to the new
controller first.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 242

5.6.4 Delete Definition
Deleting the definition of a controller is done with this
selection under the Configuration folder. Choose the
controller(s) that you would like to delete, “right-click” or
navigate to Configuration...Delete Definition. A confirming
screen will appear to protect the user from mistakenly
deleting a database.
Please use caution when assigning deletion privileges for this function. It is recommended that only the system
administrator has the capability to delete controllers. The associated database(s) for the controller will be lost
with this function.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 243

5.6.5 Intersection Layout
In ATMS 2.9, Cubic/Trafficware has added a new intersection configuration
feature that has a new User Interface (UI) and a new workflow. This UI and
workflow describes the intersection by creating movement, phase, direction and
congestion definitions. The UI’s data model supersedes and is completely changed
compared to Turn Phase Movement Definitions. This new model has additional
data points that are now available. In addition, a tool has also been built to run the
conversion of the existing Turn Phase Movement data, Scan Element data and
Congestion Level data for existing customers to this updated Intersection Layout format. The updated intersection
layout data will be used in various reports, Time-Space diagrams, Congestion reports and congestion thresholds,
timing sheets and editing database movements. Scan elements will be generated and populated automatically after
the Intersection Layout is saved. Users can define templates and load them to intersections where the layout has
not yet been set. Each lane/movement can be optionally displayed on the map as per the user's preference. New
data points will become available to the subscribers using the Connected Vehicle (CV) and the TidalWave
modules. A new icon available in the configuration section or via a right click when selecting an intersection in
the list view or the map view as shown above.
Once a new intersection is defined, the user should select this feature to insure all scan elements, directional
parameters and congestion level parameters are associated with the intersection.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 244

 Creating the Intersection Layout
Select your controller and choose Configuration->Intersection Layout.

The Intersection layout screen wizard is shown below. It is used to define the geometric center of the intersection
using Latitudinal and Longitudinal references by typing the values or zooming and selecting on the map itself.

It will not be populated for a new intersection so a user is required to mark a center of the intersection.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 245

The user will use this wizard to create and associate each lane’s usage by phase or overlap, detection data,
and associated pedestrian data. Once defined, this data will be used to create Scan elements, turning phase
movements as well as congestion data. The following steps and screenshots can be followed to assist the
user in defining the intersection layout and geometry. We will start by defining our geometry.

1) If the intersection has newly been configured, the following screen will be displayed, that will assist in
creating the proper geometry for the intersection.

Once the intersection type is selected, hit the “Next” button at the bottom of the screen to continue.

2) The geometry screen will now be displayed.

3) Verify if the Latitude and Longitude fields have data. For newly created intersection both will be set to
“0”.

4) Select the icon to pinpoint the geometric center of the intersection. The Bing Map street view
display will be shown.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 246

 Keep in mind that this can be changed to assure that all mapped scan element positions are calculated
from the geometric center of the intersection. The street view of the map will be displayed. Just use the
mouse and left click to move the latitude and longitude for the selected intersection. All standard Bing
map tools are available to accurately place the intersection geometry.

5) Select a direction such as NB (Northbound) by clicking on the box labeled NB. As soon as it is
clicked, a series of symbols at the bottom of the screen will appear.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 247

6) Click a lane configuration, such as a thru arrow and a second set of symbols will appear at the
bottom of the screen.

7) Click on the specific symbol on the bottom row that you want to add to the intersection layout and it
will appear on the map. Note that Phase or Overlap Assignments box will be unlocked at this time.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 248

8) Edit the phase Overlap Information to the Phase or Overlap Assignments box. Notice that the
checkbox labeled “Visible on map” is checked which will automatically create the scan element on
the Bing map. For this example, Phase 8 is the Northbound thru movement.

9) Next add your detector data in the Detector box. To add a detector, you must add it by selecting the
symbol. This will unlock the Detector box so that you can add detector data. Enter the specific
data for the thru detector.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 249

10) Repeat this procedure for all other movements and detection data.

11) Select Save to Intersection to save the Intersection layout and commit the changes.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 250

A box will come up to verify the changes. After ok is pressed, the user can close the Intersection Layout
wizard or save this configuration to a template document that can be used for other intersections. After
hitting the close button, the following message will come up to remind the user that the Bing Map must be
refreshed.

Hitting OK will close the Intersection Layout wizard.

Once created the user can go back and modify the layout as needed.

Wizard Screen Detailed Information

The wizard screen allows the user to drop icons that will be used by the Bing map and will be referenced by
ATMS. The data entry for each icon will be discussed below.

Template

Prior to saving the intersection, the user can create a Template Name. The layout & programming can be
saved and later selected to quickly copy Intersection layouts to other intersections. Simply enter a unique
name and save the data and create the template. If the user wants to create an intersection layout for
another intersection, they can use the drop down list to automatically insert the data and then modify the
layout as needed.

Geometric center of the intersection

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 251

When creating the controller via the controller definition or from the Map view, the latitude and longitude
of the controller will be entered by the user. Since the pushpin for a controller can be placed anywhere in
the vicinity of an intersection, this section requires from user to select the center of the intersection (not the
cabinet position). To select the center of the intersection, the user can click on the symbol and the map
screen will pop up. All Map symbols will be automatically placed around the geometric center of the
intersection and will be automatically sized and adjusted around that center.

Phase or Overlap assignments

After selecting a specific symbol, as shown using through phase 2 above, the user needs to enter the
appropriate phase or overlap data that will be associated with the movement. Specifically, the user will
enter Phase number and/or the Overlap number, the type of phase or overlap via a dropdown list (i.e.
Permissive, Protected, Protected/Permissive or Undefined). If it is a pedestrian movement, the Ped
Phase number and the Ped Detector number will also be programmed. In addition, if a preemption,
TSP/Priority preemption is associated with that phase, it must be programmed here. Finally, if the agency
wants that symbol to be visible on the Bing Map, then check the Visible on Map selection box.

Note: Keep in mind that any symbols created in versions prior to ATMS 2.9 will be on the map. If a
new symbol is added via this wizard, and the Visible on Map box is checked, there will be a duplicate
symbol displayed on the map.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 252

Detectors

For each phase movement the existing detectors should be defined. The user should enter the Detector
Channel #, the Detector Purpose, the Lane Number and the Lane Width. The Detector Purpose defines
the type of detector that is being used.

Detector Types
Advance Advanced Detector

Stopbar Stop Bar Detector

TMC Turning Movement Count detector

StopbarAndTMC Stop Bar and Turning Movement Count Detector

RLM Red Light Monitoring Detector

TMCAndRLM Turning Movement Count and Red Light Monitoring Detector

Midblock Midblock detector

RampM Ramp Meter Detector

TMCAndAdv Turning Movement Count and Advanced Detector

Undefined Undefined Detector Type

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 253

For instance, if advance detector is selected, the Speed (mph) and the Distance (feet) from the center of
the intersection can also be programmed and this information will be passed along to the SPM module. A
detector may be assigned to the through lane with shared lane percentages (Share%) to estimate any shared
left-turn and/or right-turn volumes from the through movement. The Subtract Detector field is provided to
subtract the left-turn and/or right-turn detector movements from the through volume. If the specific detector is
used for congestion purposes (Configuration-> Congestion Level), then the Congestion Detector box needs
to be checked. This will create the Congestion Threshold section for the user to add the appropriate congestion
threshold data for the particular detector.

Congestion Threshold

This selection will enable the user to define and edit an intersection’s congestion level definitions for the purposes
of proper display on the “Congestion Level” layer of the map and will became available after a direction button
for an approach is selected. This section allows ATMS to take inbound Volume, Occupancy, or Speed detector
data from each controller and classify the value against the Congestion Level thresholds for LOW (Displayed in
GREEN), MEDIUM (Displayed in YELLOW and HIGH (Displayed in RED) for that collection period.
ATMS also calculates Level of Service (LOS) values ranging A-F. This information is collected automatically
based on the Turn/Phase/Directions programming and reported in the Reports Module. Setup for LOS is
described in the Turn/Phase/Directions section of the manual. See the Congestion Level Section described later
in this manual for further details.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 254

5.6.6 Edit Turn/Phase/Directions
This selection will enable the user to define and edit an
intersection’s Turning/Phase Movement definitions for the
purposes of proper count report generation. The
Turn/Phase/Directions section directs ATMS to associate the
specific controller count and preemption information to the
correct phases and directions for Volume, Turning
Movement, Preemption, and LOS report generation.
The LOS reporting capability in the Reports module uses the lane and counting detector information from this
screen. The LOS determines the number of lanes for each approach based on the number of count detectors for
each movement, assuming that there will be one detector per lane. The chosen method for LOS calculation in
ATMS is Circular 212.

Starting with ATMS 2.9, the Edit/Turn/Phase directions selection screen will be grayed out. This data
must be edited and modified using the Intersection Layout configuration screen described earlier in this
chapter. This section has been left in the manual to describe the programming features for users that
have an earlier version of ATMS.

Choose the controller(s) that you would like to edit, “right-click” or navigate to Configuration…Edit
Turn/Phase/Directions. The screen shown below will appear in the main Navigation pane.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 255

First, select the appropriate compass direction for the intersection as shown in the above figure. In the first row
of each direction, enter the associated phases for the “Left”, “Through”, and “Right” Lanes. Next enter the
associated detector numbers for each phase.

This does not assign the detector channel to the associated phase in the controller. This function is only
used as a database filter for proper report generation and Synchro utilities. However, the controller
database has to have the matching detector channels checked as counting detectors for the counts to be
sent to ATMS.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 256

The third row is for assigning the detector type to each assigned detector channel. Synchro supports the following
left-turn movements:
• U type for U-turn movements
• L2 type for “hard” left-turns greater than 90 degrees
• L type for normal 90 degree left turns
• Synchro also supports two types of right-turn movements:
• R2 type for “hard” right turns
• R type for normal 90 degree right turns
You must associate each detector in the Turning/Phase Movements database with the lane type defined by Synchro
if you wish to import turning movement data from ATMS into Synchro.
Each detector may be considered as a “lane” or combination of adjacent lanes; however, accurate lane counts at
high traffic volumes require a separate detector per lane. ATMS aggregates detector volumes for each Synchro
lane type. This insures that volumes exported from ATMS can be imported correctly as Synchro UTDF files.
A left-turn phase should only be coded in the Turning/Phase Movements Definition table if a protected left-turn
phase is provided. In the figure above, the westbound approach is serviced by a protected left-turn phase. If a
direction is not permitted, the phase number assigned to that movement is zero. If the left turn movement is both
protected and permitted (5-section left-turn display), then the protected-only phase should be assigned to the left-
turn movement as shown for the northbound movement above.
A permitted southbound left-turn is not assigned a separate left-turn detector if a left-turn movement is shared
with the through movement. The westbound approach provides a left-turn lane and a separate detector even
though the left-turn is permitted only. An individual lane detector cannot distinguish between shared movements
(left, through and right) from the same lane. A detector may be assigned to the through lane with shared lane
percentages (Share%) to estimate any shared left-turn and/or right-turn volumes from the through movement.
Another common problem in estimating turning movement counts is related to the location of the detector relative
to the stop bar. Advance detectors for the through phase may be located 200 – 400 feet in advance of the stop
bar. Turning movements may be counted twice if advance detectors lie in advance of the storage lanes.
A check-box is provided to subtract the left-turn and/or right-turn movement from the through volume in these
cases. In the figure above, the total volume from left-turn detectors (1+12) and the right-turn detector (46) are
deducted from the westbound through movement. Only the left-turn volume (5+15) is deducted from the
eastbound approach.

T-Intersection Approaches
If the intersection approach is the stem of a T-intersection, the left-turn phase should be coded as zero. The
through and right-turn phases should be assigned the protected phase number coded in Synchro for these
movements (phase 4 in the example below).
Note that in this example, shared lanes service the NW and NE approaches. Therefore, the phase numbers
assigned to these approaches must be coded to the through movements.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 257

The Turning/Phase Movements Definition table for this example should be coded as follows. It is assumed that
a setback detector for the through phase on the SW approach also detects the left-turn movement. Setting the
check-box for the left-turn movement on the SW approach subtracts the left-turn volume from the through
movement to prevent the left-turn movement from being counted twice.

Summary – How to Code the Turning/Phase Movement Table

The rules below should be followed when coding the Turning/Phase Movements Definition table:
Assign the controller through phase associated with each movement to the through and right-turn phase in the
Turning/Phase Movements Definition table.
Insure that each detector is assigned a lane type that corresponds with the lane type in Synchro
If a separate left-turn phase is provided in the controller, assign this phase to the left-turn movement in the
Turning/Phase Movements Definition table.
Assign each detector in the controller to the predominate movement in the Turning/Phase Movements Definition
table.
Provide shared-lane adjustments as desired to reassign left and/or right-turn volume assigned to the outside
through lane detectors in the table.
If a left-turn movement is counted twice (by an advance detector and also a stop bar detector in the turn lane),
then compensate this by applying the check-box labeled “Subtract Left from Thru” in the Turning/Phase
Movements Definition table.
The fourth row, “Share” is for turning movements that do not have dedicated detection for the turning lanes. In
this case, enter the estimated percentage or detector activations from the far left or far right lane that is to be
subtracted from the Through-Movement counts. Next, check the box titled “Subtract Left from Thru” or “Subtract
Right from Thru”. Enter the corresponding Through-Movement detector number(s) in the “Detectors” boxes for

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 258

the Left or Right lane. This will classify the assigned percentage of counts for that detector to the turning
movement. ATMS will calculate turning and through counts based on this percentage when generating reports.
Lastly, if you are operating an Overlap(s) at the intersection, enter the “Overlap” number to the associated phase.
Click “Apply” or “OK” to save.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 259

5.6.7 Edit Intersection Link Speed

This selection will enable the user to define and edit an intersection’s approach speed and distancing definitions
for the purposes of proper Time-Space Diagram generation. The Intersection Link Speed section allows ATMS
to take controller active pattern and offset information and associate it with the current cycle timer by providing
the necessary approach information for the intersection. This information includes Intersection at the other end
of the approach leg, approach Speed, and Distance between intersections.
Choose the controller(s) that you would like to edit, “right-click” or navigate to Configuration…Edit Intersection
Link Speed. The screen shown below will appear in the main Navigation pane.
First, determine the compassing directions for the intersection, N-S-E-W or NE-NW-SE-SW. Select the drop-
down for the first box labeled “Controller”. The selected controller should be the intersection at the other end of
the designated approach. In the example below, the defined controller for the Southbound approach is the
intersection to the South or the next intersection as you continue through the southbound approach (Greenback
Lane & Binet). For example, assign the intersections to the North, South, East, and West.

The assigned controller for an approach should be the intersection that is “Upstream” or “Downstream”
from the approach.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 260

Assign an associated Street name if desired. This entry is optional.
The Speed entry can be the posted speed for the approach or the speed used for coordination modeling. The latter
will show better accuracy of your displayed greenband in the Time-Space Diagram. Entering the speed
information for both the inbound and outbound legs of the intersection is required for the Time-Space Diagram
to work properly.
Lastly, enter the distance (in feet) between the primary intersection and the downstream intersection.
Click “Apply” or “OK” to save.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 261

5.6.8 Congestion Level

This selection will enable the user to define and edit an intersection’s congestion level definitions for the purposes
of proper display on the “Congestion Level” layer of the GIS map. This section allows ATMS to take inbound
Volume, Occupancy, or Speed detector data from each controller and classify the value against the Congestion
Level thresholds for LOW (Displayed in GREEN), MEDIUM (Displayed in YELLOW and HIGH (Displayed
in RED) for that collection period.
ATMS also calculates LOS values ranging A-F. This information is collected automatically based on the
Turn/Phase/Directions programming and reported in the Reports Module. Setup for LOS is described in the
Turn/Phase/Directions section of the manual.

Starting with ATMS 2.9, the Congestion Level selection screen will be grayed out. This data must be
edited and modified using the Intersection Layout configuration screen described earlier in this chapter.
This section has been left in the manual to describe the programming features for users that have an
earlier version of ATMS.

Choose the controller(s) that you would like to edit, “right-click” or navigate to Configuration…Congestion Level.
The screen shown below will appear in the main Navigation pane.
Two congestion levels can be assigned to each intersection approach (Medium and High). Incoming values that
are below the minimum value for “Medium” will be classified by ATMS within the “Low” category. The user
may specify Volume, Occupancy, or Speed to measure congestion by clicking the corresponding circle.
Assign the corresponding Congestion Level Detectors that you want to be assigned as collection detectors for
each approach. Confirm that each matching detector function is properly programmed in the controller. Make
sure all left, right, and thru lanes are collecting.
Click “Apply” or “OK” to save.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 262

If you are calculating Congestion by Occupancy, the values for Medium and High will be a % value between 1
and 100 for the collection period that sum of the Occupancy detectors have been actuated, based on the
programmed collection parameters in the controller.
If you are calculating Congestion by Volume, the values will be a count value for each threshold for the collection
period. There are no limitations to the numerical entry for these.
If you are calculating Congestion by Speed, the congestion will report based on the most recently reported speed
value for that direction.
ATMS will allow the user to complete values for all three congestion reporting methods even though it will
only utilize the selected method for each approach. This is useful for minimizing the effort to switch from
one method to another.
Under Congestion Level Detectors, assign all of the detectors that you wish to contribute to that approach’s
Congestion value. This can include left and right lane counts. A maximum of six (6) detectors may be specified
for data collection for each intersection approach. Make sure that the assigned collection detectors in this section
have the corresponding Volume and/or Occupancy checked in the controller under MM>5>2.
For ATMS to display Congestion Level information on the GIS map, the Congestion lines must be drawn for
each approach under Definitions...Segment Editor...Congestion Links. This is discussed in Chapter 6.

If Congestion Links have been drawn in ATMS, but the Scheduler is not collecting count data, the
Congestion Level map layer will always display as a Low Level Congestion Status due to a 0 incoming
value. Make sure that the Scheduler is collecting “Local Vol/Occ 1-64” for the desired collection
interval.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 263

5.6.9 User Defined Detector Groups

This selection will enable the user to define custom groups of detector assignments for the purposes of customized
report generation. The User Defined Detector Groups create special detector group sets for the ATMS as shown
in the figure below. A user can define up to four different groups of any combination of ten detectors.
Choose the controller(s) that you would like to edit, “right-click” or navigate to Configuration...User Defined
Detector Groups. The screen shown below will appear in the main Navigation pane.
Click “Apply” or “OK” to save.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 264

5.7 Synchro Integration
Cubic/Trafficware provides two methods to interface with our Synchro
Suite software. For versions prior to Synchro 10.2 Cubic/Trafficware
provides the traditional Synchro UTDF Import/Export tool. For
Synchro 10.2 or later, Cubic/Trafficware offers an enhanced Synchro
integration tool. Both interfaces are explained below.

5.7.1 Enhanced Synchro Integration

A new and enhanced way of integration with Synchro (v10.2 and later) brings numerous improvements over
the existing UTDF file exchange that will still remain available for data exchange with older versions of
Synchro software. The new integration enables exchanging of signal timing parameters directly between
ATMS and SYNCHRO, without the need to create, store and send or receive separate UTDF files.
The integration actions can be accessed via the Ribbon bar. Four new icons are available:
• Export – launching the export wizard
• Import – launching the import wizard
• Export Status – launching the menu with details about files that were previously exported to Synchro
users
• Import Status – launching the menu with details about available files from various Synchro users
Besides the Ribbon bar, user can also access Synchro Import or Export actions by right-clicking on a
controller and selecting Synchro. All available options will appear.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 265

The new integration method works with v61, v65, v76 and v80 controller
software databases. Also, starting with ATMS 2.8, a new ATMS database
file will be created for each intersection known as the Synchro database.
Thus, when a new controller is defined, there will be disk space allocated
for 9 database files (types); Standard, Permanent, Upload, five Special
databases (Special 1-5) and Synchro. The Synchro database will support
the same functionalities as the other databases except:
• Exporting a Synchro database from ATMS to Synchro users will not be allowed
• The user is not allowed to directly download the Synchro database to a controller. However the user
is allowed to copy the Synchro database to another database type such as Special1. The user must
inspect the database, originally received from Synchro, prior to copying it to another database type
and prior to downloading it to a controller.
Two intuitive and interactive wizards are available to guide a user through the Export or Import process.
Wizards provide an abundance of feedback information for various cases. Examples of the feedback include;
explaining what the course of action will be based on the user’s choices, warnings about potential harmful
decisions, messages in case an error has occurred and many more.
Export from ATMS to Synchro
The Export procedure from ATMS to Synchro sends a selected controller database (Standard,
Permanent or Special databases) to a selected Synchro user or users. Export can be initiated by
clicking the Export button in Ribbon bar or by right clicking the controller and selecting Synchro.
After that, user will see selected controller(s) and at that point can configure which database will
be exported. This is done by clicking the Export button on the lower right corner.

After that step, an Export Wizard will appear with the greeting message as shown below.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 266

Select Next to navigate to the first page of Export Wizard. A list with all controllers and their respective
databases selected for Export will appear. The ATMS user can add a note for the Synchro user, to
communicate necessary details about the export.
Both the Import and Export wizards have indications of what actions will be taken, which steps got previously
completed, and how many steps remains until the process of exporting or importing has been completed.
Explanations are provided by icons and by text beneath icons as shown below.

The Color of the icons on the top of both Export and Import wizard also provides certain levels of
information:

• Blue – current page

• Green – completed steps (previous pages)
• Red – error that prevents continuing of the import/export process
• Yellow – warning to indicate an important message to user but the process can still be continued

The same colors will show in tabs and parameter value fields to help user to identify where closer inspection
is needed. Below is an example of the first displayed page of the Export wizard.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 267

After adding export notes for Synchro users, and hitting the Next button, the next page is used for selecting
an existing Exchange Folder or creating a new one. Clicking on the “+” sign will expand the Exchange folder
and show files that were previously placed there. An Exchange Folder should be considered as a common
space for ATMS user(s) and Synchro user(s). That is a gateway from where signal timings will be exchanged.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 268

New Exchange Folders can be created by the ATMS user(s) only by clicking the button Create New Folder.
A user must define the name of that Exchange Folder (i.e. the project name or any name that will help user
to identify to whom signal timing databases are being sent and for what reason). In the Email section, the
user needs to specify email addresses of the Synchro users that will have access to this Exchange folder (i.e.
the persons that will be collaborated with). An access code will be sent to those emails, and Synchro users
will use that access code to subscribe to a specific Exchange Folder and receive all signal timings that will
be exported by ATMS user(s).

The step that follows is the validation of the selected controllers and Exchange Folders. The user will verify
controller databases and the Exchange Folder to which those databases will be exported to. If, for example,
a wrong Exchange Folder is selected, the user can navigate back to the Select Exchange Folder page by
clicking the Back button in lower left corner of wizard.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 269

Validation of database content occurs next. This verification checks if certain mandatory parameter values
are set up. There are three possible outcomes:
• There are no warnings and all mandatory parameters are set up correctly– controller is highlighted
green
• Some of mandatory parameters are missing – controller is highlighted red
• All mandatory parameters passed the validation; however, certain warnings are issued – controller is
highlighted amber

To see further details about any controller that has errors or warnings, please click on the “+” sign on the
left-hand side to collapse the list. This will allow all messages to be displayed so they can be reviewed. All
controllers highlighted in green or amber can still be exported. Controllers highlighted in red will not be
allowed to be exported.

The final step of the export procedure is to confirm the status that the signal timings have been sent. All
databases that have been successfully placed in Exchange Folder will be marked in green. Those databases
in which the export was stopped due to validation issues, will be highlighted yellow. In case there are files
which passed validation inspection and were supposed to be sent to Synchro users, but failed to be delivered
(such as the case of communication failure), the files will be highlighted in red and will have status labeled
as “Failed”. Databases who failed to be sent to Synchro User, can be resent by trying again.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 270

Please note that “Success” in the Status column means that sent database has become available to the
Synchro user, not that Synchro user(s) has opened it in Synchro application.

After the export process is done and status of the databases is confirmed, click the Finish button to close
Export wizard.
Export Status List
A list of all exported databases with details is available via the Export Status screen. That menu
can be accessed by clicking the Export Status icon in Ribbon bar or by right clicking on any of
the controllers in List view and selecting Synchro, then Export Status. The Export Status menu
contains the controller(s) ID number and controller(s) Name that were exported. It will also list
which Exchange folder that the databases were sent to (Project Name). Also listed is the Date
and Time that the export happened and the note that the ATMS user wrote to the Synchro users,
if any. This list behaves like any other list in ATMS, which means it can be sorted by any column by clicking
on the column header.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 271

Beside clicking on an icon in Ribbon bar or right clicking on the controller to access Synchro options, the
user can also switch to the Import Status screen from the Export Status screen by right clicking on any entry.
Import from Synchro to ATMS
The import procedure from Synchro to ATMS defines the way how new signal timings received
from the Synchro user will be imported. An Import can be initiated by clicking the Import button
in Ribbon bar or by right clicking a controller and selecting Synchro option Import.
The Import wizard, like the Export wizard, welcomes an ATMS user by greeting message after
which first page of Import wizard is displayed. On that page, an Exchange folder can be selected
from which a file received from the Synchro user can be imported.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 272

After selecting an Exchange folder, a list with all files available in that Exchange Folder will appear. A list
will contain multiple information that was originated in Synchro:
• SynchroNode – the node number (intersection) in the Synchro software
• File Name – the names of both streets as entered in Lane Settings menu in Synchro
• Synchro User – the name of the Synchro user defined in Synchro
• Synchro Note – the note created by the Synchro user for ATMS user(s)
Along with the above information, the ATMS user will be able to see the Controller ID number. In the case
where the Synchro user has modified a file that was previously exported to Synchro from ATMS, The ID
number of the controller will be saved in Synchro and sent back to ATMS for easier identification. If a
Synchro user sends a file that was not previously exported from ATMS to Synchro, then the Controller ID
will show an ID # 0 for all signal timings created in that manner. The Last Modified column shows when the
file became available to the ATMS user to import.

Please note the Pale Orange field at the top of the list, just underneath the header. Wherever
this color is used, it means that the field will accept user input. In this case, these fields can be used for
dynamic filtering of the list. By entering characters, list will be filtered to show only entries that start with
those characters in subject column. This feature can be very useful in case when list is very long and it would
take time to scroll and find desired row. A User can select one or multiple signal timings that will be imported.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 273

The next step of the import wizard is to assign the received signal timing(s) to a controller in ATMS.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 274

On the left-hand side of Assign to Controller page in the Import
Wizard, the details of signal timing file received from Synchro
are available. Below is a list of the information that is
displayed:
• File - The current file (i.e. the only file that will be
imported or part of a group)
• Synchro node – The node number (intersection) in the
Synchro software
• File Name – The names of both streets as entered in Lane Settings menu in Synchro
• Controller ID from Synchro – The Controller ID from ATMS, if previously exported
• Controller Name from Synchro – the name of the controller from ATMS, if previously exported
• Note – A note created by the Synchro user for the ATMS user(s)
• Synchro User – The registered name of a user in the Synchro software
Underneath, there is a white box where a configuration that will
be used as a baseline can be selected. Since Synchro can
manipulate only a subset of parameters that exist in a controller
database, a baseline file is necessary to provide all remaining
parameters not handled by Synchro software.
Please note that if multiple signal timings, for different patterns
of one controller, get imported all at once in one controller, and
user selects Standard as a baseline database every time, only the
last signal timing will be part of the resulting Synchro database
after merging the data. All signal timings received from Synchro
that were merged before will be overridden. To import multiple patterns to a single controller database, the
user should select the Standard (or any other database type for a baseline except Synchro) only for the first
time. This will set up what will be the foundation of the new database. After importing the first signal timing
from Synchro, the user should select the Synchro database every subsequent time as the new baseline. In this
way, every new added signal timing plan will be added to Synchro database, which should contain previous
timing plan changes.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 275

Also, if multiple signal timings are imported at the same time, please note that after accepting the changes
for one signal timing database, the wizard will move back to the Assign to Controller page for the following
signal timing received from Synchro. This automatic procedure will continue until all signal timings from
Synchro are imported.

On the right-hand side of this page, a list is visible that contains Controller IDs, Names and Types available
in ATMS so user can choose to which controller database new signal timing parameters will be added. If the
received signal timing was created from a file that was previously exported from ATMS, the ID and Name
will be recognized and the controller selection will default to a controller with that same ID and Name. The
user can still choose to assign new signal timings to another controller by changing the selection at any time.
The First row of the list (marked in pale orange ) can be used as a filtering tool. The user can
type in first characters of ID, Name or Type column, and list will be immediately filtered.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 276

The Next step is defining the import rules. The left side of the Define Import Rules page in Import Wizard
displays values received from Synchro. These values are placed into multiple categories available in
controller options. By clicking on appropriate tab, a user will access values related to that category. A user
can inspect that data so it will be easier to decide how new signal timing parameters should be imported.
Since Export and Import wizards are shown in separate windows, the user has the option to run ATMS on
one monitor, and the wizard on another monitor. In this way the user can compare existing values and
positions with the values received from Synchro, in order to decide about import rules.

Please note that from the moment that a controller is assigned as a destination for new signal timing values
from Synchro, the other databases of that controller are locked out for that and other users. This means that
until the import process is complete and new values are accepted and placed, the ATMS locking feature will
be active. This will prevent compromising data if simultaneous modifications occur with the same controller
database by the Synchro wizard and other users in ATMS, or by multiple wizards that can be launched at the
same time by one or multiple ATMS users. It is recommended to choose View database if user selects to
open controller database while an import is in progress.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 277

The top section of the Right-hand side of the Define Import Rules page
shows the ID of the controller received from Synchro, the destination
controller the selected baseline database and the Synchro note for the subject
signal timing file received from Synchro user.
Underneath the general information mentioned in previous paragraph, a user entry section is shown. This is
the place where the user defines how newly received values will be placed inside the selected controller
database. The selections and questions are described below:
• Pattern – The user should select a pattern that will
be the destination for a part of the received signal timing
parameter values. The user can select one of 48 patterns
including FREE Patterns or pattern 254 (FREE) which is
used for the general free operation of a controller. A
dropdown menu is available where all available options
will be displayed. Next to each pattern number there will
be a description, if that pattern is already used, or if it is not
used (empty) to alleviate decision making for ATMS user.
• Ring Sequence table – The user should choose the
ring sequence table to which new data will be allocated. A
dropdown menu will show all available ring sequence table
numbers with the description if the subject ring sequence
table is used (contains some values), Empty (has no values)
or Matched (Identical ring Sequence like the one received
from Synchro already exists in subject table).
• Concurrencies – A user has option to choose if
new concurrencies received from Synchro will be imported
and used or current values in selected ATMS baseline
database will be kept.

• Max 2 – This will import the green times received

from Synchro into Max 1 or Max 2 parameters. If the user wants to use Max1 times, select NO. If a
user wants to use Max 2 times, select YES. This selection can affect general parameters in Phase
Times and Options (Phase Entries), Alt tables and Pattern categories, depending on other selections.
• Split Table – in case user selects to use Split Tables, a set of three new questions will appear. The
first dropdown menu displays the available Split tables and their status (Empty or Used). If Synchro
specifies that some phases should be enabled or disabled compared to the existing setup in the selected
ATMS database, the user can decide if enabling/disabling of phases will happen in the general Phase
Times and Options table (where it will affect all patterns), or if it will occur in Splits (Expanded)
tables under the parameter Mode (where only parameters that call that specific Split table will be
affected). The same option is available for determining destination for recalls. Please note that both
enabling/disabling and recalls use the same parameter in the Split tables, i.e the Split Mode. Both
actions cannot be performed in Splits (Expanded) Tables. Therefore, if the user selects to
enable/disable phases in Splits table, the recall modifications have to be done in Phase Times and
Options and vice versa.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 278

• Alt Table – by checking the box next to Alt Table two new questions will be displayed. First, the Alt
table number, which will be the destination for part of signal timing values received from Synchro,
needs to be selected. The dropdown menu will show available Alt tables. Depending on the selected
destination controller type, these table numbers can vary. For each table, a status is shown to indicate
if Alt table is Used or Empty. Secondly, a selection for which phases the received values from Synchro
will be imported into the Alt table is available. Only checkboxes for phases that are enabled in Synchro
will be available for selecting. All remaining phases up to the maximum for a specific controller type
will not be available for modification. Import will not proceed until at least one checkbox is checked
in case Alt table is selected by user.
• Overlaps – If received Synchro signal timing contains overlaps, the Map overlap section will appear.
All overlaps defined in Synchro will appear in Synchro Overlaps Number dropdown menu while
ATMS data parameters for overlaps will be shown in ATMS Overlaps Number dropdown menu. The
availability of all overlaps in ATMS (Used or Empty) will be indicated next to each overlap number.
A user needs to define each pair of Synchro-ATMS overlap number combinations to assign all
overlaps received from Synchro by clicking Assign button. All overlap assignments can be deleted by
clicking Clear All button. One by one deletion can be accommodated by clicking the red X mark next
to subject Syncho-ATMS overlap pair in the table. The Import will not proceed until all overlaps from
Synchro are assigned.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 279

The Import Rules Confirmation page of the Import wizard displays the summary of selections made by the
user. For each selection, the rule description and the selected value or explanation are provided. In cases
when existing parameters can get overwritten, a warning is issued so that the user is aware of consequences
for a specific selection. In the case when parameters will not be overwritten, but some other options such as
tables or patterns can get affected, a reminder is shown so user can verify if a defined selection is an
appropriate choice or it should be modified.

The Next page is a Show Differences page. On this page the user can see specifically what changes will occur
for each specific parameter and value. Only those parameters whose values will change are displayed in this
page. All other parameter values that will not be affected, will not appear on this page.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 280

There are two available views for analyzing changes. Categorized or Traditional.
• Categorized- All parameters are grouped in categories per their location in controller database. The
existing value is on the left side of the arrow in each field, while new value is on the right side of the
arrow in every field. This view is very useful for quick evaluation of changes that will be executed if
user clicks the Accept and Save button. By clicking the Toggle View button above the table, the view
will change to “Traditional” view.
• Traditional: This view will compare via the show differences list. Via this view, all affected
parameters and values are placed in the column labeled “From Value” that represent existing values
in controller database, while values in the “To Value” column represent new values. In case there are
any exceptions, they will be displayed in “Exception” column.
In cases where the user does not want to accept changes in the selected destinations, the Discard button
aborts the import action, and no changes will be made. If there are more Synchro files that are supposed to
be imported, the Import wizard will skip to next Synchro signal timing. Otherwise, if user accepts the changes
via the the Accept and Save button, a pop-up message will ask user to confirm this action, and confirmation
is displayed after changes have been successfully made.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 281

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 282
Finally, a Summary page is displayed as the last page of Import wizard. This page shows which file(s) were
part of the import process and the details regarding the signal timing files, the selected actions and final status.
One can validate details about Controller ID number imported from Synchro, the Name of the Intersections
and the Notes received from Synchro. In addition, a user can validate details about the selected destination
controller ID, the controller name and the database that was selected as a baseline. Finally, the status will
show “Completed” if changes were saved or “Cancelled” if import process got discarded.

Please be assured that at any given moment during the Import process, the user can check the status of all
signal timings that are selected for import. Simply click the box showing a fraction number at the upper right
corner of the Import wizard. That action will open another window with the progress status. There, the status
of all selected files for import with details are available. The user can check how many files already got
imported, which one is current file in progress and how many more are remaining.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 283

It is important to note that when Synchro user sends a modified signal timing plan to ATMS, all ATMS users
currently logged will receive notification. This notification will appear in lower right corner. By clicking on
that notification, the user launches the Import wizard from the third page, skipping the steps for selecting
Exchange Folder or selecting the file since those are known for a file that was displayed in a notification.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 284

Import Status List
The Import Status list can be accessed by clicking the Import Status button in Ribbon bar, or by
right clicking on a controller and selecting options Synchro and Import Status or from Export
Status by right clicking on any entry and selecting Import Status.
The list contains details about files available for import that are sent by all Synchro users to all
Export Folders created and defined by ATMS users. For every signal timing file from Synchro, a new entry
will be created. Each entry has Controller ID and name if a used Synchro file has previously received an
exported database from ATMS. The Controller ID can also display a “0” and blank name field respectively
if the Synchro file was not generated based on a previously exported database from ATMS. Also shown will
be the Node number for an intersection in Synchro, the name of the Synchro user who sent the file is available
as well as Exchange folder (Project Name) name where a file is received. Notes from the Synchro user
alongside with description of pattern affected in subject file is also available. Finally, date and time when a
file became available for import to ATMS are displayed.

By right clicking on any of the entries in Import Status list, two options become available, switching to Export
Status list or importing the signal timing file.
Please note that notification for new available file received from Synchro will appear only if ATMS client is
opened. In cases when Synchro users send files while ATMS user are not using ATMS client application,
newly available files for import can always be found in Import Status list where the last file received from
Synchro user will be on the top of the list.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 285

5.7.2 UTDF Synchro Import / Export
Integration of the full UTDF database from Cubic/Trafficware Synchro7/8 is available to ATMS.
The Synchro Import/Export utility provides the ability to Export traffic counts and FREE timing as a
combined “.csv” file to Synchro for optimization. The Import function provides the ability to import
a combined “.csv” file which includes a combined Phasing and Timing tables from the Synchro7/8/9
program directly into a controller file (Standard or Upload1-5 files). Synchro 7/8/9 combines the
“Timing.dat” and “Phasing.dat” files into a single “.csv” file.
Note that the controller ID and Synchro ID must be the same to exchange data between ATMS and Synchro.
To use the Import/Export utility, highlight the target controller, then select Utilities…Synchro Import/Export. To
perform a Timing or Phasing Import, check the “Timing” or “Phasing” box, and select the desired Split and
Pattern.

For each intersection that you would like to import or export Synchro data you must select the type of data that
you would like to import or export (Phasing, Timing and/or Volume) via the check boxes. Next select the “Import”
(or “Export”) button. A window will open to navigate and select the “TIMING.csv” or “PHASING.csv” file from
the Synchro program. Select the file and click “OK”.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 286

To perform a Count Export, check the “Volume” box and click the “Export” button. A window will appear to
navigate the target for the count export.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 287

5.8 Analytics
Beginning with ATMS version 2.8, an Analytics section has been added to the Home module. The Analytics
section will offer ATMS users a gateway to new data analysis and decision support systems applications. The
purpose of those applications will be to analyze the collected data and present it in a visual, easier to understand
and more meaningful way. In such a way, the user will have an enhanced overview of the system, and the process
of making decisions or analysis should be significantly reduced and/or alleviated. As ATMS matures, other
analytics will be added. The first effort of this type is the Alarms Dashboard.

5.8.1 Alarms Dashboard

The first application integrated in the new Analytics tab, the
Alarms Dashboard, has been created to meet the needs of users
to easily assess the reliability of the traffic signal system. The
new application is a tool for fast, dynamic and interactive
monitoring of alarm activations and durations created with the
goal of providing clear and concise information to users.
The Alarms Dashboard can be used for multiple purposes:
• System reliability tracking
• Identifying signals that are heavily affected by alarms
• Identifying the most frequently occurring alarm types
• Providing the frequency of alarm activations and ratios
• Providing the duration of alarm activations and their ratios
• Maintenance planning and resource allocation
• Supporting requests for funding and/or budget planning
To launch the Alarms Dashboard, the user has to click on the Alarms Dashboard icon in the Analytics section,
and the application will be launched in the default browser defined by the client’s Windows OS. Recommended
browsers are Google Chrome, Microsoft Edge and Mozilla Firefox. Please note that certain features of the
Alarms Dashboard application will not operate as intended on the Internet Explorer web browser.
User’s will be automatically authenticated from ATMS by using the username and password permissions from
ATMS, and no additional authentication is required for accessing the Alarms Dashboard application.
The application itself consists of several distinct segments:
• Page Bar
• Selection Bar
• Content Pane
This layout remains the same regardless of the page user selects to view.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 288

Besides the Cubic/Trafficware logo, the Page Bar contains icons for navigating to other pages of the Alarms
Dashboard application. Also, the ATMS username is shown in the right corner alongside with the button to sign
out. At the moment, Alarms Dashboard supports three pages:
1. Charts Page – Main page with user defined charts
2. Map Page – Map view which shows map in full screen
3. Help – Launching a User Manual

The Selection Bar shows the current selection defined by user for a date and time range and the days of week that
will be observed. In addition, the user can select which intersections, Flex groups and alarm types that will be
analyzed. Finally, by using filter Values, user can switch between displaying the number of alarm activations or
duration of alarm activations.
If user has selected multiple intersections, Flex Groups or Alarm types, there will not be enough space to display
the entire content. Because of that, the Selection line will show number of intersections, Flex groups or alarm
types selected in case a subset is selected. The Selection line can also show “All” if all possible options are
selected. When a user hovers over values shown in the Selection line for Intersections, Flex Groups or Alarm
types, a tooltip will appear. The tooltip will show a full list of intersections, Flex groups or alarm types currently
defined by this selection.
To access the selection pane, user needs to click on the selection line. Once selected, a pane with selection details
will appear. The Selection pane contains all the selection criteria and is the place where user can modify the
selection and run a filter to get new results. In the selection pane, the user can define filter templates by saving
them and assigning them appropriate names. Those templates can be used again at any time the user logs in to
Alarms Dashboard. By clicking on the trashcan icon next to the Filter name, user can delete the current filter.
ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 289
The left portion of the Selection Pane enables user to define a name for a specific selection and define multiple
criteria for that selection. In this section, the user will be able to change the Date and Time range or select which
days of the week will be observed. There are few ways how user can define a date and time range, and that is
controlled by selecting an appropriate button:
• Date Range
• Time from Today
• Dynamic 1h
Date Range allows a user to set up specific dates which will be taken as start and end point of the analysis. Only
the data between those two dates will be analyzed by dashboard. Users can modify dates by clicking the calendar
icon next to a date to select year, month and date in a calendar dialog box or alternatively, users can click on the
date itself and type in the new values for month, day or year for both start date (From) and end date (To).
If the filter selection Time from today button is selected, the user can select how many days, weeks or months
that the application will look in the past by running that filter selection. User should type in number in the “Last”
portion, and then specify if he/she is referring to days, weeks or months by selecting an appropriate option from
the dropdown menu.
For either the Date Range or Time from today selections, users will be able to define start and end time for a
period in a day that will be observed. The User should the define Start time and the End time by clicking on the
values and typing new values or by moving the dots below the actual values. When the dot is moved, a value
above gets updated automatically. In such a way, user can observe only a specific period of a day for selected the
date range. For example, user can modify the filters to observe only night time, mornings, etc.
The Days of the week can also be selected regardless if Date Range or Time from today button is selected. Users
can select which days of a week will be taken into account by clicking individual checkboxes next to each day.
Also, a few shortcuts are provided so user can select all days of a week, only weekdays or only weekends by
selecting one of the three buttons created for that purpose just above aforementioned checkboxes.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 290

Dynamic 1h is a button that activates a specific mode where alarm activations will be automatically updated on
the charts after they occur in the traffic signal system. This mode will only observe the last one hour data from
the current moment. By using this feature, user will be able to receive updated information about any alarms that
were activated in the past hour, as long as this button is selected. Alarms that happened prior to the last hour will
be removed from this view. When the Dynamic 1h feature is selected, the user cannot modify the date range,
time range or select days of week. This mode might be useful for live data monitoring, whereas the selection of
Date Range and Time from today are better suited for analysis activities.

On the right side of the selection pane, a user can control the selection of intersections, flex groups or alarm types.
They are conveniently organized into three columns with checkboxes. By checking the appropriate checkboxes,
the user can select which Flex group, intersection or alarm type that will be analyzed. In case user wants to analyze
all Flex groups, Intersections or alarm types, the best way is to click the checkbox “All” at the top of each column.
In such a way, all checkboxes can be selected or deselected at once. For navigation to the lower parts of the lists,
the user can use scroll bar on the right side of the Selection Panel or use the mouse scroll wheel.
Since lists of intersections, Flex groups or alarms can be quite long, searching by key characters is also supported.
The user should type in the desired characters in fields above three columns and the list below will be
automatically updated to show only those entries that contain these characters. Please note that inserted characters
can be letters (for names) or numbers (for IDs), and they do not have to be at the beginning on a name. The
algorithm will search through all words in the list and show all results that contain the specified characters,
regardless of their position in that list. Inserted characters can be removed by clicking the “X” sign just right of
the line which will appear when some characters get inserted.
Flex groups, intersections and alarm type columns allow the user to select Count or Duration values. If Count
is selected, then the dashboard will show the number of alarm activations for the defined selection. One alarm
activation is defined as an alarm changing its status to ON in controller or in ATMS. Duration will show how
long the alarms were active. Duration is defined by time difference from the moment when alarm went ON for
one intersection, until the moment when alarm status for the same alarm type (and potentially subcomponent)
changed the status to OFF again.
* Note that in case if OFF status change was not received from a controller until the next activation of the same
alarm for the same controller, the duration of previous alarm will not be calculated nor shown in Alarms
Dashboard. Previous alarm for whom the OFF was not received will be displayed if user selects Count as a
criterium for filtering.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 291

In the bottom part of the Selection Panel, there are multiple buttons that control a selection filter.
• Close – This will close the Selection panel
• Run – This will use the defined selection and update all information on charts and maps
• Save – After the existing Filter template has been modified, clicking Save will change the Filter to use
latest changes
• Save as – This is used for creating a new Filter template (similar to functions of Microsoft Office)
• Discard changes – This will be displayed only after a filter template gets modified. Clicking this button
will discard the changes. A message will be displayed to user with the question if he/she is sure that the
changes should be discarded.

Please note that selection criteria defined in the Selection Filter affects all charts and the maps in the
Alarms Dashboard.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 292

Creating new Filter templates can be initiated through the ‘+’ icon in the Selection Bar that is used to initiate
creating of a new filter from the beginning (without predefined values). Clicking this icon will launch the
Selection Panel and after defining the criteria, the user should give a name to a new Filter template and click Save.
To load an already created filter template, user has to click “Load Filter” icon on the right side of the Selection
Bar. A list of previously saved filter templates will appear. The user can select any saved filter template by clicking
on its name. After doing so, that filter will be immediately applied. In case there are many created filter templates,
user will be able to search for a template by inserting characters contained in the filter template. To delete a filter
template, user has to click on “Load Filter” icon and click on a trashcan icon next to a filter template name. After
clicking, user will be asked if he/she is sure that this template should be deleted.

The main page shows charts that have alarm related data per the user defined selection. Users can control, number,
position and size of each charts (otherwise known as widgets) by activating the Edit layout mode. The User should
click the “Edit layout” icon on the far right of the Selection Bar. That will freeze the data in charts and allow the
user to make modifications and customize the layout of charts on the main page.

By default, all eleven reports will be visible to a user. However, users can customize the layout by doing one of
the following actions that are allowed:
• Turning charts (widgets) on or off – show or remove
• Resizing
• Changing the position – moving widgets
The user can turn off a chart (widget) after he/she enters the Edit layout mode by clicking the “x” mark in the top
right corner of any widget. This action will immediately remove the widget and leave the space occupied by it
empty. That space can be used for expanding or moving other widgets to newly available space.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 293

To turn the widget back on, the user has to click the “Add widget” icon that becomes active on the right side of
the Status bar after entering Edit layout mode. After clicking the “Add widget” icon, a user will get a list of all
widgets that were deactivated and can choose the one that will be brought back to the Content Pane. A green
rectangle will appear and follow the mouse cursor after turning the widget on to mark the minimum area size
where that widget can be placed. While moving the cursor, the user will be able to resize or move the already
active widgets.
Resizing of widgets can be done by dragging the edges of widget horizontally, vertically and diagonally. Moving
the widgets can be performed by clicking and dragging the widget while the left-click mouse button is still
pressed.
After the creating of a new layout is completed, the user should click on “Save layout” icon on the right side of
the Selection Bar. This new layout will be saved and the user display will return to the Analysis mode. To return
to Analysis mode without saving the layout changes, the user should click the icon on the far right of the Selection
Bar named “Discard changes”.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 294

The Alarms Dashboard provides eleven types of charts (widgets) which will communicate alarm related
information.
• Top 5 Intersections Affected by Alarms
• Top 5 Most Frequent Alarm Types
• Daily Alarm Activations
• Total Alarms
• Mini Map
• Signal Timing Alarms
• Preemptions
• Communications, Controller and Cabinet Alarms
• Detection Alarms
• Congestion Incidents
• Other Alarms

Top 5 Intersections Affected by Alarms

This chart shows the five intersections with the largest number of alarm activations or the longest total duration
of alarms that satisfies selection defined by user. The X-axis shows the number of alarm activations or the duration
of alarms while Y-axis shows intersection ID numbers. When a user hovers the cursor over any of the bars, a
tooltip will appear displaying intersection ID, intersection name and the exact value for number of alarm
activations or duration of the alarms defined by active selection.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 295

 Top 5 Most Frequent Alarm Types
This chart shows the five alarm types with the highest number of alarm activations or the longest total duration
of alarms defined by the active selection. On X-axis user can see the number of alarm activations or the duration
of alarms, while Y-axis contains alarm names. When user hovers over any of the bars, a tooltip will appear
showing alarm name and the actual number or duration of alarms.

Daily Alarm Activations

The Daily Alarm Activations chart displays the number (or duration) of alarm activations that changed during the
time-frame selected defined by user. The X-axis shows each day (by date) while Y-axis shows the number or
duration of alarm activations based on what the current user Selection criteria. When user hovers over the colored
area of the chart, a tooltip appears with the exact value for that date. While doing that, user can notice a blue circle
at the top of the chart for that specific date. If user hovers the mouse cursor over that circle, a tooltip will contain
exact date and value.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 296

 Total Alarms
This widget shows the total number of alarm activations or
total duration of all alarms per the user defined criteria in
the Selection Bar. The number of alarm activations will be
shown as a number with comas to divide thousands,
millions etc. Duration of all alarms will be shown as
number of 24-hour days, hours, minutes and seconds.

Mini Map
The Mini Map is a widget that displays the geographical location of
intersections affected by alarms. Each affected intersection will be
marked by a pushpin whose color will indicate the number or duration
of alarms that occurred for that intersection. Color ranges between dark
blue for lowest number or duration of alarms and dark orange for the
intersection with the highest values. If user hovers the mouse cursor
over a heat map legend in the lower right corner of the Mini map, a
tooltip will appear to show what colors represent minimum and
maximum values. Colors are assigned dynamically based on the range
between minimal and maximal value for any intersection defined by
current selection. Clicking on a pushpin in a Mini Map will show a
tooltip with the Intersection ID, name and total number or duration of
alarms for that intersection per defined selection.

Signal Timing Alarms

This widget shows number or
duration of alarm activations for
alarms that belong to the Signal
Timing Alarm category (see the
tables below for details). Every
alarm type will be represented by a
separate bar that shows the number
or duration of alarm activations. The
X-axis shows number or duration of
alarm activation while Y-axis shows
the alarm type. If a user hovers over
any of the bars, a tooltip will appear
showing alarm name and the actual
number or duration of alarm
activations.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 297

 Preemptions
This widget shows number or duration of
preemption or priority events that belong to
Preemption category (see tables below for
details). Every alarm type will be represented
by a separate bar that shows the value of
number or duration of alarm activations. X-axis
shows number or duration of alarm activation
while Y-axis shows the alarm type. If user
hovers over any of the bars, a tooltip will appear
showing alarm name and the actual number or
duration of alarm activations.

Communications, Controller and Cabinet (3C) Alarms

The 3C widget shows the number or duration of
alarms related to communication, controller or
cabinets. Every alarm type will be represented
by a separate bar that shows the number or
duration of alarm activations. The X-axis shows
the number or duration of the alarm activation
while the Y-axis shows the alarm type. If user
hovers over any of the bars, a tooltip will appear
showing alarm name and the actual number or
duration of alarm activations.

Detection Alarms
This widget shows number or duration of
alarms that belong to the Detection category
(see the tables below for further details). Every
alarm type will be represented by a separate bar
that will show the number or duration of the
alarm activations. The X-axis shows number or
duration of the alarm activation while Y-axis
shows the alarm type. If a user hovers over any
of the bars, a tooltip will appear showing alarm
name and the actual number or duration of the
particular alarm activation.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 298

 Congestion Incidents
This widget shows number or duration of alarms that belong to Congestion Incident category (see tables below
for details). Every alarm type will be represented by a separate bar that shows the value of number or duration of
alarm activations. X-axis shows number or duration of alarm activation while Y-axis shows the alarm type. If
user hovers over any of the bars, a tooltip will appear showing alarm name and the actual number or duration of
alarm activations. In order to have these alarms generated, user has to set up detectors and thresholds in
Congestion Level definition screen in ATMS.
Other Alarms
The Other Alarms widget shows the number or
duration of alarms that belong to the Other
Alarms category (see the tables below for
further details). Each alarm type will be
represented by a separate bar that shows the
value of number or duration of the alarm
activations. The X-axis shows number or
duration of the alarm activation while Y-axis
shows the alarm type. If a user hovers over any
of the bars, a tooltip will appear showing alarm
name and the actual number or duration of
alarm activations.

In case there were no alarm activations for the defined selection, widget will be blank and in will show “No data
found” in lower right corner.
All alarms are grouped into six categories and are displayed in six independent widgets
• Signal Timing
• Preemption
• 3C – Communications, Controller and Cabinet Alarms
• Detection
• Congestion Incident
• Other Alarms

The alarm assignments to these groups are defined as shown in the tables provided below.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 299

Signal Timing Alarms

# Alarm Name Alarm Description

4 Coordinator Failure This alarm indicates that coordination is failed. There are two ways in
which coordination may fail: 1) The TS2 method in which two cycle faults
have occurred during coordination, but not when coordination is inactive.
2) A serviceable call has not been serviced in 3 cycles. This is the
traditional method, which predates the NEMA TS2 method.

9 Closed Loop Disabled This alarm, when active, indicates that the Closed-loop Enable parameter
(MM->2->1) is set to OFF.

13 Coordination Free Switch Alarm active when System/Free Switch is FREE

Input

17 Cycle Fault TS2 Alarm. It indicates that a serviceable call has not been serviced in
approximately two cycle times and coordination was active at the time.

18 Cycle Failure TS2 Alarm. It indicates that a serviceable call has not been serviced in
approximately two cycle times and that coordination was not active at the
time.

19 Coordination Fault Indicates that a cycle fault occurred during coordination.

30 Pattern Error/Coord Active when coord diagnostic has failed.

Diagnostic Fault

38 Pattern Change Coordination Pattern changes are logged to the event and alarm buffers
using this alarm number. The data byte stores the new pattern number.

47 Coord Active Set when coordination is active (not free)

60 Coordination Failure Alarm is ON when Coordination has failed

61 Coord in Transition Alarm is ON when coord is active and in transition for times over 3 seconds.
Alarm is OFF when coord is active and in SYNC.

64 SynchroGreen Active Indicates that the agency has the SynchroGreen Central Module and it is
currently sending a Pattern to the local controller. - Available via
SynchroGreen Module

259 Repetitive Phase Max The agency can set up a threshold in the admin.ini file to track the number
of phase maxes that occur

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 300

Preemption and Priority Alarms

# Alarm Name Alarm Description

48 Preempt Active Set when any preempt is active

49 HP Preempt 1 High-Priority Preempt 1 (Typically Rail Preempt 1)

50 HP Preempt 2 High-Priority Preempt 2 (Typically Rail Preempt 2)

51 HP Preempt 3 High-Priority Preempt 3

52 HP Preempt 4 High-Priority Preempt 4

53 HP Preempt 5 High-Priority Preempt 5m

54 HP Preempt 6 High-Priority Preempt 6

55 LP Preempt 1 Low-Priority or Transit Priority Preempt 1

56 LP Preempt 2 Low-Priority or Transit Priority Preempt 2

57 LP Preempt 3 Low-Priority or Transit Priority Preempt 3

58 LP Preempt 4 Low-Priority or Transit Priority Preempt 4

62 Light Rail/Transit Alarm Rail Check: One of the following detector conditions exist:
•Train activates Check-In detector without activating Advanced Detector
•Train waited too long (MaxCheckIn value expired)
•Train activated Check-Out detector without activating the Check-In
Detector

77 Emergency Priority Emergency Priority Activation (ON/OFF) - Available via Emergency.now

Module

114 HP Priority 7 High-Priority Preempt 7

115 HP Priority 8 High-Priority Preempt 8

116 HP Priority 9 High-Priority Preempt 9

117 HP Priority 10 High-Priority Preempt 10

118 HP Priority 11 High-Priority Preempt 11

119 HP Priority 12 High-Priority Preempt 12

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 301

3C – Communications, Controller and Cabinet Alarms

# Alarm Name Alarm Description

1 Power Up Alarm Is active when power is applied to the controller. Transitions upon power-
up and power-down may be logged.

2 Stop Timing Indicates that one of the stop time inputs is active.

3 Cabinet Door Activation This is brought into the NEMA input called "lamps" or "indicator". This
input is typically used for the cabinet door switch in TS1 cabinets.

12 Manual Control Enable Alarm active when Police Control Switch and Push Button is ON

14 Local Flash Input Asserted by monitor or cabinet switch when in flash- Typically a Cabinet
Door Input

15 CMU or MMU Flash Input Alarm is active when the controller receives an SDLC message from the
MMU that it is in flash. Alarm is active when the controller receives a
SDLC message from the MMU hardware that it is in flash. Please note
that the CMU/MMU must be properly wired in the cabinet to receive this
alarm

16 CMU or MMU Fault Indicates a Conflict Monitor Hardware Fault has occurred when CVM is
NOT asserted by the controller and Stop-Time is applied.

20 Controller Fault Intersection is in Flash due to a critical controller fault. This fault includes
Field Check, Response Frames, and Processor Diagnostics.

22 MMU SDLC Fault SDLC communication with the MMU or has experienced a Response
Frame Fault. This is a critical fault and will cause the controller to flash.

23 Terminal Facility SDLC SDLC communication with one or more of the Terminal and Facilities
Fault BIUs are faulted. This is a critical fault and will cause the controller to
flash.

24 SDLC Response Frame Report from SDLC interface

Fault

25 EEPROM CRC Fault The background EEPROM diagnostic has detected an unexplained change
in the CRC of the user-programmed database.

31 Cabinet Flash Alarm Active after a programmed delay timer expires if the monitor, or a
controller fault, causes the cabinet to flash. Refer to Alarms section of user
manual for further details.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 302

32 Time Download Requested Download request from v61 controllers
from Field

59 EEPROM Compare Fault Checksum of firmware memory has changed in TS1, TS2 Controller
platforms using EEPROM memory

70 Internal Clock Jump Occurs when the clock jumps by +/- 2 seconds

71 SIU Input SDLC Error SDLC communication fault with at least one of the input file detector SIUs

72 SIU Output SDLC Error SDLC communication fault with at least one of the output file SIUs

73 Controller Access Active when a key is pressed until the Display Time expires (see Unit
Parameters, MM->1->2->1)

74 User Key Login Active when user enters security key – records the User # in the data byte

75 Disk File Access Error The software could not access the files on “disk” devices such as Flash
RAM, RAM, SD card or USB device

76 Database Change Database is edited in a controller by a Logged in User and is reported to

Notification ATMS

78 SIU CMU SDLC Fault SDLC communication with the CMU has indicated a Fault condition.

79 SIU CMU SDLC Comm SDLC communication with the CMU has failed. This is a critical fault
Error and will cause the controller to flash.

80 CMU Channel Conflict Conflict detected between SIU CMU channels

81 FIO Changed Status FIO Status has changed

82 UPS On Battery Indicates that the cabinet is running under UPS Power (Input function 250
is set to ON)

83 UPS Flash Input Indicates the controller is in Flash due to the UPS Battery low power (Input
function 251 is set to ON)

84 Comm Failure to System This alarm is set when the parameter FailTime expires (Controller
Device received no communications)

257 Communications Restored Communications between the controller and the ATMS communications
server has been Restored

258 Communications Failure Communications between the controller and the ATMS communications
server has Failed

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 303

Detection Alarms

# Alarm Name Alarm Description

21 Detector SDLC Fault Indicates SDLC communication with at least one of the Detector BIUs are
faulted. This is a non-critical fault and will not cause the intersection to flash.

26 Detector Diagnostic One of the controller detector diagnostics programmed via menu MM->5->1
Fault (No Activity, Max Presence or Erratic Count) has failed.

27 Detector Fault From One or more local detectors have been reported to be faulted by detector
SDLC hardware and/or BIU hardware. These faults include open loop, shorted loop,
excessive inductance change, and watch-dog time-out.

28 Queue Detector Alarm Associated with the queue detector feature. Data indicates which queue
detector is generating the alarm.

29 Ped Detector Fault A ped detector is faulted due to user program limits being exceeded. These
include No Activity, Max Presence and Erratic Count on screen MM->5->4.

65 LRT-Detector Stuck Advance/Check-in/Check-out Detector Stuck - Available via LRT/TSP

Module

66 LRT-Check In/Out Advance/Check-in/Check-out detector inputs are out of sequence - Available

Sequence Error via LRT/TSP Module

67 LRT-Check In Arrival Failed to arrive at the Check-in Detector in the proper amount of time -
Time Failure Available via LRT/TSP Module

68 LRT-Check Out Arrival Failure to arrive at the Check-out Detector - Available via LRT/TSP Module
Time Failure

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 304

Congestion Incident Alarms

# Alarm Name Alarm Description

260 Congestion Incident – The High congestion threshold programmed by the agency has been reached for
N Bound Northbound traffic

261 Congestion Incident – The High congestion threshold programmed by the agency has been reached for
S Bound Southbound traffic

262 Congestion Incident – The High congestion threshold programmed by the agency has been reached for
E Bound Eastbound traffic

263 Congestion Incident – The High congestion threshold programmed by the agency has been reached for
W Bound Westbound traffic

264 Congestion Incident – The High congestion threshold programmed by the agency has been reached for
N-E Bound Northeast-bound traffic

265 Congestion Incident – The High congestion threshold programmed by the agency has been reached for
N-W Bound Northwest-bound traffic

266 Congestion Incident – The High congestion threshold programmed by the agency has been reached for
S-E Bound Southeast-bound traffic

267 Congestion Incident – The High congestion threshold programmed by the agency has been reached for
S-W Bound Southwest-bound traffic

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 305

Other Alarms

# Alarm Name Alarm Description

5 External Alarm # 1 User selected Alarm wired to particular cabinet input

6 External Alarm # 2 User selected Alarm wired to particular cabinet input

7 External Alarm # 3 User selected Alarm wired to particular cabinet input

8 External Alarm # 4 User selected Alarm wired to particular cabinet input

10 External Alarm # 5 User selected Alarm wired to particular cabinet input

11 External Alarm # 6 User selected Alarm wired to particular cabinet input

33 Lamp Failure - Ch A Street Lamp Failure (Channel A)- Legacy Software Alarm

34 Lamp Failure - Ch B Street Lamp Failure (Channel B)- Legacy Software Alarm

37 Download Request Requests Download from central system (see MM->6->4)

41 Temp Alert #1 - High Temperature Alert 1 – High Temperature))- Legacy Software Alarm
Temp

42 Temp Alert #1 - Low Temperature Alert 1 – Low Temperature)- Legacy Software Alarm
Temp

43 Temp Alert #1 - Status Temperature Alert 1 – Status Alarm)- Legacy Software Alarm
Alarm

44 Temp Alert #2 - High Temperature Alert 2 – High Temperature)- Legacy Software Alarm
Temp

45 Temp Alert #2 - Low Temperature Alert 2 – Low Temperature)- Legacy Software Alarm
Temp

46 Temp Alert #2 - Status Temperature Alert 2 – Status Alarm)- Legacy Software Alarm
Alarm

63 TSP Active Trigger Used with ATMS to initiate download of TSP Data - Available
viaLRT/TSP Module

87 External Alarm #7 User selected Alarm wired to particular cabinet input

88 External Alarm #8 User selected Alarm wired to particular cabinet input

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 306

89 External Alarm #9 User selected Alarm wired to particular cabinet input

90 External Alarm #10 User selected Alarm wired to particular cabinet input

91 External Alarm #11 User selected Alarm wired to particular cabinet input

92 External Alarm #12 User selected Alarm wired to particular cabinet input

93 External Alarm #13 User selected Alarm wired to particular cabinet input

94 External Alarm #14 User selected Alarm wired to particular cabinet input

95 External Alarm #15 User selected Alarm wired to particular cabinet input

96 External Alarm #16 User selected Alarm wired to particular cabinet input

121 Special Function Output 1 Special Function #1

122 Special Function Output 2 Special Function #2

123 Special Function Output 3 Special Function #3

124 Special Function Output 4 Special Function #4

125 Special Function Output 5 Special Function #5

126 Special Function Output 6 Special Function #6

127 Special Function Output 7 Special Function #7

128 Special Function Output 8 Special Function #8

268 Database differences A synchronization with StreetSync shows databases have been
occurred after latest updated/changed.
StreetSync synchronization

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 307

 Map Page
The Map Page provides a full screen view of the map where only intersections that have active alarms for the
selected criteria in the Select Bar will appear. It can be accessed by clicking the “Map” icon on the right-hand
side of the Page Bar. They are represented by pushpins with different colors in the same way as displayed on the
Mini Map. This map can be navigated like any other Bing Map. The user can move the map by dragging, zooming
in or zooming out by using the mouse scroll wheel.

A user can click on any of the pushpins and by doing so, a new panel will appear with alarm details for that
intersection. The Intersection ID number, intersection name, total number or duration of alarms are available on
this screen. This panel also provides a pie chart that shows a ratio of the different alarm types that were active for
selected controllers in different colors. Additionally, the exact name and number or duration for all alarms
activated alarms will be shown. Finally, each alarm is represented by a percentage that specific alarm type has
compared to total number or duration of alarm activations for selected intersection.

Creating new filters, loading or modifying the existing filter templates (selection criteria) can be done while on
the Map page via the Selection Bar.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 308

 Help
By clicking the “Help” icon, which is
located between “Map” icon and the
Username, the user can launch the help
content with instructions how to use the
Alarms Dashboard and details for all
alarm types (i.e. the alarm ID, name, descriptions per alarm category are provided)

Using the Alarms Dashboard will bring multiple benefits to any agency. The advantages include:
• Brings a new perspective and new information beyond what is available in Field alarms report
• Provides a comprehensive overview of traffic signal alarm activations
• Helps in identifying reliability weaknesses
• Points out in which segments certain improvements are needed

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 309

6 Definitions Module

The Definitions Module provides the user the ability to define the primary device, user, and operating parameters
of the ATMS system with the exception of controller definitions, which is covered in the Home module. This
section will show you how to set up and define the primary Definitions categories. The Definitions in the ATMS
system include:
⚫ Alarm Naming and Notification ⚫ Alarm-Based System Triggers
⚫ Backup and Archive of Databases ⚫ Camera Tours
⚫ Controller and Device Grouping ⚫ GIS Shape File and Layer Editing
⚫ Jurisdictions ⚫ Messages for CMS/DMS
⚫ Monitor Communications ⚫ Report Criteria Template
⚫ System Scheduler ⚫ System Device Definitions
⚫ Users and User Groups ⚫ JAMAR Counter Data Import
Each category of the Definitions module provides for “List”, “Create”, “Edit”, and “Delete” of the items within
the category. Some categories provide a “Create From” option. With the exception of the “Create” function,
the user will need to first select “List xxxx”, highlight the desired object for editing on the list that appears on the
main window, and navigate to the desired editing function such as Edit or Delete.

When creating items that are selected in the definitions module, users must follow normal Windows
filename constructs. The names that are created by the user should be of limited size (16 or less
characters) have no special characters with the exception of the underscore character (“_”) and no
embedded spaces.

Deleting any defined parameter in ATMS will permanently delete the information from the database.
Unless there is a backup copy of the SQL database performed, this information will be lost with this
action.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 310

If a function is “Grayed Out” on the icon bar, then that particular operation cannot be performed until the proper
selection process is performed. For example, the user cannot Edit or Delete until an object has been selected from
the list.
All functions that are displayed within ATMS are permitted for the user that is logged in. If a function for a user
under User Definitions is not enabled, then the item will not appear at all within ATMS.

In order to perform functions within the Definitions module or the specific categories of this module,
your user definition must provide your access right to edit and create each of the categories. The system
administrator should carefully evaluate who is allowed editing access to this module. If a parameter is
modified or deleted, there is no backup for the previous information within ATMS.

Search Engine for Definitions Module

Certain sub-categories within the Definitions module can
be navigated using the Search Engine tool in the
Navigation pane on the middle left of the screen. When the
Search Engine appears, it is available for navigation within
that specific, selected Navigation category on the Actions
pane.
Search values will cover the highlighted category in the
Action pane. The illustration to the left shows “Device” as
the selected category. When navigating to the Search
Engine, the Unit Name box will provide a list of the defined
“Devices” in ATMS.
Select the targeted object from the drop-down, then Find
Now to create the results of the Search in the Overview
pane. You can then perform Actions such as Edit or Delete
on the selected object.
Each Definitions category will provide a unique set of
Search Engine parameters.
To reset your search and restore the full system list, select
“Reset All”, then “Find Now”. This resets the search
engine parameters back to “All” and displays every
controller or device.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 311

6.1 Alarm
This section provides the ability to create customized Alarm Descriptions for any
incoming Alarm. If an Alternate Alarm Description is used, then ATMS will use it each
time an Alarm is received, and on an Alarm History report when it is generated. This
section also gives the ability to manually assign a color to the Status for the LED and
the GIS Legend.

6.1.1 Alternate Alarm Description

To create an Alternate Alarm Description for one or more alarms, navigate
to Alarm…Alternate Alarm Description. Two category boxes will appear in
the main window. The box on the left contains the Default Alarm
Descriptions for all system alarms. The box on the right display saved
Alternate Alarm Descriptions. To create a new description, highlight the
Default Description from the list, then type the desired text in the Current
Alarm Description box at the bottom of the screen.
Select the “Update” box to save. The new Alternate Alarm Description will
appear on the right box.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 312

6.1.2 Active Alarm Selection
This section adds the ability to manually
assign other colors to the Status “LED”
indication on the List view and the Push-pin
icon on the Map view screen. Please note
that the default colors on these indications
are the communications status colors
shown on the left.
Users can now customize the indication colors to also show real-time alarm
status, which will override the communications status colors.
If the Active Alarm selection is not modified, the system defaults to the
communications color combination on setup. When modifying the Active Alarm selection, the user simply
selects the alarm he wants to modify, the color for that alarm and a priority number (1 is the highest priority,
128 is the lowest priority) that is used to display that alarm over other alarms. When displaying on the map
view, the user can also select a “LED” icon on the GIS map flash RED.

On the GIS view there is a new tab called active alarms. This tab will tell you all active alarms that are taking
place as well as list the alarm and the controller that is generating the alarm.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 313

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 314
In the example below, controller ID #22 has two active alarms (see GIS view) that have been generated. The
stop timing alarm is displayed on the list view because it has priority over the keyboard accessed alarm.
Therefore you will see Orange displayed on the List view and the Bing Map view.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 315

6.2 Alarm Notification
Alarm Notifications allow the user to create a system-generated notification schedule to
send a page, e-mail or web message to a specified user when specified alarms are detected
by the system. The notification can be customized by user, alarm type, and time-of-day.

6.2.1 List Alarm Notification

To display the existing Alarm Notification, select Definitions…Alarm

Notification…List Alarm Notifications the user will display all Alarm Incidents that
have been created in the main window. Note that by selecting one of these from the
list, the options to Edit or Delete Alarm Notification become available as shown in
the figure below

6.2.2 Create Alarm Notification

Choose Definitions…Alarm Notification…Create Alarm Notification from the
Actions Pane.
Enter an Incident Name in the Description box.
Select Start and Stop value for Time Range and Date Range boxes. These values
control the window of time that this Incident will report to the user. If a user
needs to be notified only during after hours, then set PM time values in the Start
Time and Stop Time boxes.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 316

The Days box allows for notification only on the selected days, regardless of whether it fits within the Date and
Time range selected. Both the Days value and the Start/Stop Time values work together.
Select the Group of Controllers that the user shall be notified about.
Select the User to be notified.
Select the Notification method. ATMS can notify by Page, E-mail, and Web. If the “Paging” option is selected
for the Notification section, the phone number of the pager must be provided in the user definition (discussed in
later in this chapter). If the pager does not support alphanumeric messages, the return phone number will be used
to return the alarm number and intersection ID.
Double click on the alarm entries to toggle between “Yes” and “No” to control reporting status for each alarm.
A complete list of alarms is provided in Chapter 13 of the Controller Operations Manual. Some alarms are specific
to the type of controller used, cabinet interface (SDLC or Type-2), conflict monitor type, light-rail operation, etc.
Click “Apply” or “OK” to save.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 317

The table below lists some alarms that are commonly used in the ATMS system.

# Alarm Name Description

Active when power is applied to the controller.
Note that you cannot detect a power outage
1 Power Up Alarm.
unless you have a battery backup to keep the
controller powered up to transmit this alarm.
Indicates that one of the stop time inputs is active.
2 Stop Timing In many cabinets, stop time also implies a
conflict monitor flash as well.
Indicates coordination is failed because a call has
4 Coordination Failure
been skipped for 3 cycles.
Alarm active when Police Push Button is
12 Man Control Enable
activated
Asserted by some cabinets when in monitor flash
14 Local Flash Input
or switch flash.
Asserted when a programmed queue detector
28 Queue detector alarm
exceeds limits
49 Preempt 1 Input Typically Railroad preempt 1

For Alarms to report to ATMS, the matching “Event” number must also be enabled in the controller

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 318

6.2.3 Edit Alarm Notification
By choosing Definitions…Alarm Notification…List Alarm Notifications from the Actions Pane, ATMS will
display the existing Alarm Notifications. Select the desired Alarm Notification
from the list, the option to Edit Alarm Notification becomes available as
shown in the figure below. The same window as the Create Alarm
Notification will appear for editing the parameters.
Enter your changes.
Click “Apply” or “OK” to save.

6.2.4 Delete Alarm Notification

To delete an Alarm Incident, navigate to Definitions…Alarm
Notification…List Alarm Notifications from the Actions Pane, ATMS will
display the existing Alarm Notifications. Select the desired Alarm
Notification from the list, the option to Delete Alarm Notification becomes
available as shown in the figure
below. Select Delete Alarm
Notification, a “pop-up” will appear
to allow the user to confirm the
Delete function.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 319

6.3 Backup and Archive

The Backup and Archive section of ATMS enables the system administrator to manually perform database backup
to a designated storage server. This utility prevents data files from getting too large and also provides an easy
mechanism to perform system backups.
In all three processes (Archive, Backup, or Replicate), the SQL and controller databases first need to be
placed in a designated folder on the ATMS server. This would typically be a folder named “Archive” in
the root “C” or “D” directory, or as a folder in the C:\naztec\nazserv. Once the file is saved to this
destination, then it can be exported to an outside server for storage or use.
It is recommended that the storage drive is located on a different computer or device to protect the data against
server failure and data loss.

6.3.1 Archive Database

The Archive Database utility in ATMS enables the system administrator to remove
older portions of the system’s largest files to a designated storage server, keeping
the main data files in an efficient and manageable file size. The Archive function
can target any combination of four SQL data files, which are: 1) Preempts, 2)
Volume, 3) Alarms and 4) Splits. All of these files accumulate system data on a
regular basis through the “Full Status” poll and are continually growing as the
system Administrator runs.
To create a database Archive, navigate to Definitions…Backup and Archive…Archive Database. Select the Target
Directory for the database to be stored. This entry must include the full network path to the storage location.
Next, select the Archive Older Than value in days. This value will remove file data from each designated file
based on this selection, which will affect data access for future report generation. It is recommended that a
selection of greater than “30” days (approximately 1 months) is made when performing this action.
The Archive Database utility can also send the data to a storage location via FTP (File Transfer Protocol). If this
method is desired, check the box to enable the FTP function.
Next, select the Server name for the storage server. This value can be the hostname or the IP address of the server.
An example of this would be “192.168.100.100” or “ftp.myagency.com”. If this server requires an authentication,
complete the Username and Password.
The Path is the virtual directory on the ftp server where the archive data will be stored.
Check each Data Table that will be archived in this process.
Select “Apply” to save the Archive configuration. To implement the Archive process, the Archive task can be
performed manually through an Instant Report or will need to be configured as a scheduled task under
Definitions…Scheduler…Create New Schedule.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 320

6.3.2 Backup Database
The Backup Database utility performs a copy of the core ATMS system database.
This includes the entire system controller database folder named “Data” (usually
located in the C:\\Naztec\Nazserv\Data folder) and the system’s SQL database.
To perform a Backup Database function, navigate to Definitions…Backup and
Archive…Backup Database. The Target Directory must be valid to both the ATMS
application server as well as the SQL Server for the database to be stored. For
example, if the SQL Server is running on a machine separate from the application
server, then the Target Directory should be stated as the UNC network path (i.e. \\myserver\backup ).

The SQL Server process should be running as a user that has sufficient privileges to write to the network
path. By default, SQL Server runs under the local system account (SYSTEM user). In order for the
backup to succeed, the SQL Server program will have to run as an operating system user (or Network
user when using Active Directory) and the network share and its underlying file system will have to
allow the same user-write access.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 321

Next, select the Delete Backup Older Than value in days. This value will remove older backup file data from each
designated file based on this selection, which will affect data access for future report generation. It is
recommended that a selection of greater than 180 days (approximately 6 months) is made when performing this
action so that data will be available to readily generate reports from a recent timeline.

Select “Apply” to save the Backup configuration. To implement the Backup process, the Backup task can be
performed manually through an Instant Report or will need to be configured as a scheduled task under
Definitions…Scheduler…Create New Schedule.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 322

6.3.3 Replicate Database
The Replicate Database utility sets up an export of selected SQL databases
to a destination server, for functions such as implementing a reporting server
or supporting a WEB.now installation.
To create a Replicate Database function, navigate to Definitions…Backup
and Archive…Replicate Database. Select the Target Directory for the
database to be stored. This entry must include the full network path to the
storage location. The Replicate Database utility can also send the data to a
storage or Web Server location via FTP (File Transfer Protocol). If this
method is desired, check the box to enable the FTP function.
Next, select the Server name for the ftp server. This value can be the “Hostname” or the IP address of the server.
An example of this would be “192.168.100.100” or “ftp.myagency.com “.
If this server requires authentication, complete the Username and Password.
The Path is the virtual directory on the ftp server where the archived data will be stored.
Check each Data Table that will be archived in this process.
Select “Apply” to save the Replicate configuration. To implement the Replicate process, the Replicate task can
be performed manually through an Instant Report or will need to be configured as a scheduled task under
Definitions…Scheduler…Create New Schedule.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 323

6.4 Controllers Offline

The Controllers Offline function allows the user to limit the communication of information to only those devices
that are actually “online” and communicating to the central server. By designating controllers that are offline,
you will isolate the controllers that are not ready for communication from the controllers that are operational and
need to communicate to ATMS. The user should make sure that all controllers that are communicating “on-line”.

If a controller status on the List or GIS view does not show the appropriate color-coded condition, verify
that the controller is properly assigned to the “on-line” side of the list.

6.4.1 Offline List

If a controller is assigned to the Offline list then the central server will not attempt to
communicate to it. If you remove the controller from the offline list, the central will attempt
to establish communications with this unit. To add or remove controllers from the Offline
List, navigate to Controllers Offline…Offline List. To add or remove controllers from the
list, highlight the controller(s) from the appropriate list, then click the Add, Remove, Add
All, or Remove All.
The Currently Assigned list is the group of controllers that are assigned to the Offline List. ATMS will not attempt
to communicate with the controllers listed in the Currently Assigned category.
Select “Apply” to save and close the window.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 324

6.5 Camera Tour

The Camera Tour feature provides for a pre-programmed “Touring” of selected camera sites and preset views.
Each preset view is programmed for a dwell time before going to the next camera view. This feature can be used
to save time by eliminating the need to manually launch multiple cameras and navigate to a desired PTZ location.
As with the Camera/CMS Events function, the Camera Tour in ATMS utilizes a 3rd party camera server software
by Industrial Video & Control for PTZ commands and presets. This “Relay Server” works with most major
brands of Analog and IP-based cameras, but is not included in the standard package of ATMS. For more
information regarding this feature, contact your Cubic/Trafficware representative.

6.5.1 List Camera Tour

To display the existing Camera Tours, select Definitions…Camera Tour…List Camera
Tours. ATMS will display all of the available Camera Tours in the main window. When
one of these is selected from the list, the options to Edit, Delete, or Run Camera Tour
become available for selection.
Each tour listed can be expanded to display the member cameras within the highlighted
tour. Expanding the list is done by “double-clicking” the tour or by using the “+” or “-“to
expand or collapse the list.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 325

6.5.2 Create Camera Tour
Prior to creating a Camera Tour, the Camera and the presets have to be defined in
ATMS.
To create a Camera Tour, navigate to Definitions…Camera Tour…Create Camera
Tour from the Action pane. The setup screen shown below will appear in the main view
pane.
First, assign a Tour Name to your Camera Tour. Next, select “Add” to assign cameras
and parameters to the tour. A pop-up titled “Add Camera” will appear.

The Camera selection defines each camera within the “Tour”.

Select a Preset number as assigned for the camera in the IV&C Relay Server programming.
The Duration value assigns the number of seconds that the camera will remain at the preset location before
releasing to the next assigned location.
Each of these three fields is a mandatory entry for this function.
Select the “Add” button to save and enter the camera to the Tour List. After adding each entry, you will see it
appear on the “Selected Camera List”.
Once you have added all cameras and finished building your tour, click “Apply” or “OK” to save.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 326

6.5.3 Edit Camera Tour
The Camera Tour can be modified to add, modify, or delete member cameras and their
values such as Preset and Duration.
To edit the programmed Camera Tour, navigate to Definitions…Camera Tour…List
Camera Tours from the Actions Pane, ATMS will display the programmed tours. Select
the desired tour from the list. The option to Edit Camera Tour becomes available, once it
is selected. The same window as the Create Camera Tour will appear for editing the
parameters of an existing camera or removing a camera from the tour.

The picture below shows the selection of “Jess Pirtle and Eldridge” with Preset 13 and a 55 second duration being
changed to Preset 3 and a 20 second duration. After the desired changes have been made to the camera parameters,
select the “Edit” button to submit the changes. The changes should immediately update to the “Selected Camera
List” section of the screen.

To remove a camera from the tour, highlight the desired camera and select the “Remove” button.
Click “Apply” or “OK” to save all changes. Select “Cancel” to exit without saving any changes since you entered
the screen.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 327

6.5.4 Delete Camera Tour
To delete a Camera Tour, navigate to Definitions…Camera Tour…List Camera Tour
from the Actions Pane. ATMS will display the existing Camera Tours. Select the desired
tour from the list, the option to Delete Camera Tour
becomes available as shown in the figure below.
Select Delete Camera Tour, a “pop-up” will appear
to allow the user to confirm the Delete function.

6.5.5 Run Camera Tour

To initiate a tour of your designated system of cameras based on the presets and time
durations that you have programmed, highlight the desired tour from the list, then select
Run Camera Tour. The Camera Tour will launch a browser and automatically populate
the URL address with video feed information for the time duration in the tour. Each
camera will rotate through the viewing browser as programmed.
This feature is available for public use from the optional ATMS website product.

6.6 Congestion

The Congestion section provides the tools to set up the system elements that determine and display the Congestion
Level on the GIS Map.
The External Detector Mapping is a mechanism for sourcing the Wavetronix Smart Sensor HD Volume and
Occupancy data and associating it with an intersection’s approach detector channels in the Segment Editor for the
purpose of the Congestion display on the map. This feature does not place calls, volume or occupancy data
directly to the controller or its database. This is purely a sourcing mechanism for the purposes of the Congestion
layer on the GIS Map.
The Segment Editor (only with GIS Mapping) is the tool that defines how ATMS collects and displays the
incoming Volume, Occupancy and Speed data and displays it to the GIS Map as a Congestion Segment. This
editor also provides the necessary GIS editing tools to create and modify a GIS-based Congestion Layer.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 328

6.6.1 List External Detector Mapping
Before External Detectors can be assigned to controllers through the Edit tool, it has
to be selected from the List view. To view the list of External Detectors, navigate to
Congestion…List External Detector Mapping. All defined detectors will appear on
the list as shown below.
Highlight the targeted detector from the list.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 329

6.6.2 Edit External Detector Mapping
The Edit External Detector Mapping function sets the intersection and detector
channels that an External Detector will provide the volume and/or occupancy
data to.
Once the External Detector has been selected from the List function, navigate
to Edit External Detector Mapping. The main window will provide “Detector
Mapping” boxes for “Controller 1” and “Controller 2”.
From the drop-down selection box(es) for each, select the controller that will
get its Congestion data from the selected External Detector. Give each Lane an individual lane assignment to
match the lane programming in the External Detector. The Lane value is the count source from the External
Detector. Since Wavetronix Smart Sensor HD can measure two directions at the same time, two intersections
can be set with dedicated lanes for one direction (lanes 1-4), and different lanes for the other direction (lanes 5-
8).
In most cases the Lane assignment values for a detector will be different for each direction (controller). It will be
rare that a detector will be programmed for two directions. Therefore, if a Lane number is assigned to one
controller, it usually should not be used for the other controller.

The Detector value should be the assigned detector channel that is used for that approach of that controller
on the Congestion Level setup screen. This screen can be found in the Segment Editor…Congestion Tab or on
the Home Module…Actions…Definitions…Congestion Level.
The Detector values can be the same
values for Controller 1 and Controller 2,
since they are for different controllers
and might use similarly numbered inputs
for the approaches.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 330

6.6.3 Segment Editor (GIS Mapping only)
The Segment Editor provides the ability to
assign approach segments for Congestion
reporting. The Segment Editor tool
performs this by drawing parallel lines to
the GIS centerlines displayed in the
Editor.
To create Congestion segments in ATMS,
select Definitions…Segment
Editor…Controllers. The Overview pane will display a two-part
window with each controller in the upper half and the GIS centerline
map in the lower half. If multiple GIS line files are used in your ATMS
mapping system, such as a fiber backbone layer, make sure that you
select the centerline file for congestion drawing. The default color for
the centerline layer is a blue line format.
Each controller on the list displays eight boxes, one for each direction of the eight-point compass. If a box is
checked, then a segment has already been assigned for that direction of the intersection.

The same compass assignments must be assigned to the Segment as defined in the Congestion, Turning
Phase Movements, and Link Speed programming screen for the controller. Without this proper
consistency, the detector counts will not be properly routed to the Segments.

In the Legacy view, when a targeted controller is selected, ATMS will zoom the Segment Editor GIS map to the
intersection, and four tabs will appear on the bottom of the Overview Pane: Map, Congestion, Phase and Links,
as shown below. Each tab enables the user to define the related or edit the parameters for the selected controller.
Selecting these tabs shortcut to the same programming screens as the Congestion, Turning Phase Movements,
and Link Speed Definitions as found in the Home module under Actions…Configuration that were discussed in
Chapter 5.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 331

 Map Tab - Legacy View Only
Selecting the Map option takes the user to the Controller Segment Editor. The Overview Pane will be divided into
two halves. The upper half will contain the list of defined intersections. The lower half will provide the system
map display. By selecting an intersection from the list in the upper half, the user will display that intersection’s
location on the system map in the lower half of the Overview Pane, as shown in the figure below.

Map Navigation Toolbar

The Controller Segment Editor control is performed by selecting a toolbar function from the upper left of the GIS
map:

To navigate the GIS Location Editor map, select one of the following icons:

Information – Selecting this function will provide real-time information of the device using a “Hover
Balloon”, by placing the mouse over the desired map object.

Zoom-In – Selecting this function will allow the user to click on a point on the map and wrap around a
desired area to zoom.

Zoom-Out – After selecting this, clicking once on the map will zoom out 1 measure of extent.

Pan – This enables the user to “grab” the map and slide it in any direction.

Full Extent – By clicking this icon, the GIS map will zoom out to the fullest extent.

Edit Controller – After clicking this icon, the user can “rubber-band” around another intersection on the
map for Segment Editing instead of navigating to the next intersection from the list. After selecting an
intersection with this process the “push-pin” will appear at the newly-selected intersection, and the list will
automatically navigate to and highlight the selected intersection from the map.

. Add Shape – Provides congestion line drawing to be assigned for each approach.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 332

To create a congestion line segment, select the “Add Shape” icon .
Next, place your mouse on the approach line segment for the intersection and “left-click”. A box will appear to
select the corresponding compass direction for the approach segment. A choice of eight compass directions will
be available. Select the direction and click “OK”. A colored line segment will be drawn parallel to the centerline
segment and the corresponding compass box will be checked in the list. The length of this line segment is
determined by the termination points of the GIS file. An approach can have any number of congestion segments
drawn for each approach. This allows each approach to be drawn completely between controllers even though
there are segment breaks in the lines.

Proper segment and detector assignments will result in the following Congestion Level reporting on the GIS map
(Segment or Congestion Level layer):

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 333

The same compass assignments must be assigned to the Congestion line as defined in the Congestion,
Turning Phase Movements, and Link Speed programming screen for the controller. Without this proper
consistency, the detector Volume counts and/or Occupancy data will not be properly routed to the
Congestion lines.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 334

 Congestion Tab - Legacy View Only
Select the Congestion tab at the bottom of the Overview
Pane.
This selection will enable the user to define and edit an
intersection’s congestion level definitions for the purposes
of proper display on the “Congestion Level” layer of the GIS
map. This section allows ATMS to take inbound traffic
counts from each controller and classify the value against the
Congestion Level thresholds for LOW (Displayed in
GREEN), MEDIUM (Displayed in YELLOW), and HIGH
(Displayed in RED) for that collection period.
Two congestion levels can be assigned to each intersection
approach (Medium and High). Incoming values that are
below the minimum value for “Medium” will be classified
by ATMS within the “Low” category. The user may specify
either Volume or Occupancy to measure congestion by
clicking the corresponding circle.
Assign the Congestion Level Detectors that you want to be
assigned as collection detectors for each approach. Make
sure all left, right, and thru lanes are collecting. A maximum
of six detectors may be specified for each intersection
approach.
Click “Apply” or “OK” to save.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 335

 Phase Tab - Legacy View Only
This tab selection will enable the user to define and edit an intersection’s Turning/Phase Movement definitions
for the purposes of proper report generation. The Turn/Phase/Directions section allows ATMS to take incoming
controller count and preemption information and associate it with the correct phases and directions during report
generation.
First, select the appropriate compass direction for the intersection as shown in the above figure. In the first row
of each direction, enter the associated phases for the “Left”, “Through”, and “Right” Lanes. Next enter the
associated detector numbers for each phase.
Note: this does not assign the detector channel to the associated phase in the controller. This function is only
used as a database filter for proper report generation and Synchro utilities. However, the controller database has
to have the matching detector channels checked as counting detectors for the counts to be sent to ATMS.
The third row is for assigning the detector type to each assigned detector channel.
The fourth row, “Share” is for turning movements that do not have dedicated detection for the turning lanes. In
this case, enter the estimated percentage or detector activations from the Far Left or Far Right lane is to be
subtracted from the Through-Movement counts. Next, check the box titled “Subtract Left from Thru” or “Subtract
Right from Thru”. Enter the corresponding Through-Movement detector number(s) in the “Detectors” boxes for
the Left or Right lane. This will classify the assigned percentage of counts for that detector to the turning
movement. ATMS will calculate turning and through counts based on this percentage when generating reports.
Lastly, if you are operating an Overlap(s) at the intersection, enter the “Overlap” number to the associated phase.
Click “Apply” or “OK” to save.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 336

 Links Tab - Legacy View Only
This tab will enable the user to define and edit an intersection’s approach speed and distancing definitions for the
purposes of proper Time-Space Diagram generation. The Intersection Link Speed section allows ATMS to take
controller active pattern and offset information and associate it with the current cycle timer by providing the
necessary approach information for the intersection. This information includes Intersection at the other end of
the approach leg, approach Speed, and Distance between intersections.
First, determine the compassing directions for the intersection, N-S-E-W or NE-NW-SE-SW. Select the drop-
down for the first box labeled “Controller”. The selected controller should be the intersection at the other end of
the designated approach. In the example below, the defined controller for the Southbound approach is the
intersection to the south, or the next intersection as you continue through the southbound approach (Greenback
Lane & Binet). For example, assign the intersections to the North, South, East, and West.
Assign an associated Street name if desired. This entry is optional.
The Speed entry can be the posted speed for the approach or the speed used for coordination modeling. The latter
will show better accuracy of your displayed “green band” in the Time-Space Diagram. Entering the speed
information for both the inbound and outbound legs of the intersection is required for the Time-Space Diagram
to work properly.
Lastly, enter the distance (in feet) between the primary intersection and the downstream intersection.
Click “Apply” or “OK” to save.

The assigned controller for an approach should be the intersection that is or “Downstream” from the
approach.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 337

6.7 Devices

ATMS provides the ability to communicate and control additional system Devices through the main control
interface. You may add various hardware devices, such as cameras, network switches, CMS signs, sensors, etc.
to your ATMS Central System. After they are created, they can be place on the GIS map for direct control.
Assigning them to the GIS map is discussed in the next section, Device and Event Locations.
This Device section of the Definitions module allows the user to Create, Edit, or Delete Devices prior to assigning
them to the GIS map.

6.7.1 List Devices

To display the existing Devices, select Definitions…Devices…List Devices. ATMS will
display all of the available Devices in the main screen. When one of these is selected from the
list, the options to Edit or Delete become available for selection.
Starting with ATMS 2.9, the Device List will display communication status of each device,
device type, latitude / longitude of the device, the last date/time of when the device was
communicating successfully and the number of successful pings vs number of
communications attempts per hour. The list can be sorted per each column.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 338

6.7.2 Create Device
To create a Device, navigate to Definitions…Devices…Create Device from the Action pane.
A basic setup screen like the ones shown below will appear in the main view pane.
The first box is to select a Device Type. A drop down will list the available Device Types in
the system. These types are pre-defined during your ATMS installation. The standard default
Device Type list will include:

⚫ Battery Backup Units: Alpha FXM 1100 or Tesco UPS (Requires BBS module activation)
⚫ Actellis Switches ⚫ Cisco Switches
⚫ IP Temperature Sensor ⚫ IP Camera or IP device (Browser Required)
⚫ Cubic/Trafficware and Cubic/Trafficware “VU COM” Video Detection Cameras
⚫ IV&C, Axis, or Ocularis Cameras (Requires CCTV module activation)
⚫ Cameleon or Cortec Camera Control (Requires module activation)
⚫ Alpha, Addco or Daktronics brand CMS signs (Requires CMS module activation)
⚫ Wavetronix Smart Sensor 105 and HD (Requires module activation)
⚫ Wavetronix Smart Sensor Service interface
Depending on how the specific Device
software operates, additional Devices can be
added to the list. Consult your
Cubic/Trafficware representative to add or
modify the Device Type list. Each Device
Type requires a specific Unit ID. The
Controller ID number can be reused for a
Device Unit ID number to denote the same
intersection number. Next, assign the
desired Unit Name to the device. This box
supports a full ASCII format. The following
available boxes will depend on the selected
Device Type and the requirements to operate
it.

Devices that available with the optional Web.Now module will have a selection box labeled “Enable
Web.Now”. By checking this Box, the device will be available to display on the Web.Now interface.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 339

 Create CMS Signs
Note: The CMS interface is an add-on module of ATMS.
Select the CMS type in the Device Type box. ATMS interfaces to three brands of signs, Alpha, Addco, and
Daktronics. The Alpha and Addco sign protocols are serial based and the setup screen is shown below. The
Daktronics signs utilize IP communications over a network and the setup screen will offer an IP box instead one
for a DROP. In the figure below, you will see a box for a DROP assignment. Serial-based Changeable Message
Signs only need to send via a serial DROP in the ATMS Communications Server. This box routes the CMS sign
to the corresponding DROP to the sign. The “server.ini” file will determine how a serial DROP communicates.
An IP–based sign does not communicate by using a DROP on the Communications Server, but sends a direct
TCP/IP stack over the network.
Click “Apply” or “OK” to save all changes. Select “Cancel” to exit without saving any changes since you entered
the screen.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 340

 Create CISCO Switch
In the next figure, you will see an additional box for the URL of the Cisco switch. Typically, all that is needed
for this value is the IP address. If entering only the IP address will not launch the Device, then enter the full URL
(http://192.168.50.51).
Click “Apply” or “OK” to save all changes. Select “Cancel” to exit without saving any changes since you entered
the screen.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 341

 Create “VU COM” Video Detector
NOTE: The Camera interface is an add-on module of ATMS.
Cubic/Trafficware has partnered with Traficon Video Detection Systems. Because of this, ATMS users will
receive integration and features with Traficon that will be unique. As discussed earlier in this book,
Cubic/Trafficware Video Detection Feeds utilizing the Cubic/Trafficware “VU COM” Ethernet communications
card can be automatically initiated through the Hover Balloon. Instead of supplying only the camera identification
with latitude and longitude coordinates as with other cameras, the video hover will provide a real-time, on-demand
video stream within the Hover Balloon.
To create a Cubic/Trafficware video detection camera, select “VU COM” for the Device Type.
Assign the VU COM camera ID number under the Unit ID.
Assign a name for the intersection camera(s) under Unit Name. This name will be applicable to all cameras at
this intersection location, as all cameras feed video through one module.
In the ServerIP box assign the IP address of the ATMS server.
In the IP box assign the IP address of the Cubic/Trafficware VU COM communications module.
In the Cameras box assign the number of cameras at the intersection.
Click “Apply” or “OK” to save all changes. Select “Cancel” to exit without saving any changes since you entered
the screen.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 342

 Create “CUBIC/TRAFFICWARE” Video Detector
Note: This interface is an add-on module of ATMS.
Cubic/Trafficware has created its own Video Detection device that can communicate with up to four IP
cameras. Because of this, ATMS users will receive integration and features with this detector. Any
Cubic/Trafficware Video Detection information and video feeds, utilizing the Cubic/Trafficware Video
Camera Ethernet communications card can be automatically initiated through the Hover Balloon. Instead of
supplying only the camera identification with latitude and longitude coordinates as with other cameras, the
video hover will provide a real-time, on-demand video stream within the Hover Balloon.
To create a “Cubic/Trafficware” video detection Device select “VIDEO DETECTOR - CUBIC/TRAFFICWARE
VIDEO” for the Device Type.
Assign a name for the intersection camera(s) under Unit Name. This name will be applicable to all cameras
at this intersection location, as all cameras feed video through one module.
Assign the Controller ID that the “Cubic/Trafficware” Video Card is connected to via CTRL_ID.
In the IP1 Box assign the IP address for the first camera connected to the “Cubic/Trafficware” Video Card.
In the IP2 Box assign the IP address for the second camera connected to the “Cubic/Trafficware” Video
Card (or “0” if the camera is not used).
In the IP3 Box assign the IP address for the third camera connected to the “Cubic/Trafficware” Video
Card (or “0” if the camera is not used).
In the IP4 Box assign the IP address for the fourth camera connected to the “Cubic/Trafficware” Video
Card (or “0” if the camera is not used).
In the ServerIP box, assign the IP address of the ATMS server.
Click “Apply” or “OK” to save all changes. Select “Cancel” to exit without saving any changes since you entered
the screen

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 343

 Accessing the Cubic/Trafficware Video Detector via the GIS Map
As shown below, the “Cubic/Trafficware” Video detector device can be placed on the GIS Map by accessing
Definitions->Device and Event Locations->Locations and selecting the Cubic/Trafficware Video detector that
you just created.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 344

Once the detectors are placed on the GIS map, you can select the “Cubic/Trafficware” video detector to be
displayed on the map. In addition, you can turn on the radio button to gather video detection information in
real-time, as shown below.

The figure above shows two windows created by the user - one which shows the graphical video detector data
and the other the tabular detector data. You can add windows via the menu selection “Add”. Once a window
is added you can save it to its own window by selecting the Create Window icon . You can close any
window by selecting the Close Window icon .

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 345

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 346
ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 347
ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 348
 Create Cameras
Note: This interface is an add-on module of ATMS.
ATMS provided interfaces to Cameras using several methods:
• Standard IP or URL-based launching
• Interface through Camera Server programs such as IV&C or Cameleon
• Interface through Video Encoders

IP Camera or IP Device
Defining a standard IP-based Camera will only require the IP address or URL to be entered. Name and Unit ID
are optional but should be included. Select the “Camera – IP Camera” for the Device Type. Enter the Name and
IP address or URL to launch the camera.
NOTE: This selection can also be used for any accessible IP device that will launch its own browser.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 349

 IVC Camera
When defining a camera that is operating and controlled through the “Relay Server” software by IV&C (discussed
in sections 5.4 and 5.5), select “Camera – IVC Camera” for the Device Type. Additional boxes for the PORT
and FEED will appear. The PORT number needs to match the video broadcast port# as assigned for that camera
in the IV&C Relay Server Software. The FEED number is the video feed# as assigned for that video feed in the
IV&C Relay Server Software.
Click “Apply” or “OK” to save all changes. Select “Cancel” to exit without saving any changes since you entered
the screen.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 350

 Axis Camera
Defining a Axis camera is similar to defining a standard IP-based Camera. It only requires the IP address or
URL.. Select the “Camera – Axis” for the Device Type. Enter the Name and IP address or URL to launch the
camera.

Create Temperature Probe

ATMS provides interface to Cubic/Trafficware brand IP temperature sensors. Each sensor has dual thermocouple
sensors and can provide two temperature reading. A common use for this is to have one sensor provide cabinet
temperature while the other is buried in the road surface.
Assign a Unit ID and Unit Name for the Temp Probe.
The CHANNEL# value sets the number of probes that are to be collected and displayed from the unit.
The IP value is the address of the Temperature Sensor module.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 351

For ATMS to collect information from the Temperature Sensor units, all units have to be programmed for periodic
data collection under “IP Temp Check” in the Scheduler. This function will collect the data from each sensor
unit and its probes and make it available for reports and for the device’s “hover”.
Shown below is a sample of the Temperature Probe “hover” on the GIS map:

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 352

 Create ACTELIS Switch
ATMS provides a direct “point & click” interface with Actelis “MetaASSIST” control software. This is
performed at the GIS map interface and provides specific selection and login to the selected switch icon on the
GIS map.
After selecting an Actelis switch in the Device Type box, additional boxes for the unit IP#, User ID
(LOCAL_UID) and Password (LOCAL_PID) will appear. The IP box will launch “MetaASSIST” to the specific
IP address of the selected switch.
The LOCAL_UID and LOCAL_PID are optional boxes. If they are left blank, an administrator assigned
User/Password combination will be required to log in. If you choose to utilize a standard login for all Actelis
switches, you can fill in a User/Password value in the LOCAL_UID and LOCAL_PID boxes. Actelis default is
User ID = “admin” and Password = “admin”.

Create Alpha FXM1100 Batery Backup Device

This interface is an add-on module of ATMS.
ATMS provides a direct “point & click” interface with Alpha model “FXM1100” battery backup units that are
equipped with the SNMP interface option. This Alpha integration provides GIS map interface for real-time
“hover” status and point-click selection to login to the selected icon on the GIS map.
Defining an Alpha device will only require the IP address or URL, identical to the Cisco Switch setup. Select
the “Alpha – FXM” for the Device Type. Enter the Name and IP address or URL for the unit.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 353

Shown below is a sample of the Alpha interface on the GIS map:

For the Alpha interface to work properly, all monitored Alpha units have to be programmed for
continuous polling under “Alpha Full Status” in the Scheduler. This can be done as individual Devices
or by Device Flex Group. Programming the Scheduler is discussed later in this Chapter.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 354

 Create Wavetronix Smart Sensor 105 or Smart Sensor HD
The Wavetronix Smart Sensor 105 or Smart Sensor HD interface is an add-on module of ATMS.
ATMS provides a direct “point & click” interface with Wavetronix model “Smart Sensor HD” radar counting
units that are equipped with the SNMP interface option. This Wavetronix integration provides GIS map interface
for real-time “hover” status providing Volume, Occupancy and Speed information to each corresponding icon on
the GIS map. In ATMS, the Wavetronix units are also referred to as External Detectors. This terminology is
used for the standard report in the Reports Module and for utilizing these units for Congestion Level on the GIS
Map. To use these detectors to report congestion, navigate to the Congestion section of the Definitions Module.
Defining a Wavetronix device will only require the IP address or URL, similar to the Alpha BBS setup. Select
the “Wavetronix – Smart Sensor HD” for the Device Type. Enter the Name for the unit.
The ID needs to match the ID# that is programmed in the Smart Sensor unit.
Enter the IP address for the unit. Each Wavetronix device will have a distinct IP address.
The PORT value should be set to the default “10001” value.

For ATMS to collect information from the Wavetronix units, all units have to be programmed for periodic data
collection under “Smart Sensor HD” in the Scheduler. This function will collect the SQL data from each count
station and make it available for reports and for the device’s “hover”.
Shown below is a sample of the Wavetronix “hover” on the GIS map:

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 355

6.7.3 Edit Devices
To edit the defined Devices, navigate to Definitions…Devices…List Devices from the
Actions Pane. ATMS will display the existing Devices in the system.
Select the desired Device from the list, the option to Edit Device becomes available as
shown in the figure below. The same window as the Create Device will appear for editing
the parameters.
Enter your changes. Click “Apply” or “OK” to save.

As shown above, please note that after selecting a device, right-clicking will also allow the user to access
the Device selection menu.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 356

6.7.4 Delete Devices
To delete a Device, navigate to Definitions…Devices…List Devices from the
Actions Pane. ATMS will display the existing Devices. Select the desired device
from the list, the option to Delete Device becomes available as shown in the figure
below. Select Delete Device, a “pop-up” will appear to allow the user to confirm
the Delete function.

6.7.5 Device POI (Point of Interest)

This is an application originally built for Prince Georges County Maryland for use with their temperature probes.
The county requested that they wanted to associate some point on interest with their web temp probe devices
when they hover over the device.

This is a specific legacy feature with GIS Mapping. The screen below is a view that Prince Georges County has
when browsing the POI.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 357

In order to have a temp probe device on the GIS legend make sure you have it enabled in User permissions and
preferences and also create and add the device on the GIS.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 358

6.8 Device Event Notification
The Device Event Notification sets the process for monitoring
and notification when changes in status occur on monitored
devices. Only Daktronics CMS signs (CMS module) is
integrated to this feature at this time.
Devices can be monitored on a single unit bases or by Device
Flex Group. If Device Flex Groups are used for this feature they
have to be defined before this feature is programmed.
Device Event Notifications are performed through the use of User
Distribution lists and are very flexible for customized use.

6.8.1 List Device Event Notification

To display the existing Device Event Notifications, navigate to
Definitions…Device Event Notifications…List Device Event
Notifications. ATMS will display the entire list in the main
window. When one of these is selected from the list, the options
to Edit or Delete will become available for selection.

6.8.2 Create Device Event Notification

To create a new Device Event Notification, navigate to
Definitions…Device Event Notification…Create Device
Event Notification from the Action pane. A basic setup screen
like the one shown below will appear in the main view pane.
Select the Device Type (Device category) to be monitored for
notification. All monitored Devices must be defined before
they can be used.
Notifications can be monitored by Device or Device Flex
Group.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 359

Select the Device or the Device Flex Group name to be monitored. This selection is determined from the “By”
selection above it.
Select the User Distribution group to be notified when the Device Event occurs.
Click “Apply” or “OK” to save.

6.8.3 Edit Device Event Notification

To edit a defined Device Event Notification, navigate to
Definitions…Device Event Notifications…List Device Event
Notifications from the Actions Pane. ATMS will display the
existing list in the system. Select the desired Device Event
Notification from the list. The option to Edit becomes
available as shown in the figure to the right.
The setup screen will appear in the main window, populated
with the existing settings. Make the desired changes.
Click “Apply” or “OK” to save.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 360

6.8.4 Delete Device Event Notification
To delete a Device Event Notification, navigate to
Definitions…Device Event Notification…List Device Event
Notifications from the Actions Pane. ATMS will display the
existing list of notifications. Select the desired one from the list.
The option to Delete Device Event Notification becomes
available. Select the Delete option. A “pop-up” will appear to
allow the user to confirm the Delete function.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 361

6.9 Device Flex Group
Device Flex Groups are available to expand navigation, selection and Scheduler
operation to Devices. A controller cannot be a member of a Device Flex Group.
Applications such as “Full Status” for Daktronics and Alpha Battery Backup
Supplies can be performed by Device Flex Group.
Device Flex Groups are defined by equipment type, so only matching Device
Types can be assigned to a corresponding Device Flex Group.

6.9.1 List Device Flex Group

To display the existing Device Flex Groups, select Definitions…Device Flex
Group…List Device Flex Groups. ATMS will display all of the available Device
Flex Groups in the main window. When one of these is selected from the list,
the options to Edit or Delete will become available for selection.
You can select the “+” symbol or “double-click” the Device Flex Group name
to expand the list. The controllers displayed below the Device Flex Group are
the currently assigned controllers. To collapse the list, select “-“or “double-
click” the Device Flex Group name.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 362

6.9.2 Create Device Flex Group
To create a new Device Flex Group, navigate to Definitions…Device Flex
Group…Create Device Flex Group from the Action pane. A basic setup screen
like the one shown below will appear in the main view pane.
Assign a Name for the Device Flex Group. This name will usually be a common
to region name or equipment type.
Select the Device Type for the Device Flex Group. The selected Device Type
will set the Devices that can be associated with the group. Only Devices of that
Device Type can be assigned to that Device Flex Group. Click “Apply” or “OK”
to save.

6.9.3 Edit Device Flex Group

To edit a defined Device Flex Group, navigate to Definitions…Device Flex
Group…List Device Flex Groups from the Actions Pane. ATMS will display the
existing Flex Groups in the system. Select the desired Device Flex Group from
the list. The option to Edit Device Flex Group becomes available as shown in
the figure to the right. Highlight the desired Device Flex Group, then select Edit
Device Flex Group.
The list of intersections not belonging to the Device Flex Group will appear on
the box to the right. To add intersection(s), highlight the targeted intersection(s),
then select the “Add” button, or “Add All” to place all of the controllers into the
list. For the selection of multiple controllers at one time, hold the “Shift” key as you select each controller.
To remove controllers from the assigned list, highlight the controller(s) on the Device Flex Group list on the left.
Select the “Remove” button. Selecting “Remove All” will remove all of the controllers from the list.
Click “Apply” or “OK” to save.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 363

6.9.4 Delete Device Flex Group
To delete a Device Flex Group, navigate to Definitions…Device Flex
Group…List Device Flex Groups from the Actions Pane. ATMS will display
the existing Device Flex Groups. Select the desired Device Flex Group from the
list, the option to Delete Device Flex Group becomes available as shown in the
figure below. Highlight the target Device Flex Group and select Delete Device
Flex Group. A “pop-up” will appear to allow the user to confirm the Delete
function.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 364

6.10 Device and Event Locations

ATMS provides the user a GIS shape file editing utility for the purposes of adding or moving system devices
(Controllers and Devices) and Events on the GIS map. This is performed by enabling the user to define a geo-
reference value of Latitude and Longitude for any System Device or Event in the ATMS database.
The initial presentation of the GIS layer map in the main window will appear for the “Controller” layer, as shown
in the figure below. The view will display a list of all Controllers on along with their coordinates if assigned, and
a GIS Location Editor screen on the bottom.
If you do not see values in the X-Coord and Y-Coord columns of the Device List on the upper half of the screen,
then the device has not been assigned a GIS map location.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 365

 Location Editor Search Engine

The lookup list and corresponding GIS Location Editor map for that layer is changed by using the Search Engine
shown here on the left of the screen. By selecting the magnifier icon on the top right of the Overview pane, the
search Engine will be displayed. The Search Engine allows the user to select the targeted layer for location editing.
To navigate the Search Engine, select the Device Type from the Devices box. Next, click the “Find Now” button.
The list view and the GIS Location Editor map will change to reflect the selected type.

Once the targeted layer is displayed, editing can be performed by highlighting a device from the list.
Map Navigation Toolbar

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 366

The GIS Location Editor control is performed by selecting a toolbar function from the upper left of the GIS map:

To navigate the GIS Location Editor map, select one of the following icons:

Information – Selecting this function will provide real-time information of the device using a “Hover
Balloon”, by placing the mouse over the desired map object.

Zoom-In – Selecting this function will allow the user to click on a point on the map and wrap around a
desired area to zoom.

Zoom-Out – After selecting this, clicking once on the map will zoom out 1 measure of extent.

Pan – This enables the user to “grab” the map and slide it in any direction.

Full Extent – By selecting this icon, the GIS map will zoom out to the fullest extent.

Add Shape – By selecting this icon, the mouse can place or move an object on the GIS Location Editor
map to “Add” or “Edit” the location of a GIS object.
The GIS Location Editor map can zoom to the defined location of the object. Any item highlighted can be added

to the GIS map or moved on the GIS map by toggling the “Add Shape” icon , then navigating the GIS
Location Editor map to the new desired location. Place the cursor at the location. Click to place the Device.

Delete Shape – By selecting this option, the targeted controller, camera, etc., will be removed from the
GIS map.

The Device will locate only one time for each selection of the “Add Shape” icon.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 367

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 368
6.11 Events
Events can be added to the ATMS database and to the GIS map by using either of two
methods. The first method was described in Section 4.3 in the GIS Map Navigation Toolbar
section under Events. This method provided for immediate creation and GIS placement of
the event on the map.
This section, which describes the second method, enables the user to manually Create, Edit
(including activating and de-activating), and Delete each Event. GIS placement of the event
through this method is performed manually as discussed previously.

6.11.1 List Events

To display the existing Events, select Definitions…Events…List Events. ATMS will
display all of the available Events in the main window. When one of these is selected from
the list, the options to Edit or Delete will become available for selection.

6.11.2 Create Event

This section describes how to create an Event within the Definitions module. This
method will only create an Event, not place the event on the GIS map or to the web site.
To place a created Event on the GIS map, refer to Section 5.7. ATMS also provides a
tool to Create Event and place it on the map in one step. This is discussed in Section
4.1.2, under Map Navigation Toolbar…Event.
To create an Event, navigate to Definitions…Event…Create Event from the Action pane.
A basic setup screen like the one shown below will appear in the main view pane.

First, check the Active box for the Event if you desire for it to be immediately active. If
you are creating if for an undetermined future date, leave it unchecked. Next, assign a Description name for the
Event.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 369

Select the Begin Date/Time value to the desired Event start time. The initial setup screen will default to the current
date and time. If a future date and time is assigned for the Event, ATMS will not display nor activate the Event
until the programmed time. If the Event is not checked as Active, it will not begin at the Begin Date/Time as
programmed.
Select either “Expire On” or “Infinite” for the expiration time of the event. By selecting “Infinite”, the event will
need to be manually de-activated as described in the next section, Edit Event. For a specific expiration date, select
the desired Expire On date parameters.
The X and Y coordinates for placement on the GIS Map can be entered directly by the user or can be calculated
by placing them on the map via the Device and Event Location selection in the Definitions Module.
Select the Event Type through the drop-down selection. For additional or custom Event Types, contact your
Cubic/Trafficware representative.
Click “Apply” or “OK” to save.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 370

6.11.3 Edit Events
To edit the defined Events, navigate to Definitions…Events…List Events from the Actions
Pane. ATMS will display the existing Events in the system. Select the desired Event from
the list. Highlight the desired Event, then select Edit Event.
In addition to editing the Event parameters, each Event status can be controlled by making
it “Active” or “Inactive” by checking the appropriate box as shown in the figure below.
When an Event is “Inactive”, it will not appear on the GIS map. An Event can be made
“Active” again after it has been “Inactive”. If it had a geo-referenced map location (X and
Y coordinates), it will re-appear on the GIS map when it is activated again.

6.11.4 Delete Events

To delete an Event, navigate to Definitions…Events…List Events from the Actions Pane.
ATMS will display the existing Events. Select the desired Event from the list, the option
to Delete Event becomes available as shown in the figure below. Highlight the target Event
and select Delete Event. A “pop-up” will appear to allow the user to confirm the Delete
function.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 371

6.12 Flex Groups

Flex Groups were developed to allow controllers to be

identified with multiple groups of intersections, allowing more system flexibility and control. A controller can
be a member of any number of Flex Groups.
Flex Groups can be created to use any number of grouping method the system administrator chooses.
In the early stages of implementing your ATMS system, some planning is necessary in order to partition the signal
system network into Groups and Flex Groups. This is for ease of navigation and operation, and to enable ATMS
to deliver efficient real-time communications. Because each local controller can only belong to a single Group,
Flex Groups were developed to allow controllers to be identified with multiple groups, allowing more system
flexibility and control.
Local intersection controllers are typically grouped in the following two ways:

Selection Grouping
Assigning controllers to groups in this manner allows the user to perform an action on the system by referring to
a group of intersections rather than each intersection individually. For example, a Group or Flex Group can be
defined to download the system clock or upload count data with a Selection Group.

Control Grouping
Grouping in this manner allows intersections to be selected and controlled on the basis of arterial control, regional
location, Central or On-Street Master, or common behavior. The picture below shows how a Control Group would
be created based on regional location:

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 372

6.12.1 List Flex Group
To display the existing Flex Groups, select Definitions…Flex Group…List Flex
Groups. ATMS will display all of the available Flex Groups in the main
window. When one of these is selected from the list, the options to Edit or Delete
will become available for selection.
You can select the “+” symbol or “double-click” the Flex Group name to expand
the list. The controllers displayed below the Flex Group are the currently
assigned controllers. To collapse the list, select “-“or “double-click” the Flex
Group name.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 373

6.12.2 Create Flex Group
To create a Flex Group, navigate to Definitions…Flex Group…Create Flex
Group from the Action pane. A basic setup screen like the one shown below
will appear in the main view pane.
First, assign a name for the Flex Group. Next, highlight the newly created Flex
Group and select Edit Flex Group.

6.12.3 Create Flex Group From

You can now create a Flex Group from single or multiple Flex groups by
selecting the particular Flex Groups that you want to use and navigating to
Definitions…Flex Group…Create Flex Group From from the Action pane. A
basic setup screen like the one shown below will appear in the main view pane.
First, select from the list of Flex groups the particular Flex groups that you want
to create the new Flex group from. Next select the Create Flex Group From
action. Then assign a name for the new Flex Group. Next, highlight the newly
created Flex Group and select Edit Flex Group.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 374

Make sure you assign a name to this new Flex Group name as shown above.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 375

6.12.4 Edit Flex Group
To edit the defined Flex Groups, navigate to Definitions…Flex Group…List Flex
Groups from the Actions Pane. ATMS will display the existing Flex Groups in
the system. Select the desired Flex Group from the list. The option to Edit Flex
Group becomes available as shown in the figure below. Highlight the desired
Flex Group, then select the Edit function.
The list of intersections not belonging to the Flex Group will appear on the box
to the right. To add intersection(s) to the Flex Group, highlight the targeted
intersection(s), then select the “Add” button, or “Add All” to place all of the
entire controllers to the list. For the selection of multiple controllers at one time,
use standard windows tools by holding the “Shift” key as you scroll down the
list of controllers or by holding the “Ctrl” key and selecting your controllers via left clicking your mouse.
To remove controllers from the assigned list, highlight the controller(s) on the list on the left. Select the “Remove”
button. Selecting “Remove All” will remove the entire controller list from the Flex Group.
Click “Apply” or “OK” to save.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 376

6.12.5 Delete Flex Group
To delete a Flex Group, navigate to Definitions…Flex Group…List Flex Groups
from the Actions Pane. ATMS will display the existing Flex Groups. Select the
desired Flex Group from the list, the option to Delete Flex Group becomes
available as shown in the figure below. Highlight the target Flex Group and
select Delete Flex Group. A “pop-up” will appear to allow the user to confirm
the Delete function.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 377

6.13 GIS

The GIS section of ATMS provides a toolset to modify and update core GIS
files in the system. These functions include deleting GIS presets from the
Home module GIS Map view, importing new GIS shape files to the system
map, and creating a file of GIS data that can be exported. Relocating or
placing new devices on the GIS Map is performed in the Device and Event
Locations section of the Definition module.

6.13.1 GIS – List Presets

The List Presets option displays the GIS Presets that are created on the
Home Page GIS toolbar. To display the existing Presets, select
Definitions…GIS…List Presets. ATMS will display all of the available
Presets in the main window. When one of these is selected from the list,
the option to Delete Preset becomes available for selection.
When the list of Presets are displayed, it displays four values associated
with it, a Preset ID#, Preset Description (name given to it when created),
User (creator of preset), and the Share status (Public setting “Y” = YES or
“N” = NO).
When the Public value is set to “No”, only the User on the list will see that Preset option on the GIS Toolbar
dropdown. When it is set to “Yes”, all users will have access to that Preset.

The Presets cannot be edited once they are created. If a Preset does not have the desired share properties
or view, it needs to be deleted and re-created.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 378

6.13.2 GIS – Delete Presets
To delete a Preset, navigate to Definitions…GIS…List Presets from the
Actions Pane. ATMS will display the existing GIS Presets. Select the
desired Preset from the list, the option to Delete Preset becomes available
as shown in the figure below. Highlight the target Preset and select Delete
Preset. A “pop-up” will appear to allow the user to confirm the Delete
function.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 379

6.14 Groups
Groups are used to define intersections that are associated
together and controlled (work) together. A controller can only
be assigned to one Group in ATMS, so it recommended that
your controllers are grouped either as a single, agency-wide
Group, or as intersections that are physically tied together.
If controllers are required to be members of multiple
groupings, use the Flex Group method as described above in this section .

6.14.1 List Group

To display the existing Groups, select Definitions…Group…List Groups. ATMS will
display all of the available Groups in the main window. When one of these is selected
from the list, the options to Edit or Delete will become available for selection.
You can select the “+” symbol or “double-click” the Group name to expand the list. The
controllers displayed below the Group are the currently assigned controllers. To collapse
the list, select “-“ or “double-click” the Group name.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 380

6.14.2 Create Group
To create a Group, navigate to Definitions… Group…Create Group from the Action pane.
A basic setup screen like the one shown below will appear in the main view pane.
First, assign a name for the Group. Next, highlight the newly created Group and select
Edit Group as discussed in the section below.

6.14.3 Edit Group

To edit the defined Groups, navigate to Definitions…Group…List Groups from the
Actions Pane. ATMS will display the existing Groups in the system. Select the desired
Group from the list. The option to Edit Group becomes available as shown in the figure
below. Highlight the desired Group, then select Edit Group. The same window as the
Create Group will appear for editing the parameters.
The list of intersections not belonging to the Group will appear on the box to the right.
To add intersection(s) to the Group, highlight the targeted intersection(s), then select the
“Add” button, or “Add All” to place the entire controller list into the Group.

The list of intersections

belonging to the Group will
appear on the box to the left.
To remove intersection(s)
from the Group, highlight the
targeted intersection(s), then
select the “Remove” button.
Selecting “Remove All” will
remove the entire controller
list from the Group.
Click “Apply” or “OK” to
save.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 381

6.14.4 Delete Group
To delete a Group, navigate to Definitions…Group…List Groups from the Actions Pane.
ATMS will display the existing Groups. Select the desired Group from the list. The
option to Delete Group becomes available as shown in the figure below. Highlight the
target Group and select Delete Group. A “pop-up” will appear to allow the user to confirm
the Delete function.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 382

6.15 Incident Trigger
Incident Triggers are system-generated controller actions based on reported
controller alarm inputs or reaching certain congestion thresholds. These Incident
Triggers can cause pre-programmed reactions of other Controllers, Cameras, and
CMS signs. An example of this would be to cause a complete coordinated arterial
to automatically transition to “FREE” operation if a critical intersection in that
arterial issued a “Coord Fail” alarm to ATMS, while also launching a camera
view and instructing the camera to PTZ to a preset to view the street. This feature
can be used to solve a variety of problems that cannot be addressed by time-of-
day control or traffic responsive operation, or can be used in conjunction with
our Traffic Responsive and Adaptive operations. ATMS’s Trigger feature has
been used successfully in control applications that are not predictable and can be triggered by an alarm response.

6.15.1 List Incident Triggers

To display the existing Incident Triggers, select Definitions…Incident
Trigger…List Incident Triggers. ATMS will display all programmed Incident
Triggers in the main window. Note that by selecting one of these from the list,
the options to Edit or Delete Incident Trigger become available as shown in the
figure below.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 383

6.15.2 Create Incident Trigger
To create an Incident Trigger, navigate to Incident Trigger…Create Incident
Trigger from the Action pane as shown to the right. The screen shown below will
appear in the main view pane.
The example below illustrates how a preempt command can be sent down to a
Flex Group of controllers and simultaneously initiate Camera behavior, a CMS
message to the field, and send an e-mail to a group of recipients when an
intersection’s approach reaches a specified congestion level. Any combination
of these behaviors can be initiated by time-of-day, either from a controller’s
incoming alarm or from a programmed state of congestion. Controller(s) can
perform specially commanded Patterns or Preempts but each requires a time value for the Triggered response to
protect the operation.
Because Alarm Triggers can be activated and de-activated by time-of-day, you may want to vary the pattern,
duration and/or flex group assignment by time-of-day and day of week to accommodate varying traffic demands
at the interchange.
In the example below, a Preempt 5 command is downloaded to the assigned Flex Group to hold for a period of
60 seconds when the monitored intersection’s northbound approach reaches a “HIGH” threshold. After this timer
expires, the Preempt will release and the controllers will resume normal operation. Special Flex Groups can be
created solely for the purpose of Alarm Trigger operation.
Note that the Camera and CMS sign responses will remain unless a reversing trigger is programmed or
each device is internally programmed to “Time-Out” to a default behavior.

Any of the alarms listed in Chapter 13 of the NTCIP Controller manual may be used to activate an
Incident Trigger. In order for ATMS to know about the local triggering event, it must be properly
programmed as an “Event” (MM>1>6>1) and an “Alarm” (MM>1>6>4) in the controller.
Also various ATMS Alarms listed in Chapter 4 of this manual may also be used.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 384

To program an Alarm Trigger, select a Start and Stop value for Time Range and Date Range boxes. These values
control the window of time that the incoming alarm will cause an automated triggered response.
The Days box allows for the “Trigger” only on the selected days, regardless of whether it fits within the Date and
Time range selected. Both the Days value and the Start/Stop Time values work together.
The use must select either an Alarm Based or a congestion based trigger by selecting the specific redial button.
For Alarm-based Triggers, select the Alarm, state of the
incoming Alarm (On or OFF), and Controller that will
initiate the “Trigger”. For Congestion-based Triggers,
select the controller’s approach Direction and triggering
Threshold that will initiate the trigger.
To enable either of these categories, the redial button for
the corresponding category must be selected (RED
circle).
The Trigger Data portion of this screen allows the user to
program the Controller(s), Cameras, CMS signs and their
responses to the incoming trigger.
The By selection defines the response controller(s) by
Controller, Flex Group, Group, or Master.
Use the Select box to choose the triggered controller(s).
Check the appropriate radial button for the desired
response, either “by Pattern” or “by Preempt”. If a
Pattern response is chosen, then select a Pattern # (1-48)
and a Timer value, in minutes, for the pattern to run. If a
Preempt response is chosen, then select a Preempt # (1-10) and a Timer value in seconds. After the timer has
expired, the controller will revert back to Time-of-Day operation.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 385

The Timer value allows for a selection
between 1-254 minutes. A value of 255
will keep the Triggered response to
operate infinitely and requires a manual
reversal to disable the response. If a
manual reversal is required, this can be
done by downloading a “Revert” pattern to
the controller(s) by using the “Instant
Pattern” function under
Home…Actions…Real-Time…Instant
Pattern.
The Camera and CMS sections of this
screen enable trigger programs for a
Camera and/or Changeable Message Sign
and their response to the incoming alarm.
For a CMS Trigger, check the box to
enable trigger. Next select the designated
sign in the CMS selection box and the
Message it is to display for the trigger. If
a special Message is to be displayed that is
not available from the drop-down
selection, then a new one can be created
under Definitions…Messages…Create
Message.
The Camera selection defines the response
camera. Next, select a Preset number as
assigned for the camera in the IV&C Relay
Server programming. The IV&C Relay
Server program is sold separately and not
included in the standard installation of
ATMS.
Email Notification is performed through
utilizing User Distribution groups. User
Distribution groups are discussed later in
this chapter.
Any number of users can be assigned to a
User Distribution group, giving added
flexibility to this function. When enabled,
an Email Notification performed each time
the corresponding Incident Trigger occurs.
Click “Apply” or “OK” to save.

The user should not select Email Notifications when doing continuous interval checking.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 386

6.15.3 Edit Incident Trigger
To edit the programmed Incident Triggers, navigate to Definitions…Incident
Trigger…List Incident Trigger from the Actions Pane. ATMS will display the
existing Incident Triggers. Select the desired Incident Trigger from the list, the
option to Edit Incident Trigger becomes available as shown in the figure below.
When Edit Incident Trigger is selected, the same window as the Create Incident
Trigger will appear in the main window for editing the parameters.
Make your editing changes.
Click “Apply” or “OK” to save.

6.15.4 Delete Incident Trigger

To delete an Incident Trigger, navigate to Definitions…Incident Trigger…List
Incident Triggers from the Actions Pane, ATMS will display the existing
Incident Triggers. Select the desired Incident Trigger from the list, the option to
Delete Incident Trigger becomes available as shown in the figure below. Select
Delete Incident Trigger, a “pop-up” will appear to allow the user to confirm the
Delete function.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 387

6.16 Jurisdiction
ATMS provides to the use of Jurisdictions to limit access, editing, and control
privileges for departmental grouping within an agency or within an inter-agency
architecture. This is a way to enable multiple agencies to share the same database.
A user can be assigned to multiple Jurisdictions for enhanced levels of control to
multiple sets of controllers.
A controller can be assigned to multiple Jurisdictions.
ATMS requires that all controllers belong to a Jurisdiction. The default
Jurisdiction during initial setup is named “All”.
Jurisdictional associations for data in the database tables and data displayed on the
client have been implemented. These displays and tables include: Recent Alarms, Alarm History, Current Alarms,
Copy database, Upload (Streetsync) Sync, Database Conversion list, Controllers via Bing maps, GIS maps, Alarm
Notification, Group, Flex Group, Offline List, Incident Trigger, Scheduler lists (by controller, by flex group, by
group) Controller List in reports (both Crystal and DevExpress), and the Saved Criteria for reports now consider
jurisdictions, In addition the controller list in SynchroGreen also consider jurisdictions.

When creating new Controllers and/or Users within ATMS, they will need to be assigned to the
appropriate Jurisdiction(s). Forgetting to do this will limit the access and control to the new Controller
or the new User

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 388

6.16.1 List Jurisdictions
To display the existing Jurisdictions, select Definitions…Jurisdiction…List
Jurisdictions. ATMS will display all of the available Jurisdictions in the main
window. When one of these is selected from the list, the options to Edit or Delete will
become available for selection.
You can select the “+” symbol or “double-click” the Jurisdiction name to expand the
list and display the member controllers of each Jurisdiction. The controllers displayed
below the Jurisdiction are the currently assigned controllers. To collapse the list,
select “-“or “double-click” the Jurisdiction name.

6.16.2 Create Jurisdiction

To create a Jurisdiction, navigate to Definitions…Jurisdiction…Create Jurisdiction.
A new window will appear as shown below to name the new Jurisdiction.
Complete the Name box.
Click “OK” to save and
close.
Next, select List
Jurisdictions and
highlight the newly-
created Jurisdiction. The screen shown below will appear in the main Overview pane.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 389

6.16.3 Edit Jurisdiction
To edit the defined Jurisdictions, navigate to Definitions…Jurisdiction…List
Jurisdictions from the Actions Pane. ATMS will display the existing Jurisdictions in
the system. Select the desired Jurisdiction from the list. The option to Edit
Jurisdiction becomes available as shown in the figure below. Highlight the desired
Jurisdiction, and select Edit Jurisdiction. Two tabs will appear at the top of the main
Overview pane, named “Controller Assignment” and “User Assignment”. The same
window as the Create Jurisdiction will appear for editing the parameters.

Controller Assignment
The list of intersections not belonging to the Jurisdiction will appear on the box to the right. To add intersection(s)
to the Jurisdiction, highlight the targeted intersection(s), then select the “Add” button, or “Add All” to place the
entire controller list into the Group. When a controller has been added to a Jurisdiction, it will move to the box
on the left titled “Assigned Controllers”.

The list of intersections belonging to the Jurisdiction will appear on the box to the left. To remove intersection(s)
from the Jurisdiction, highlight the targeted intersection(s), then select the “Remove” button. Selecting “Remove
All” will remove the entire controller list from the Jurisdiction.

User Assignment
The “User Assignment” tab displays the list of users that are assigned to the chosen Jurisdiction. Users can be
added or removed from Jurisdictional access from this tab instead of navigating to the User Definitions section
discussed in Section 6.22 below. Assigning and removing Users from a Jurisdiction is performed using the same
method as controllers.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 390

To add or remove the entire list of users from either category, select “Add All” or “Remove All”.
Click “Apply” or “OK” to save changes made on either tab.

6.16.4 Delete Jurisdiction

To delete a Jurisdiction, navigate to Definitions…Jurisdiction…List Jurisdictions
from the Actions Pane. ATMS will display the existing Jurisdiction. Select the
desired Jurisdiction from the list, the option to Delete Jurisdiction becomes available
as shown in the figure below. Highlight the target Jurisdiction and select Delete
Jurisdiction. A “pop-up” will appear to allow the user to confirm the Delete function.

6.17 Messages
This section of ATMS allows users with the corresponding user privileges to create and edit
the library of Messages that can be sent to system Changeable Message Signs.
Messages are sent to field CMS signs through the GIS tab in the Home module.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 391

6.17.1 List Messages
To display the existing Messages, select Definitions…Messages…List Messages. ATMS
will display all of the created Messages in the main window. When one of these is selected
from the list, the options to Edit or Delete will become available for selection.

6.17.2 Create Message

To create a new CMS message, navigate to Definitions…Message…Create Message.
A new window as shown below will appear in the main Overview pane.
The “New Message” window will display three line boxes for entry of distinct CMS
sentences. Each set of three lines makes one message. The text entry will support full
ASCII text as supported by the CMS signs. Each line will support up to 44 characters.
A minimum of one line needs to be completed for a valid Message. All three lines do
not need to be present for a valid Message.
Click “Apply” or “OK” to save each message.
If a desired CMS type is not found in the ATMS database, contact your Cubic/Trafficware representative.
CMS signs are added to the GIS Map through the Device and Event Locations function in the Definitions module.
Sending Messages are performed through the CMS layer of the GIS Map.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 392

6.17.3 Edit Message
To edit the defined Messages, navigate to Definitions…Messages…List Messages from
the Actions Pane. ATMS will display the existing Messages in the system. Select the
desired Message from the list. The option to Edit Message becomes available as shown
in the figure below. Highlight the desired Message, then select Edit Message. The same
window as the Create Message window will appear for editing the parameters.
Make your changes and click “Apply” or “OK” to save.

6.17.4 Delete Message

To delete a Message, navigate to Definitions…Message…List Messages from the
Actions Pane. ATMS will display the existing Messages. Select the desired Message
from the list, the option to Delete Message becomes available as shown in the figure
below. Select Delete Message. A “pop-up” will appear to allow the user to confirm
the Delete function.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 393

6.18 Monitor
This section of ATMS sets up the system to automatically retrieve log reports from
Cubic/Trafficware brand Conflict Monitor Units (CMU’s) and Malfunction Monitor
Units (MMU’s). This feature will communicate with the monitors using Ethernet
through the assigned IP address or Serial through the corresponding controller’s serial
port.
For serial communications to the Cubic/Trafficware monitor, a connection from the
controller’s “PC Print” DB25 port to the monitor DB9 port is required. Contact your
Cubic/Trafficware representative for the required cable for this interface.
To set up the monitor interface on the controller, navigate to the Communication General
Parameters screen on the controller (MM>6>1). Set the PC Print port to “Monitor”. Next, set the Communication
Port Parameters for the PC Print port (MM>6>2>2) to the corresponding monitor serial port rate.

Cubic/Trafficware monitors with a programmable LCD screen have a programmable serial port setting.
If your Cubic/Trafficware monitor is not programmable, consult your manual for the fixed serial port
setting.

6.18.1 List Monitors

To display the existing Monitors, select Definitions…Monitors…List Monitors. ATMS
will display all of the available Monitors in the main window. When one of these is
selected from the list, the options to Edit or Delete become available for selection.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 394

6.18.2 Create Monitor
To create a new Monitor, navigate to Definitions…Monitor…Create Monitor. A new
window as shown below will appear in the main Overview pane.
Enter the Name of the monitor. Next, enter the monitor Type (either IP or RS-232). If
a RS-232 monitor is selected, ATMS will instruct the associated controller to retrieve
the monitor data via the serial connection in the cabinet
Click “Apply” or “OK” to save all changes. Select “Cancel” to exit without saving any
changes since you entered the screen.

When Cubic/Trafficware MMU Ethernet is selected for the type, a new box will appear to enter the IP Address.
When the IP addressing method is used, ATMS will communicate directly with the monitor to retrieve the data.
A controller connection is not used with this method.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 395

6.18.3 Edit Monitor
To edit a defined Monitor, navigate to Definitions…Monitors…List Monitors from
the Actions Pane. ATMS will display the existing Monitors in the system. Select
the desired Monitor from the list. The option to Edit Monitor becomes available as
shown in the figure below. Highlight the desired Monitor, then select Edit Monitor.
The same window as the Create Monitor window will appear for editing the
parameters.
Make your changes and click “Apply” or “OK” to save.

6.18.4 Delete Monitor

To delete a Monitor, navigate to Definitions…Monitor…List Monitors from the Actions
Pane. ATMS will display the existing Monitors. Select the desired Monitor from the
list, the option to Delete Monitor becomes available as shown in the figure below. Select
Delete Monitor. A “pop-up” will appear to allow the user to confirm the Delete function.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 396

6.19 Report Criteria
The Report Criteria list is a list of saved report templates from the Reports Module.
Saving commonly used reports to the Report Criteria List makes report generation
quick and easy in future uses.
In the Search Engine of the Reports Module a check box is available for “Save
Criteria” as shown below:

If this box is checked, upon selecting the “Run Report” button to

generate a report a dialog box will appear to name and save all of the
Report Criteria:

Once one or more Report Criteria have been saved, they are listed in the Report Criteria List in the Definitions
Module. To view the list or delete one of its entries, navigate to Definitions…Report Criteria…List Report
Criteria. The full list of all available reports will appear in the main window. To view a saved Report Criteria
template for each report type, you can select the “+” symbol or “double-click” the report name to expand the list
and display the templates of each report. To collapse the list, select “-“ or “double-click” the report name.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 397

 When you return back to that same report, in this example the Field
Alarms report, a new selection box will appear at top of the Search
Engine window named “Saved Criteria”. The available selections in
this box will correspond to the Report Criteria List for each report.
If a report template does not exist for a report type, then the “Saved
Criteria” selection box will not appear.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 398

6.20 Scan Builder
The Scan Builder utility enables the ATMS “Full Status” polling, which includes all controller
inputs and outputs, to be displayed as a distinct “Scan Data” layer on the GIS Map. Due to the
unique design or each intersection and display preferences of each customer, each intersection
must be built by the Scan Builder utility to display within the “Scan Data” layer. Without
creating a Scan Screen for each intersection, the GIS-Scan Data layer will not display when
selected.
To begin building the Scan Layer, navigate to Definitions…Scan Builder…Builder. The Scan Builder utility will
appear in the main Overview pane. The upper half of the Overview pane will display the controller list, and the
bottom will display the Builder tool.
To begin building a Scan Screen, select the intersection you wish to build. When the intersection is highlighted,
the GIS map on the bottom half of the screen will zoom to a localized view of the intersection. You can zoom in
or zoom out for a better view to begin your work.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 399

 Scan Builder Toolbar

The Scan Builder navigation is performed by selecting a toolbar function at the top of the GIS map:

As described above, both layer points must be checked on the Legend, then select one of the following icons:

Zoom-In – Selecting this function will allow the user to click on a point on the map and wrap around a
desired area to zoom.

Zoom-Out – After selecting this, clicking once on the map will zoom out 1 measure of extent.

Pan – This enables the user to “grab” the map and slide it in any direction.

Full Extent – By clicking this icon, the GIS map will zoom out to the fullest extent.

Add Shape – By selecting this icon, the editor will open the builder window to place an object on the GIS
map.

Information – Selecting this function will provide real-time information of the data point using a “Hover
Balloon”, by placing the mouse over the desired map object.

Select Object – Selecting this function enables a specific Scan object to be moved or modified in the Scan
Builder.

Edit Data Point – This function enables editing the selected Scan object parameters.

Copy Data Point – This function enables copying of a selected Scan data point to paste to another area of
the Scan Screen.
Delete Shape – By selecting this option, the targeted scan point will be removed from the GIS map.

Move Object – Selecting this option will enable an object to be moved by the mouse.

Rotate Clockwise – This option will rotate the selected object clockwise each time it is clicked.

Rotate Counterclockwise – This option will rotate the selected object counterclockwise each time it is
clicked.

Length Down – This option will shorten the selected object each time it is clicked.

Length Up – This option will heighten the selected object each time it is clicked.

Width In – This option will narrow the selected object each time it is clicked.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 400

 Width Out – This option will widen the selected object each time it is clicked.

Flip Object – This option will vertically flip the object.

Align Top – This option aligns the selected objects to the top object’s tag.

Align Bottom – This option aligns the selected objects to the bottom object’s tag.

Align Left – This option aligns the selected objects to the leftmost object’s tag.

Align Right – This option aligns the selected objects to the rightmost object’s tag.

Undo – This option will reverse the last action.

Copy Intersection– This option will copy all of the data points to paste to a similarly-designed
intersection. Paste Intersection– This option will paste the copied intersection data points to the
next selected intersection.

To begin the Scan Builder process, select the Add Shape icon. A scan builder shape pallet will appear on
the screen. The Symbols will be accessible in a window. Select a symbol (shape) and move to the area on the
window where you would like to place the symbol. The Symbol selection opens a window of symbols that you
can assign to the scan object.

Once the shape is placed on the map, the window shown below will appear. The window provides the ability to
assign multiple values for each scan point. The screen below shows assignment of RED, YELLOW, and
GREEN for Phase 2.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 401

The Parameter value is the controller output value such as an active Vehicle Phase, Pedestrian Phase, Overlap,
Detector, etc., that is collected during the “Full Status” scan. The Value selection allows selection of the
specific output status, such as RED, YELLOW, and GREEN for the associated Parameter. The Color
selection provides a custom color selection for the Parameter and Value selections. ATMS will automatically
associate the matching Color to the Value, such as green to green, yellow to yellow, and red to red. The
selection of a different Color might be preferred when the coloring of the GIS map background is too similar to
the standard Green/Yellow/Red to provide adequate contrast.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 402

The BLUE circle in the above picture shows the RYG option. By checking this box, the Scan Data window will
automatically populate RED, YELLOW, and GREEN values for the selected Parameter.
To Add, Remove, or Remove All objects on the Scan Builder, highlight the parameter in the builder window, then
select the action.
Select “OK” to save and place the scan point on the intersection map or “Cancel” to exit. After selecting “OK”,
the window will close, and the Scan Builder will place the scan object on the map at the next point the user clicks.
Select “Apply” to save. Failure to do so will cause all of your previous work to be lost back to the last time the
Scan Builder work was saved.

Continue the Scan Builder process until all of the desired data points have been added for each parameter of the
intersection. Each additional data point can be created either through the Add Shape icon or by the Copy
Data Point icon if it will use the same parameters.
When the data point has been placed on the map, it is still in “Edit Mode”, as shown above. Any data point on
the Scan Builder with a box around it is in “Edit Mode”, and can be affected by the next editing action from the
toolbar. It is possible for more than one object to be in “Edit Mode” at one time, and for an editing action to
affect multiple data points at one time.
From the “Edit Mode” state, you can select actions such as Edit, Copy, Delete, Move, Alignment, and other
actions such as resizing and rotating. All of these actions are defined with their corresponding toolbar icons at
the beginning of this section. A data point that is not in “Edit Mode” will only display the data object and not
have the box around it. If you need to Edit or Move an existing data point that is not in “Edit Mode”, choose the

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 403

Select Object icon. After this, the next data point(s) you choose will appear with the “Edit Mode” box
around it. To Select more than one object, hold the “Ctrl” key as you Select each desired object.
A data point parameter can be edited after it has been created, such as changing a Color or Symbol. Editing a
data point parameter can only be performed one data point at a time. After choosing the targeted data point,

select the Edit Data Point icon. The same setup window will appear as during the creation process. Make
your edits and click “OK” to save and close the window.
To delete a data point, select the object so it is identified with the “Edit Mode” box. Select the Delete Shape
icon to remove the data point from the Scan Builder.
A data point can be moved in a dragging fashion be clicking on a data point in “Edit Mode”, choosing the Move
Object icon and dragging it to the desired location.

Using the Clockwise and Counter-clockwise Rotation icons, the selected point(s) will rotate one measure
of extend for click of the rotating icon. Several rotation selections may be necessary to achieve the desired data
point positioning.
Objects can be resized and rotated to fit the intersection geometry and desired look. These action include making
the data point(s) taller , shorter , wider , and narrower . All of these actions are based on the object’s
vertical position. For example, if an “Arrow” parameter is on its side, pointing right or left, the icon will
lengthen the point from the tip of the arrow to its base.

The use of the Flip Object icon will vertically flip the object (top to bottom).

The four Alignment actions (RED circle) can be used to align multiple data points based on the corresponding
side of their data labels. The positioning options will align the data objects based on the outer-most label edge of
the selected data points. In the example above (BLUE circle), the two arrows for the Phase 1 and Phase 6 are
different sizes. If you desire to align the objects based on their data labels, the Alignment action can quickly and
accurately do this.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 404

The Align Right and Align Left functions should be used for the horizontal data points. The Align Top

and Align Bottom functions should be used for the vertical data points. The example below shows

how the Align Left feature moved the bottom data point to align to the “Left Edge” of the top data point.

The Scan Builder provides the ability to Copy data point sets from one intersection to another. To do this, select
a targeted source controller. The figure below shows the selection of Intersection#4 (RED circle). After selecting
the source controller, select the Copy Intersection icon. A confirming message window will appear to confirm
the Copy action (BLUE circle). After performing this action, the Paste Intersection icon will appear for use.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 405

Next, select the targeted intersection from the list to Paste the data points. Select the Paste icon to place all
of the copied data points to the new intersection. The figure below shows the selection of pasting the data points
to Intersection#30 from the list. After pasting the data points, Move, Edit, and Resize them to fit in the new
intersection.

To “Undo” any single previous action in the Scan Builder, select the Undo icon. This function will only
work for the last action. It does not offer the ability to “Undo” beyond the last action.
Before leaving the Scan Builder, select “Apply” to save your work.

After the Scan Builder session is complete, you will need to exit the ATMS client and re-launch it for
the new GIS layer changes to take effect.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 406

6.21 Scheduler
The ATMS Scheduler performs pre-programmed, automated tasks such as full
controller status, data collection, time synchronization, database verifications, etc.
These functions can all be performed manually, but are easily automated to save staff
time and have accurate information ready or more easily accessible for the user. This
information is stored on the server and can be retrieved at any time.
The Scheduler actions also include an Instant Report function, which allows a user to
immediately generate the desired information without waiting for it to be automatically
performed at its scheduled time.

6.21.1 List Schedules

To display the existing Schedules, select Definitions…Scheduler…List Schedules.
ATMS will display all of the programmed Schedules in the main window. When one of
these is selected from the list, the options to Edit or Delete will become available for
selection.
A Schedule can be programmed but not “Active”. This can be seen easily from the list
by observing that the “Days” check boxes are checked or not. A Schedule is not active
if all of the “Days” boxes are unchecked.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 407

6.21.2 Create Schedule
To create a Schedule in ATMS, navigate to Definitions…Scheduler…Create Schedule
from the Navigation Pane. A new screen will appear in the main window.
First, assign a name for the Schedule in the “Description” box. If you are performing
multiple similar Schedules by Flex Group, then consider naming them with slightly
different names. An example of this would be “Full Status – Downtown” for the
downtown area and “Full Status – Hwy 84” for a different Flex Group of controllers.
This will help easily differentiate each Schedule at a later time.
Second, select the Scheduler “Type”. A list and explanation of each “Type” is shown
below.
Next, the “By” box will provide the ability to select the Controller, Flex Group, Group
or Master for the Schedule. Based on the selected “By” value the “Select” box will display the corresponding list
of Controllers, Flex Groups, Groups, or Masters.
Select “Start” and “Stop” value for Time Range and Date Range boxes. These values control the window of time
that the Scheduler will perform the task.

The Days box identifies the specific days for the scheduled task to perform, regardless of whether it fits within
the Date and Time range selected. Both the Days value and the Start/Stop Time values work together.
Lastly, select the “Interval” that you want the Scheduler to perform the task. Intervals can be:
• Continuous
• Minutes
• Hours
• Monthly
Click “Apply” or “OK” to save.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 408

 The Scheduler “Interval” will begin at the selected “Start Time” and “Start Date”, as long as it
corresponds with a selected day. The Scheduler will perform the same task again after the “Interval”
time has expired.

Listed below is a full list of the available Scheduler function types and a brief description/definition:

Scheduler Type Description

Alarm Polling Collect Field Alarms from controller(s)

Alpha Status Collect status from Alpha UPS Supply

Remove old SQL table data and send to destination storage
Archive ATMS server. Executes programming from “Archive Database”
screen
Activate a central master by time-of-day. The subsystem
ATMS Master
assigned to the master determines the Control Group
Generate reports from the Report Criteria list of saved
Auto Reports
report templates.
Executes a Full SQL and Controller Database Backup
Backup ATMS
Copy and directs it to a destination server
CRC Database –Permanent Compare Permanent database using CRC method
CRC Database –Special 1 Compare Special 1 database using CRC method

CRC Database –Special 2 Compare Special 2 database using CRC method

CRC Database –Special 3 Compare Special 3 database using CRC method

CRC Database –Special 4 Compare Special 4 database using CRC method
CRC Database –Special 5 Compare Special 5 database using CRC method

CRC Database –Standard Compare Standard database using CRC method

Daily Email TSP Report Email the TSP report daily
Polls all Alarms, Active Sign Message and Time from the
Daktronics Full Status
assigned Daktronics CMS signs
Daktronics Send Message Send message to the assigned Daktronics CMS sign

Detector Events Collect Detector Failure Information

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 409

 Scheduler Type Description
Download No Verify Database –Permanent Download Permanent database without verification

Download No Verify Database –Special 1 Download Special 1 database without verification

Download No Verify Database –Special 2 Download Special 2 database without verification

Download No Verify Database –Special 3 Download Special 3 database without verification

Download No Verify Database –Special 4 Download Special 4 database without verification

Download No Verify Database –Special 5 Download Special 5 database without verification

Download No Verify Database –Standard Download Standard database without verification
Download Pattern Download a Pattern to override TBC operation

Download Real-Time Download server time to controller(s)

Download Time Smart Sensor HD Download the time to a Smart Sensor HD Device

Download Verify Database –Permanent Download Permanent database with verification

Download Verify Database –Special 1 Download Special 1 database with verification

Download Verify Database –Special 2 Download Special 2 database with verification
Download Verify Database –Special 3 Download Special 3 database with verification

Download Verify Database –Special 4 Download Special 4 database with verification

Download Verify Database –Special 5 Download Special 5 database with verification
Download Verify Database –Standard Download Standard database with verification
Collect all Alarms, R/Y/G, Detector Calls, Scan Data,
Full Status Split History, and all Real-Time information
**Recommended for all ATMS controllers
Full Status GYR only Collect Limited Full status for Serial Controllers
Full Status Ntcip Collect Full Status for NTCIP MIBs only

GPS Time Update the server clock from a local GPS antenna
Polls all Cubic/Trafficware IP-based Temperature Sensors
IP Temp Check
for current temperature
Local Event Collection Local Events from controller(s)
Collects volume and occupancy data from controller(s)
Local Vol./Occ. [1-64]
**Required for Congestion Level GIS layer
Master 48 Vol./Occ. Collects volume and occupancy from master(s)

Master Event Collection Master Events from controller(s)

Set Up a time compare between the server time and the
Real-Time Compare
controller time.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 410

 Scheduler Type Description
Executes an SQL table export from selected files to a
Replicate ATMS
destination server
SDLC MMU Fault Gather MMU Fault report via the SDLC

SDLC MMU Program Gather MMU Program report via the SDLC

SDLC MMU Trace Gather MMU Trace report via the SDLC
Set Opticom Time Download Time-Sync to Opticom Discriminator Card(s)
Collects volume, occupancy and speed data from
Smart Sensor 105
Wavetronix Smart Sensor 105 units
Collects volume, occupancy and speed data from
Smart Sensor HD
Wavetronix Smart Sensor HD units
Speed Traps Collects speed information from detectors
Gathers split information from the assigned controller(s)
Split History
**Already integrated with Full Status
Synchronizes ATMS server time from a specific
Sync Controller Time to Server
controller.
For V76 controllers that have High Resolution Data
Upload Purdue Logs Logging as defined by Purdue University, gather the data
on a scheduled basis.
Upload Drops Upload Drop information from intersection controller
Upload Controller High resolution data logs via an FTP
Upload Purdue Logs
connection and place them in the SQL database
Upload to Permanent Uploads data to Permanent file

Upload to Special 1 Uploads data to Special 1 file

Upload to Special 2 Uploads data to Special 2 file

Upload to Special 3 Uploads data to Special 3 file

Upload to Special 4 Uploads data to Special 4 file

Upload to Special 5 Uploads data to Special 5 file

Upload to Standard Uploads data to Standard file

Upload to Std and Prm Uploads data to Standard and Permanent files

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 411

 Scheduler Type Description
Upload to Upload Uploads data to Upload file

USNO Time – Dial-Up Collects time for US National Observatory via Dial-Up

USNO Time – Internet Collects time for US National Observatory via Internet

Verify Database –Permanent Upload and Compare to Permanent database (In Reports)

Verify Database –Special 1 Upload and Compare to Special 1 database (In Reports)

Verify Database –Special 2 Upload and Compare to Special 2 database (In Report)
Verify Database –Special 3 Upload and Compare to Special 3 database (In Report)
Verify Database –Special 4 Upload and Compare to Special 4 database (In Report)

Verify Database -Special 5 Upload and Compare to Special 5 database (In Reports)

Verify Database –Standard Upload and Compare to Standard database (In Report)

Volume Occupancy Ntcip Collect Ntcip Volume & Occupancy

6.21.3 Create From Schedule

The Create From option allows the user to set up Schedules that are identical or similar
to others without having to create them from scratch.
To Create a Schedule “From” another, navigate to List Schedules, highlight the
schedule you wish to use as a template. Next, navigate to Create From. A new
window will appear in the Overview pane. All of the parameters from the original
Schedule will appear. Assign your new data parameter to the appropriate box.
Click “Apply” or “OK” to save.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 412

6.21.4 Edit Schedule
To edit the defined Schedules, navigate to Definitions…Schedules…List Schedules from the
Actions Pane. ATMS will display the existing Schedules in the system. Select the desired
Schedule from the list. The option to Edit Schedule becomes available as shown in the
figure below. Highlight the desired Schedule, then select Edit Schedule. The same window
as the Create Schedule window will appear for editing the parameters.
Make your changes and click “Apply” or “OK” to save.

6.21.5 Delete Schedule

To delete a Message, navigate to Definitions…Message…List Messages from the Actions
Pane. ATMS will display the existing Messages. Select the desired Message from the
list, the option to Delete Message becomes available as shown in the figure below.
Highlight the target Message and select Delete Message. A “pop-up” will appear to allow
the user to confirm the Delete function.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 413

6.21.6 Instant Report
Instant Reports enables the user to immediately gather data from the field or perform
a system task instead of waiting for a programmed time. This data can then be queried
from the ATMS database as a Report.
To perform an Instant Report, navigate to Definitions…Scheduler…Instant Reports
from the Navigation Pane. A new window will appear for Instant Reports in the
Overview pane.
Select the Instant Report “Type”. A list and explanation of each “Type” is the same
as the Scheduler “Types” as described in Section 5.15.2.
Next, the “By” box will provide the ability to select the Controller, Flex Group, Group
or Master for the Schedule. Based on the selected “By” value the “Select” box will
display the corresponding list of Controllers, Flex Groups, Groups, or Masters. Select
the targeted controller(s).
Select the “Run” button, a pop-up will appear as shown in the above screen. The request is forwarded from the
Client to the Administrator and Comm Server for processing.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 414

6.22 Users
The Users section allows the System Administrator to define and edit user privileges and
control to ATMS system devices, databases, information and other security functions.
Any ATMS function can be enabled or disabled on a function-by-function basis for each
user.
Note: Beginning with ATMS 2.8, both usernames and passwords allow the user to
utilize special characters. When creating new users and /or passwords the user has
to satisfy certain criteria: they have to be between 8-15 characters long, have at least
one capital letter, at least one number and at least one special character.

It is recommended that only a System Administrator has the level of access to Create, Edit or Delete
ATMS users.

6.22.1 List Users

To display the existing Users, select Definitions…User…List Users. ATMS
will display all of the programmed Users in the main window. When one of
these is selected from the list, the options to Edit or Delete will become
available for selection.

6.22.2 Create User

To create a User in ATMS, navigate to Definitions…User…Create User from the
Navigation Pane. A new screen will appear in the main Overview pane. The setup
screen will appear with three tabs at the top, User Details, Permissions and
Preferences, and Jurisdiction Membership. Each of these tabs will require entries for
proper user setup.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 415

 User Details
First, assign a user ID # for the User in the “ID” box. You can manually set the ID# or select the “Auto ID” button
to allow ATMS to assign the next available number to the User.
Next, assign the “User Name” and “Password”. The initial entry of the Password will require a confirming entry
to ensure accuracy. The User Name is case sensitive and will need to be typed identically during log in.
The ID#, User Name, and Password are mandatory entries. ATMS monitors user activity by ID and User Name
The Phone and E-Mail Address boxes are optional entries, however, ATMS ONLY uses the first E-Mail Address
for Incident Notification when it is set for “E-Mail Notification”.
The “Controller User for Dial-Up Only” entries are not mandatory and should only be filled in when using Dial-
Up to controllers in ATMS.
If the agency utilizes domain authentication, simply select the Domain User box. This will allow users to log into
the clients without a password because they are logged into the agency domain. The Domain user option is
specific to agencies that desire an additional layer of protection for access to the ATMS. Beside the correct user
name and the valid Password, the user will need to log in from an agency specific log-in account prior to accessing
ATMS.
Click “Apply” to save and move to the next tab.

Permissions and Preferences

Upon creating a new user, all of the “Permissions and Preferences” will be turned off, which is the “No” value.
The System Administrator can enable each value on a function-by-function basis by placing the mouse over the
“No” and double-clicking. The value will toggle to a “Yes” which enables that function for that User.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 416

When Cubic/Trafficware performs a software update to the system that includes new features, they will
automatically be turned “Off” for system protection. The System Administrator will need to evaluate each new
Permission and Preference setting for each user for the proper system use.
In cases where you wish to turn all of the values “On” or “Off”, double-click the “Select All” at the top of the list.
This will toggle all of the values to “No” or “Yes”. If a function is enabled for a User, the text for the function
will appear in their respective Navigator, Action, and Selected Details panes. If it is disabled, the text for the
function will not appear at all.
It is recommended that only the System Administrator (s) have Edit User Properties enabled to prevent other
users from changing their own system access and control.

The Permissions and Preferences parameters that are related to the AVL Module need to be set as a
“No” value. These parameters are AVL Data, Geo Fence, Landmarks, AVL Module, Segment Editor-
Routes, Vehicles, and Vehicle Triggers.

Select “Apply” to save and move to the next tab.

When the new user privileges are saved, ATMS will immediately implement the new settings, enabling or
disabling each function.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 417

 As Cubic/Trafficware applies periodic updates to your ATMS system, the new features will all be turned
off. This is done to protect the level of control and access until the System Administrator can decide
which users have the new privileges. After a new software update is applied to the server, it is
recommended that the System Administrator review each user’s access privileges.

In ATMS 2.7 a new user property was added under Database permissions called Controller View. This is
specifically for 2070 V76 controllers as well as for V80 controller types. By setting this property to “Yes”, the
Phase times and options screens are ordered as per the controller screens for ease of user entry. By setting this
to “No” the user can move columns on the edit screen ant they will persistently remain in place.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 418

 Jurisdiction Membership
Each User must belong to a Jurisdiction to have access to Controllers. The initial installation will default to a
Jurisdiction named “All”.
It is recommended to create new Jurisdictions that properly reflect your agency and surrounding agencies and
their users. Creating or Editing Jurisdictions is performed in the Definitions…Jurisdictions section as described
in Section 5.11.
The list of Users not belonging to the Jurisdiction will appear on the box to the right. To add a User(s) to the
Jurisdiction, highlight the targeted User(s), then select the “Add” button, or “Add All” to place the entire list of
Users into the Jurisdiction. When a User has been added to a Jurisdiction, it will move to the box on the left
titled “Currently Assigned”.
The list of Users belonging to the Jurisdiction will appear on the box to the left. To remove a User(s) from the
Jurisdiction, highlight the targeted User(s), then select the “Remove” button. Selecting “Remove All” will
remove all of the Users from the Jurisdiction.
Click “Apply” or “OK” to save.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 419

6.22.3 Create User From
This feature allows the System Administrator to create a User from another that
has already been defined in the system. Using the “Create From” utility will
copy all of the base user’s settings from each of the three User Definition tabs,
except for the user-specific field of ID#, User Name, and Password. This is
especially useful when there are groups of users that have similar or identical
control privileges, and can prove to be a valuable time saver in the User setup
process.
To use the Create From function, navigate to Definitions…Users…List Users.
The list of programmed users will appear in the main window. Highlight the
User that is most similar to the new user that you wish to create. When a User
is highlighted, the option to Create From will appear. A new Create User
window will appear, but the settings for Permissions and Preferences and
Jurisdiction Membership will be already copied to the setup.
Assign a unique User ID#, User Name, and Password for the new User.

6.22.4 Edit User Properties

To edit the defined Users, navigate to Definitions…Users…List Users from the
Actions Pane. ATMS will display the existing Users in the system. Select the desired
User from the list, the option to Edit User becomes available as shown in the figure
below. The same window as the Create User will appear for editing the parameters,
including all three tabs: 1) User Details, 2) Permissions and Preferences, and 3)
Jurisdiction Membership.
Enter your changes to each of the tabbed sections.
Click “Apply” or “OK” to save.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 420

6.22.5 Delete User
To delete a User, navigate to Definitions…User…List Users from the Actions Pane.
ATMS will display the existing Users. Select the desired User from the list, the option
to Delete User becomes available as shown in the figure below. Select Delete User.
A “pop-up” will appear to allow the user to confirm the Delete function.

6.22.6 Change Password

If permission is given, a user can change their password using this
command. If the user has permission to change their password the screen
below will come up. Check the box next to Change Password and then
change your password. You must re-enter the new password in the
Confirm field and then apply the changes. Please note that the new
password will take affect after restarting the client.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 421

6.23 User Distribution
The User Distribution list is used to create flexible groups of users for
notification of Incident Triggers. Any combination of Users can be assigned
to a User Distribution list for use. A system User can be a member of multiple
User Distribution lists.

6.23.1 List User Distributions

To display the existing User Distribution lists, navigate to
Definitions…User Distribution…List User Distributions. ATMS will
display the programmed User Distribution list in the main window.
When one of these is selected from the list, the options to Edit or Delete
will become available for selection.
You can select the “+” symbol or “double-click” the User Distribution
name to expand the list. The Users displayed below the User
Distribution name are the currently assigned users. To collapse the list,
select “-“ or “double-click” the User Distribution name.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 422

6.23.2 Create User Distributions
To create a User Distribution list in ATMS, navigate to
Definitions…User Distribution…Create User Distribution from the
Navigation Pane. A new screen will appear in the main Overview. pane.
A setup screen will open a box to name the User Distribution list.
Enter the Name, select Apply or OK to save.
To assign the desired system users to the User Distribution list, next go
to Edit User Distribution Properties.

6.23.3 Edit User Distribution Properties

The Edit User Distribution Properties function is needed to assign Users
to a User Distribution list. To edit a defined User Distribution list,
navigate to Definitions…User Distribution…List User Distributions
from the Actions Pane. ATMS will display the existing User
Distribution list in the system. Select the desired User Distribution
group from the list, the options to Edit and Delete become available as
shown in the figure below.
A new window will appear to select specific users from the list on the
right, and assign them to the User Distribution section on the left. For
the selection of multiple users at one time, use standard windows tools by holding the “Shift” key as you scroll
down the list of users or by holding the “Ctrl” key and selecting your users via left clicking your mouse.
Select the “Add” button to move the selected users to the newly-created User Distribution group, or “Add All”
to place the entire user list into the User Distribution group.
To remove users from the assigned list, highlight the user(s) on the User Distribution list on the left. Select the
“Remove” button. Selecting “Remove All” will remove the entire user list from the User Distribution group.
Click “Apply” or “OK” to save.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 423

6.23.4 Delete User Distribution
To delete a User Distribution, navigate to Definitions…User
Distribution…List User Distributions from the Actions Pane. ATMS
will display the existing User Distribution lists. Select the desired User
Distribution from the list, the option to Delete User Distribution
becomes available as shown in the figure below. Select Delete User.
A “pop-up” will appear to allow the user to confirm the Delete
function.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 424

6.24 User Groups
ATMS provides the ability to create User Groups to control User
Permissions and Preferences for more than one user with a single setting, and
can be a significant time-saver for large agencies. When changes are made to
a User Group permission value, the change will apply to all of the users
subscribed to that User Group instead of having to make the same change for
each user individually. When a User is assigned to a User Group, the selected
Permissions and Preferences values for that User Group will over-ride the
individual settings for that specific user.
Therefore, User Groups should only be used when it is desired to have certain
departments or employee types classified with identical access and control
privileges. By default, Users are not assigned to a User Group. User Groups
need to be created and have Users specifically assigned to them.

Due to the access control of User Groups, it is recommended that only ATMS system Administrator(s)
have access to this section.

6.24.1 List User Groups

To display the existing User Groups, select Definitions…User Groups…List
User Groups. ATMS will display all of the programmed User Groups in the
main window. When one of these is selected from the list, the options to
Create From, Edit or Delete will become available for selection.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 425

6.24.2 Create User Groups
To create a User Group in ATMS, navigate to Definitions…User
Group…Create User Group from the Navigation Pane. A new screen will
appear in the main window. The setup screen will appear with four tabs at the
top, User Details, Permissions and Preferences, Jurisdiction Membership and
Assign Users.

User Details
First select the User Detail tab and assign a User Group number and name in the ID and Username boxes. Click
“Apply” or “OK” to save. The Auto ID button will assign the lowest number available starting with “1”.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 426

 Permissions and Preferences
The Permissions and Preferences tab will display the same control options as the same screen as User definitions.
Upon creating a new User Group, all of the Permissions and Preferences will be turned off, which is the “No”
value. The System Administrator can enable each value on a function-by-function basis by placing the mouse
over the “No” and double-clicking. The value will toggle to a “Yes” which enables that function for that User.
When the factory performs a software update to the system that includes new features, they will automatically be
turned “Off” for system protection. The System Administrator will need to evaluate each new Permission and
Preference setting for each user for the proper system use.

If a function is enabled for a User Group, the text for the function will appear in their respective Navigator,
Action, and Selected Details panes for each User that is subscribed to that group. If it is disabled, the text for the
function will not appear at all.

Jurisdiction Membership
Each User Group must have the corresponding Jurisdictions assigned to it to have access to the Controllers within
the Jurisdiction. Creating or Editing Jurisdictions is performed in the Definitions…Jurisdictions section as
described in Section 5.11.
The list of Jurisdictions not assigned to the User Group will appear on the box to the right. To add a Jurisdiction
to a User Group, highlight the targeted Jurisdiction(s), then select the “Add” button, or “Add All” to place the
entire list of Jurisdictions to the group. When a Jurisdiction has been added to a User Group, it will move to the
box on the left titled “Currently Assigned”.
To remove a Jurisdiction from the User Group, highlight the targeted Jurisdiction(s), then select the “Remove”
button. Selecting “Remove All” will remove all of the Jurisdictions from the User Group.
Click “Apply” or “OK” to save.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 427

 Assign Users
Each User Group provides access control to the Assigned Users within the group. If a User is assigned to a User
Group, the User Group settings will override the specific individual settings.
The list of Users not belonging to the User Group will appear on the box to the right. To add a User(s) to the
User Group, highlight the targeted User(s), then select the “Add” button, or “Add All” to place the entire list of
Users into the User Group. When a User has been added to a group it will move to the box on the left titled
“Currently Assigned”.
The list of Users belonging to the User Group will appear on the box to the left. To remove a User(s) from the
group, highlight the targeted User(s), then select the “Remove” button. Selecting “Remove All” will remove all
of the Users from the User Group.
Click “Apply” or “OK” to save.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 428

6.24.3 Create User Group From
This feature allows the System Administrator to create a User Group from
another that has already been defined in the system. Using the “Create From”
utility will copy all of the base user’s settings from each of the User Group
definition tabs, except for the user-specific field of ID# and Group Name.
This is especially useful when there are groups of users that have similar or
identical control privileges, and can prove to be a valuable time saver in the
User Group setup process.
To use the Create From function, navigate to Definitions…User Group…List
User Groups. The list of programmed user groups will appear in the main
window. Highlight the User Group that is most similar to the new user that
you wish to create. When a User Group is highlighted, the option to Create
From will appear. A new Create User window will appear in the Overview pane, but the settings for Permissions
and Preferences, Jurisdiction Membership, and Assigned Users will be already copied to the setup.
Assign a unique User ID#, Group Name for the new User Group.
Click “Apply” or “OK” to save.

6.24.4 Edit User Group Properties

To edit the defined User Groups, navigate to Definitions…User Groups…List
User Groups from the Actions Pane. ATMS will display the existing User
Groups in the system. Select the desired User Group from the list. The option
to Edit User Group becomes available as shown in the figure below. The same
window as the Create User Group will appear for editing the parameters,
including all four tabs: 1) User Details, 2) Permissions and Preferences, 3)
Jurisdiction Membership, and 4) Assigned Users.
Enter your changes to each of the tabbed sections as needed. The changes to
the User Group will affect all of the Users assigned to the group.
Click “Apply” or “OK” to save.

When the factory applies periodic updates to your ATMS system, all new features will be turned off in
the User and User Group definitions. This is done to protect the level of control and access until the
System Administrator can decide which users have the new privileges. A System Administrator can
turn-on new features for all subscribed users through setting them one time within the User Groups.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 429

6.24.5 Delete User Group
To delete a User Group, navigate to Definitions…User Group…List User
Group from the Actions Pane. ATMS will display the existing User Groups.
Select the desired User Group from the list, the option to Delete User Group
becomes available as shown in the figure below. Select Delete User Group.
A “pop-up” will appear to allow the user to confirm the Delete function.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 430

6.25 Vehicle Classification/Counters – JAMAR File Import
ATMS provides for the ability to import JAMAR road tube count files into the server
database for ATMS report generation. This enables the user to generate a more up
to date report format using the JAMAR counts.
First, navigate to Definitions…Vehicle Classification/Counters JAMAR File Import.
The Overview pane will display a “Browse” window to navigate to the JAMAR count
file as shown below. Browse to the file on your computer or network drive and click
“Open”. This will Import any JAMAR file data using the .txt extension to the ATMS server.
To generate a report of this data, navigate to the Reports module. The JAMAR data can be generated in ATMS
report format by running the report titled “Weekly Road Tube Detector Report” on the main Report list.

The figure below illustrates a sample Weekly Road Tube Detector Report:

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 431

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 432
7 Reports Module

The Reports Module provides the user the ability to generate reports from a library of pre-formatted report
templates from the ATMS database. ATMS stores all imported and system-generated data into the system’s
main SQL database, and makes it available for future report generation. This section will show you how to search
and generate Reports in the ATMS system.
The Reports module offers pre-defined report templates from the following database categories:
• Controller Data (Inventory, Groups, Alarms, Volume/Occupancy, Coordination Reporting, etc)
• Users (Log-In reporting, Upload/Download activity, etc)
• Timing Sheets
• GIS (Incident Reporting)
• Vehicles (Applicable for the FLEET.now and PRIORITY.now modules of ATMS)
• AVL Data (Applicable for the FLEET.now and PRIORITY.now modules of ATMS)
• Purdue High Resolution Data Reports
The list of available Reports is displayed in the Overview pane. We frequently add Report Templates and Timing
Sheets for the Report module. When available, new Reports are added when routine ATMS system updates are
performed.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 433

All functions that are displayed within ATMS are permitted for the user that is logged in. If a specific function
for a user under User Definitions is not permitted for that user, then the item will not appear at all within ATMS.

In order to perform functions within the Reports module, your user privileges need to be enabled under
User Definitions.

7.1 Search Engine for Definitions Module

The list or specific report within the Reports module must be selected using the Search icons on the Navigation
ribbon as shown below. The displayed Reports that the user can select, will be associated with the chosen category
icon.

To navigate to the specific report type, select the category icon and then select the report that you would like to
run via the list on the overview pane. A full list of the available Reports will be displayed on when selecting the
All Reports icon..

Select the desired report, and the specific report Search Engine window will be displayed. The user will fill out
the parameters for their report.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 434

The Report Criteria search does not require that each field have a specific entry. The default “All” will
allow the Search to be wide open for each parameter that has an “All” entry.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 435

7.2 Report List Tools
When a report list is generated and displayed in the main Overview pane as shown above, a toolbar will be
provided in the upper left corner of the pane (Light Blue Circle). This toolbar will provide icons for the following
actions:

Page Setup – Allows the specific setup of the printed page.

Print Preview – Allows the user to preview the appearance of the document.

Print - Allows the displayed report list to print to a printer(s) that are configured to the computer.

Export to Excel – Allows the displayed list to be saved to disk as an Excel document.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 436

7.3 Generating A Specific Report
Select a report type from the Report List in the Overview pane. The Report Criteria search
engine will display selection windows specific to the selected report type. The Report
Criteria search for most report types include drop-down navigation by Controller ID,
Controller Name, Flex Groups, Groups, Master, Begin Date, End Date, Begin Time, and
End Time. Volume and Occupancy reports will also provide drop-down selections for
compass directions and detectors.
The Figure shown to the right illustrates the calendar that will appear when selecting a
Begin Date or End Date. The RED circle marks the current day, which is supplied by the
ATMS server. Use the arrows to navigate to the targeting Month and Year. Click on the
specific day you need for the Report date. It will then appear with a BLUE highlight on
the selected day.
When all of the Report Criteria parameters have been completed, select the “Run Report”
button to generate the report. The new report will appear in the main Overview pane. If
there is no data in the report when it is displayed, then there is no valid data on the server
for the search parameters that were chosen.
NOTE: For some reports such as Split History reports the requested data could be stored
in one of the archived databases of ATMS. If so, the user first needs to select the
appropriate database (Table) and then run the report again in order to see the report
populated with data.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 437

7.4 Report Criteria
To save the Report Criteria as a template for future use, check the “Save Criteria” box at the bottom of the Search
Engine.

The criteria can be used to quickly generate a commonly used report.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 438

7.4.1 Scheduling reports using Report Criteria
When the “Run Report” button is selected, a dialog box will appear to name the Report Criteria template. You
can set up e-mail notification so that the report can be e-mailed to the appropriate personnel once you set up the
scheduler. Please insure that you set up a Criteria name and User or User Group that the report will be distributed
to.

Now go to the scheduler and create a new schedule. By choosing Auto Reports, you will notice that an entry has
been added that matches the newly created report criteria. You may schedule this so that the report is generated
at the time scheduled and it will be e-mailed in .pdf format at the same time.
To reset your search parameters for the Report Criteria search, select “Reset All”. This resets the search
parameters for both windows to “All”. From this point, new entries for the report can be entered.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 439

7.5 High Resolution Data Logging (Purdue) Reports

Automated Traffic Signal Performance Measures are a series of aids that display the high-resolution data from
traffic signal controllers. They are a valuable asset management tool, aiding technicians and managers in the
control of both traffic signal hardware and traffic signal timing and coordination. They allow analysis of data
collected 24 hours a day, 7 days a week, improving the accuracy, flexibility, and performance of signal equipment
and the system as a whole. Cubic/Trafficware provides the high resolution logging facilities that will gather this
data and report it to the ATMS central system. This logging needs the proper controller hardware for it to work,
specifically the national standard Advanced Transportation controller (ATC). Once the data logging is turned on
in an ATC, ATMS can gather the data.

High resolution logging also known as Purdue logging is set up to retrieve ATC logging data via a FTP transfer.
In fact it is the primary way to retrieve data if you do not have the ATMS central system. The Purdue standard
requires that the user be able to retrieve a proprietary data format file from the controller via FTP. The standard
also requires a file naming convention that indicates the collection date and times of the file.

Cubic/Trafficware has automated this FTP retrieval task by adding an Item in the schedule to retrieve the data.
Go to Definitions-> Scheduler and create a Purdue logging schedule as shown below:

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 440

The default logging period in the ATC is one hour, so we have matched the schedule to reflect this default.
Once data gets logged, the user can utilize one of two Controller reports shown below:

The High resolution data is a user selectable feature in ATC’s using

V76_8J or later. The user can select to turn it on or off (default value)
in each controller. When the data is turned on, it is stored in the
controller and should be polled by the central each hour. Keep in mind
that it is estimated that the High Resolution Data for a single controller
will account to 300,000 rows of data in the SQL database for each 24
hour period so the database size will grow exponentially and
accommodations for disk space should be accounted for.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 441

7.5.1 Purdue Coordination Diagram

Selection of this report will graphically chart the detection data against the GYR data in a graphical chart.
Selecting this report will bring up the search bar, where the user can select the intersection along with the
Coordination Phase, Start Color (start of cycle), Phase(s) and Detector(s), Date, Begin Time and End time.

The following is a screen shot from the generated report using the single report mode selection:

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 442

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 443
Multiple pages may be generated. If there are multiple pages they can be selected via the menu bar above the
report display. The menu bar is also used to print data or save data to various formats using the icons on the
menu bar above the report display.

Reading the Chart

The chart below shows data for Phase 2 running during a 100 second Cycle with the coord reference point set to
ENDGRN coordination. To match this selection set up the search window as shown to the right.

Below are samples of Purdue Coordination diagrams generated via an ATMS report.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 444

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 445
There is also a new selection criteria under report Mode to create a side by side report. This will generate
reports for all used phases and overlaps (1 graph per phase and overlap) along with a metrics summary
report. Below is a screen shot of one graph and the metrics summary.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 446

7.5.2 Purdue High Resolution Reports

Data can also be displayed in a High Resolution Data Report. Again select the Report and fill out the the
search criteria.

The following is displayed via this report.

Each page of the report depicts the specific Purdue data, including the coord phase, selected Phase, Output
Color, Purdue enumeration data values, etc.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 447

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 448
7.5.3 Purdue Phase Termination Diagram

Phase terminations can also be charted via this report. In particular Gap Outs, Max Outs, Force Off’s and
Pedestrians can be plotted as shown below.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 449

7.5.4 Purdue Split Monitor Report

Split Data is displayed in this report. Select the Report and fill out the the search criteria.

This report will be generated for each phase. Below is report showing the Split Monitor for Phase 2.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 450

7.6 Summary of Report Types
The table below provides a summary of available Reports available in ATMS. (Please note that some reports
are only available with added modules or hardware interfaces.).

Report Report Name Description

Category
Alpha Alpha UPS Alarm/Fault Report A report of the Alpha UPS Alarms and Faults
AVL AVL Location A history of vehicle locations based on GPS data..
AVL AVL Speed A history of vehicle speeds based on GPS data.
AVL Detected Speed A report of vehicle speed as detected in the field.
AVL Vehicle Classification A report of vehicle classification.
AVL Vehicle Travel Time Report A report of vehicle travel time between fences
AVL Vehicle Trigger Status Report A report of vehicle trigger status
AVL Virtual Priority Report A report of controller priority requests
CMS Daktronics CMS Sign Report A report of the messages downloaded to the CMS
Controller Compare Controllers Database A report to compare controllers database
Configurations configurations
Controller Conflict/MMU Report A report of controllers conflict/MMU upload reports
Controller Controller Communication Errors A report of the controller communication errors.
Controller Controller Pattern A report of controller pattern changes.
Controller Controller Pattern Graph A Graph of controller pattern changes.
Controller CSV Export A report to export raw data in CSV format
Controller Database Comparison Results of compared databases with the server.
Controller Detector Failure Report A report of controller Detector Failures
Controller Detector Failure Report A report of controller Detector Failures using
Threshold threshold data
Controller Field Alarms A history of alarms generated by a controller.
Controller Flex Group Participation A list of each flex groups and their assignment.
Controller Incident Trigger Report A report of Incidents triggers.
Controller Inventory by Drop A list of controllers assigned to each drop.
Controller Inventory by Group A list of controllers assigned to each group.
Controller Inventory by IP Address A list of Controller and their associate IP Address.
Controller Inventory by Master A list of Controllers assigned to each Field Master.
Controller Inventory by Type A list of Controllers and their associated device type.
Controller Logins A history of user logins to a controller.
Controller Opticom(TM) Report A history of the Opticom (TM) log (Data transferred
via the controller)
Controller Ped Failure Report A report of controller ped failure
Controller Preemption Preempts activated by the controller.
Controller RealTime Congestion Data A report of Realtime Congestion Data
Controller Split History with A report of controller Split History
Max/Gap/Force Off
Controller Split Timeline History with A report of the splits during a period of time.
Termination (M/G/F)
Controller Temperature Probe Report A report of controller temperature probe

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 451

Controller TR Master Pattern Change A report of TR Master Pattern change
Controller Transit Priority Report Transit Priority Report
Controller Weekly Road Tube Detector A report of controller Weekly Road Tube Detector
Output Output
Database Timing Sheet - Chronomax A standardized Chronomax timing sheet layout
Database Timing sheet - COH A standardized timing sheet layout organized for
controller data entry
Database Timing Sheet - Condensed A standardized timing sheet layout with only
Layout essential information
Database Timing Sheet - Douglas County A standardized timing sheet layout organized for
controller data entry
Database Timing Sheet - Field Operator A standardized timing sheet layout organized for
Layout controller data entry
Database Timing Sheet - Field Operator A standardized timing sheet layout organized for
Layout 2 controller data entry
Database Timing Sheet - Suffolk A standardized timing sheet layout organized for
controller data entry
Database Timing Sheet - v76 ATC A standardized timing sheet layout organized for
controller data entry
Device Ethernet Device Communications A report of a selected Ethernet device's
Status Report- Multiple Days communications status in multiple Days
Device Ethernet Device Communications A report of a selected Ethernet device's
Status Report- Single Day communications status for a single day
Device Ethernet Device Communications A graphical report of a selected Ethernet device's
Summary Graph- Multiple Days communications status for a single day
Device Ethernet Device Communications A graphical report of a selected Ethernet device's
Summary Graph- Single Day communications status in multiple Days
GIS CAD Incident Report A report of CAD Accident/Construction Incidents.
GIS Incident Report A report of Accident/Construction Incidents.
Parking Parking Facility Vehicle A report of the accumulation for a Parking Facility
Accumulation Report with total traffic in and out of the garage/lot
Parking Parking Facility Vehicle A report of the accumulation for a Parking Facility
Accumulation Report By Gate with total traffic in and out of a selected gate
Purdue Purdue Coordination Diagram A report of Purdue coordination diagram
Purdue Purdue Detector Fault A report of Purdue detector fault
Purdue Purdue High Resolution Reports A report of Purdue High Resolution data log
Purdue Purdue Phase Termination A report of Purdue Phase Termination Diagram
Diagram
Purdue Purdue Split Monitor A report of Purdue Split monitor diagram
SynchroGreen Controller Error Report A report of Controller Errors
SynchroGreen Controller Status Change Report A report of controller Status Change
SynchroGreen Green Utilization Report A report of controller green utilization
SynchroGreen SSM Error Report A report of SSM Errors
SynchroGreen SSM Status Change Report A report of SSM Status Change
SynchroGreen Target Utilization Report A report of controller green utilization
Trip Logger Trip Comparison Report A report of the Trip Comparison
Users Logins A history of user logins to the server.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 452

Users Transactions A history of user downloads to the controller.
Volume External Detector Report External Detector Report
Volume LOS Average by Day A report of controllers LOS average by day
Volume LOS Hourly Day Graph A report of controller LOS hourly day Graph
Volume LOS Multi Day Graph A report of controller LOS Multi day Graph
Volume Turning Movement Graphic of turning movement volume/occupancy per
Volume/Occupancy Graphic controller per intervals from 5 to 60 minutes.
Volume Turning Movement Report of turning movement volume/occupancy per
Volume/Occupancy Report controller per intervals from 5 to 60 minutes.
Volume Volume In/Out per Day Chart that plots intersection throughput within a 24-
hour period
Volume Volume In/Out per Multiple Days Chart that plots intersection throughput during a
multi-day period
Volume Volume/Occupancy per Day Graph of volume/occupancy per day.
Graph
Volume Volume/Occupancy per Lane Graphic of volume/occupancy per lane per intervals
Graphic from 5 to 60 minutes.
Volume Volume/Occupancy per Lane Report of volume/occupancy per lane per intervals
Report from 5 to 60 minutes.
Volume Volume/Occupancy per Multiple Graph of volume/occupancy over multiple days.
Days Graph
Volume Volume/Occupancy Report Report showing either volume or occupancy per
controller per intervals from 5 to 60 minutes.
Volume Volume/Occupancy Report BTS Report showing either volume or occupancy per
controller from the Berkley Transportation Systems
interface per intervals from 5 to 60 minutes.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 453

 Report Tools: Crystal Reports
When a specific Crystal report is generated and displayed in the main Overview pane, a toolbar will be provided
in the upper left corner of the pane. This toolbar will provide icons for the following actions:

Page Forward/Backward – Selecting the corresponding arrow will navigate to the next page of the report
when a multiple-page report is generated.
First Page/Last Page – Selecting the corresponding arrow will navigate to the first or last page of the
report when a multiple-page report is generated.

Go To Page – Allows specific page navigation when a multiple-page report is generated.

Print – Allows the report to print to a printer(s) that are configured to the computer.

Export – Allows the report to be saved as a .pdf, .xls, .doc, or .rtf document.

Zoom – Allows controlled sizing of the report in the Overview pane.

Find Text – Allows a user to search for key words in the report.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 454

 Report Tools: Dev Express
When a specific report is generated and displayed in the main Overview pane, a toolbar will be provided in the
upper left corner of the pane. This toolbar will provide icons for the following actions:

Allows the user to search the report document

Allows the report to print to a printer(s) that are configured

to the computer.

Allows the user to navigate through each page of the

generated report

Allows the report to be saved as a .Pdf, .XLS, .XLSX,

.TXT, or .CSV or Image.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 455

 Sample Reports
Shown below are several samples of reports that can be generated through the Reports module of ATMS:

Figure 7-1: Volume/Occupancy per Multiple Days Graph

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 456

 Figure 7-2: Volume/Occupancy per Lane Graphic

Figure 7-3 : Volume/Occupancy per Lane Report

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 457

 Figure 7-4: Field Alarms Report

Figure 7-5: Preemption Report

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 458

 Figure 7-6: Flex Group Report

Figure 7-7: Controller’s Opticom Report

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 459

 Figure 7-8: Congestion Data Report

Figure 7-9: Incident Report

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 460

 Figure 7-10: Transactions Report

Figure 7-11: Timing Sheet-Field Operator Layout

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 461

 Figure 7-12: LOS Per Day Report

Figure 7-13: Intersection LOS Average Report

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 462

 Figure 7-14: Daktronics CMS Activity Report

Figure 7-15: Wavetronix Radar Counter Report

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 463

Figure 7-16-Alpha UPS Report

Figure 7-17-Detector Failure report

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 464

Figure 7-18- Transit Priority Report

Figure 7-19- Field Operator Layout 2 Report

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 465

Figure 7-20-Trip comparison Report

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 466

Figure 7-21- Split History with Max(M), Gap(G) and Force-off (F) Report

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 467

Figure 7-22- Split Timeline History with Max(M), Gap(G) and Force-off (F) Report

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 468

Figure 7-23- Ethernet Device communication Status report (One Day)

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 469

Figure 7-24- Ethernet Device Communication Graphical report (Multiple Days)

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 470

8 Troubleshooting
This section consists of possible operational challenges and a recommended approach to dealing with them. If
you encounter issues not described in this section, please contact your Cubic/Trafficware representative.
Cubic/Trafficware is not responsible for changes in network and file write settings made after the initial
installation that adversely affect system operation. Diagnosis and repair of adverse changes to the system could
be billable.

Problem Solution
-Your login Username and Password has changed.
Contact the System Administrator.
My Username and Password does not work.
-The Username and Password was not entered in the
correct case-sensitive format.
-The network connection between the Workstation and the
The ATMS Client does not launch.
Server has been lost.
While operating the Client, one of the following
messages appears and the Client shuts down: -The connection between the Workstation and the Server
was lost (temporarily or permanently) while the
1) “Dataset is Null”
application was running.
2) “XIPC Error: Invalid Target Specification”
-It is not defined as the proper controller type.
-It is not assigned to the correct communication “Drop”.
-The controller is not programmed for the correct “Port”
as assigned for that Drop in the Communications Server.
I can “ping” a controller but it will not communicate
with ATMS. -If the controller is a 980/981 series, the host IP must
match the Server IP address. When changes are made on
the controller IP screen (MM>6>5), “Enable” must be
toggled “Off” and “On” to register changes.
-Controller is assigned to the “Offline List”.
I cannot perform an action because it is “Grayed -The action cannot be performed because the proper
Out”. dataset selection has not been performed.
-Simultaneously editing databases of different database
I cannot edit a controller database because the option types cannot be performed. Re-select the controllers to a
to “Edit” is “Grayed Out”. matched database type and the option to “Edit” will
appear.
-From the Search Engine, select “Reset All”, then “Find
I cannot get the List View to show all of the
Now”. This will reset the search parameters and restore
controllers in the system again.
the entire database for view.
-Controllers are defined in the Home Module under
How do I define new Controllers, Cameras,
“Configuration”. All other system components are
Switches and other items to the system?
defined in the Definitions Module under “Devices”.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 471

 Problem Solution
-GIS Presets cannot be edited once created. If they are not
I cannot edit a GIS Preset view.
correct, they need to be deleted and re-created.
-There are no objects defined to that layer type.
-The box for the corresponding GIS layer has not been
I cannot see the desired layer on the GIS map. checked.
-View and Control privileges for that layer are disabled for
your user account under User Definitions.
I can see the desired GIS layer but cannot control the -The circular button for the corresponding GIS layer has
devices on it. not been checked.
-The specific section of the Definitions Module that you
When I am working in the Definitions Module, the
are using does not require the Search Engine to find the
Search Engine does not always appear.
parameters.
-Select the “Print” option while editing a database. The
option to select any specific section of the database will
appear.
How do I print timing sheets in ATMS? - Multiple timing sheet formats are available in the Reports
Module. Select each intersection with the Search Engine.
-Utilize a custom Excel Timing Sheet through the Excel
Export Utility.
-The option to turn off the audible alert for alarms is
How do I turn off the audible alarm?
available under User and User Group definitions.
-The controller is not assigned to the Jurisdiction that you
The controller that I want to edit is “Grayed Out”.
are a member of.
-When a controller is created, it does not belong to any
When I created a new controller, it is “Grayed Out” Jurisdiction, shielding it from all users until it is assigned.
and not available to use. Navigate to Jurisdictions in the Definitions Module and
assign it to the appropriate Jurisdictions.
A controller(s) is not showing active communication -The controller has not been assigned to a Group or Flex
status on the List or GIS map and it should. Group that is polling for “Full Status” in the Scheduler.
A controller(s) is showing active communication -Select “Clear Comm Status” function in the Home
status (Online or Offline) but it is not assigned for Module or “Clear the Comm Buffer” under “Setup” on the
“Full Status”. Communications Server.
-A controller can only belong to one Group. “Flex
I tried to assign a controller to a second Group and
Groups” are available for additional grouping with no
the system will not let me.
limitations.
-Use the Report Type Search Engine in the upper left of
After running a report, I cannot get the full report list the Reports Module. Select “Reset All”, then “Find Now”.
to appear for running a new report type. This will refresh the report lookup parameters and all of
the reports will appear.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 472

 Problem Solution
-The Administrator program on the Server has been shut
Upload and Download functions appear to be down or has closed.
working, but Full Status, Alarms, and Scans do not
work. -The controller has not been assigned to a Group or Flex
Group that is polling for “Full Status” in the Scheduler.
-There is no data in the SQL database for the search
parameters that you have chosen, such as the date and time
When I generate a report, the report template appears for a specific controller. Verify or widen your search
but there is no data on the report. parameters.
-The Communication Server and/or Administrator was not
running at the time the data was available for retrieval.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 473

9 Client Installation Notes
This section outlines the typical installation steps in installing a Client workstation.

9.1 Requirements
9.1.1 Hardware Requirements

RAM: 2 GB (minimum free available) - 4 GB recommended

Hard disk space : at least 5GB free

9.1.2 Software Requirements

Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows 10

Microsoft .NET 4.5.2
Microsoft Visual C++ 2013 Redistributable (x86)
Microsoft Visual C++ 2015 Redistributable (x86)

9.2 Upgrade installed Client

Restart client
Verify IP address of server at logon prompt by clicking on “Server:”

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 474

 Enter in a Name, IP Address, and Port (default is 80). Click update to change existing entry or add
to add new entry. Click Save.

9.3 Fresh Install – Download Installers

Open up a web browser and enter in the URL bar the ATMS server’s IP address followed by
/streetwise2ws/default/aspx

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 475

Download Microsoft .NET 4.7.1 Runtime
Download ATMS Workstation Prerequisites
Download Microsoft Visual C++ 2013 Redistributable (x86)
Download Microsoft Visual C++ 2015 Redistributable (x86)
Download Microsoft Visual C++ 2017 Redistributable (x86)
Download ATMS Start Setup
Download ATMS Client Setup
9.3.1 Install Prerequisites

Run “NDP452-KB2901907-x86-x64-AllOS-ENU.exe” to install .NET Runtime

Run Microsoft Visual C++ 2013 Redistributable (x86)
Run Microsoft Visual C++ 2015 Redistributable (x86)
Run “ATMSClientPrereqisites.EXE” to install Workstation Prerequisites and click Next

Select Naztec folder path for Destination Directory and click Next

Click Next to install

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 476
ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 477
 When prompted to install or repair Redistr1.1 click install/repair and click Finish

Click Close

When prompted to install or repair Microsoft Visual C++ click install/repair for all Redistributable
selections (2012, 2015,2017. The follow two sscreens show the 2012 Visual C++ Redistributable
install:

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 478

 Click Close

Click Finish

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 479

9.3.2 Install Client

Run ATMSClient.exe and click Next

Select installation directory and click Next

Click Next to Install

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 480

Click Finish

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 481

Next the Synchro Integration program will be installed. The following screen will be shown.

Click Next to install and Finish to complete the installation. Then click Cancel when prompted to restart

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 482

Execute ATMS.Streetwise2App.EXE and click Next

Select correct path of naznt/bin folder and click Next

Click Next to Install

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 483

Click Finish

Run ATMS Client by double clicking icon on desktop

Enter in IP and Port number of ATMS server (Steps 14-18 do not apply to upgrades)

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 484

Click Next

Select correct path of naznt/bin folder and click Next

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 485

Click Next to Install

Click Finish

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 486

9.4 Troubleshooting

PROBLEM:
Client won't start after login.

Possible Errors:
Error: System.NullReferenceException: Object reference not set to an instance of an object.

SOLUTION:
**Before launching ATMS client after performing steps make sure all streetwise processes are killed in task
manager.

Troubleshooting steps on client workstation machine:

1. Verify XIPC service is started in Windows Services. Open command prompt in admin mode and
run >net start xipcownd

2. Verify server IP address in [HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\Naztec\ATMSStart\ATMS]

3. Verify server IP address in “\naznt\bin\StreetWise2Setup.exe.cfg” (v4.5.46.50 and up) on client side

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 487

 4. Make sure all StreetWise processes are killed in task manager. Then startup the client.

5. Verify Ports below are open on ATMS server and not blocked by a firewall.
xipcetc 4000/udp
xipcetc 4000/tcp
xipcserv 4001/tcp

PROBLEM:
Unable to download install files. Can’t reach Streetwise website.

SOLUTION:
The client install files are located on the ATMS server under \Naztec\ATMSWS\Setup\

Install files listed below:

1. NDP451-KB2858728-x86-x64-AllOS-ENU.exe
2. vcredist_x86.exe (2013 Visual C++ Run-time)
3. vc_redist.x86.exe (2015 Visual C++ Run-time)
4. ATMSClientPrereqisites.EXE
5. ATMSClient.exe
6. ATMS.Streetwise2App.EXE

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 488

10 Glossary
This section consists of an explanation of commonly used terms within this manual regarding the use of ATMS:

Term Definition
Software application that controls the priority of inbound and
outbound field communications. It also executes all Scheduler
Administrator or “Admin”
programming for the system. This program also resides on the
main ATMS server hardware.
A field Event that has occurred in the controller and has been
Alarm programmed to be reported immediately to the ATMS system.
They can be set to notify users.
Consists of the last 100 incoming alarms to the system. This tab
Alarm History is populated each time a login occurs and is updated as new alarms
are received. Shown as a tab in the main user interface.
Trim an older portion of the database to reduce the file size and
Archive Database
store it for later retrieval.
Backup Database Create a copy to store in case of server failure.
BBS Battery Back-up System
CCTV Closed Circuit TV (Video)
A “virtual” controller within ATMS that performs the same
Central Master management and control tasks as an on-street Master Controller.
(Sold Separately)
Client The main software interface on each workstation.

CMS Changeable Message Sign

Software application that resides on the main ATMS server. It
controls the utilization of all inbound and outbound
Communications Server or “Comm Server”
communications to the controllers and what method each uses
such as FSK, Dial-Up, etc.
Section of the user interface where all of the setup is done with
Definitions Module
the exception of the controllers.
Device Any ATMS equipment that is not a Controller or Chronomax.

Event Also known as an “Incident”.

Field Chooser Acts as a view filter to hide/show the desired data to the user.
A user-defined set of controllers that have no limitations to how
Flex Group many or which controllers. A controller can belong to a limitless
number of Flex Groups to serve a multitude of tasks.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 489

 Term Definition
An automated polling task in the Scheduler program that is
executed once-per-second by the Administrator program. Full
Full Status
Status collects all dynamic field data including status and alarms,
in the assigned controller(s).
Geographical Interface System. Operates as the base mapping
GIS system for ATMS and establishes a graphical reference point for
ATMS devices on the interface.
A pre-determined zoom level in the GIS that is set by the user for
GIS Preset
repetitive use.
A user-defined set of controllers. A controller can belong to only
Group one group in the system. For advanced applications use Flex
Grouping.
GUI Graphical User Interface
Section of the user interface where the system control and
Home Module monitoring is performed. Controller definition and setup is also
done in the Home Module.
Also known as a “Tool-Tip” in Microsoft programs. When the
Hover Balloon mouse is positioned over an object, its data appears in a dynamic
window.
Gives the ability to instantly perform an activity that is usually
Instant Report
programmed in the Scheduler for a specific time.
A named department or agency that operates within specific
Jurisdiction
control authorization.
Controller that operates an intersection at the lowest level of
Local Controller control. It can run independently as programmed, or accept
override commands from a Master controller or ATMS.
LOS Level of Service (ATMS uses Circular 212)
Controller that can operate an intersection, as well as issue
Master Controller
commands to assigned Local Controller such as time, pattern, etc.
Located on the Left Side of each module of ATMS. Consists of
Navigator Pane
the control Actions, Search Engine, and Module selection.
A controller that is kept outside of the online system so it doesn’t
Offline Controller
produce communication failures to the system.
The official record copy of the database that is or should be
Permanent Database
running in the controller on the street.
PTZ Camera Pan/Tilt/Zoom Camera
Alarms that have been received since login. Shown as a tab in the
Recent Alarms
main user interface.
Replicate Database Create a copy of selected sections of the database for Export.

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 490

 Term Definition
Section of the user interface where reports can be generated from
Reports Module
the systems SQL Database.
An informational graphic screen that illustrates the status of the
Scan Screen
incoming intersection data.
An override command for the TBC operation of a
School Zone Manual Flash
Cubic/Trafficware Chronomax Time Clock.
Software application in the main user interface that provides quick
Search Engine
data filtering.
ATMS provides 5 full databases for special use. These are named
Special Databases
as Special 1-5.
Microsoft “Structured Query Language” is a relational model
SQL
database server format that ATMS utilizes.
The working copy of the database that is edited before
Standard Database
downloading.
The person(s) in charge of setting the level of access and control
System Administrator
for all users in the system.
Upload Database The last database copy that was uploaded from the field.
A function of ATMS that compares the newly uploaded database
to the database that is supposed to be in the field. This acts to
Verify Database
protect from database contamination or unauthorized changes
during downloads.
VU COM Cubic/Trafficware video communication card

THANK YOU
FOR YOUR BUSINESS!

ATMS Operations Manual – June 2019 Page 491